Skip to main content
Tiffin Motorhomes Knowledge Base

Mercedes Sprinter Van: Operator's Manual

Overview

1. Combination Switch
     Turn Signals 
     High Beam
     Windshield wiper
     Rear passenger compartment window wiper
2. Steering-wheel buttons
3. DIRECT SELECT lever
4. Inside rearview mirror 
     Digital inside rearview mirror
5. Overhead control panel
6. Device installation frame, e.g. for mounting a tachograph or the switch clock for the stationary heater
7. Sun visor
8. Front passenger window lifter
9. Central locking system
10. Stowage compartment cover
11. Front passenger stowage compartment or tachograph housing
12. Cup holders
13. Climate control system 
14. MBUX multimedia system display
15. MBUX multimedia system control elements
16. 12V socket
17. 230V socket
18. Opens and closes the electric sliding door
19. Hazard warning lights
20. Vehicles with KEYLESS START: key slot
21. USB port
22. Start/stop button
23. Right-hand switch panel
     Activates/deactivates all-wheel drive
     Engages/disengages LOW RANGE
     Activates/deactivates DSR
     Raises/lowers the vehicle level
     Engages/disengages power take-of
     Activates/deactivates working speed control (ADR)
     Activates/deactivates cargo compartment ventilation
     Activates/deactivates the beacon
24. Steering wheel paddle shifters
25. Opens the hood
26. Left-hand switch panel
    Sets the working speed (ADR)
27. Light switch
    Headlamp range adjuster
28. Adjusts the driver's seat
29. Seat heating
    Central locking system
30. Driver's window lifter

 

Instrument cluster with display (color)
1. Speedometer
2.  ESP
3.  Distance warning
4.  Seat belt not fastened 
5.  Turn signal lights
6. Instrument cluster display
7.  Tire pressure loss warning lamp
8.  Engine diagnosis
9.  Preglow and malfunction in preglow system
10. Tachometer
11.  and  Parking brake applied
12.  and  Brakes
13.  Electrical malfunction
14. Electric power steering malfunction 
15. Coolant temperature indicator and  coolant too hot
16.  Electric parking brake (yellow)
17.  Restraint system
18.  High beam
19.  Low Beam
20.  Standing lights
21. Fuel level indicator and   fuel reserve with fuel filler cap location indicator
22.  Fog light
23.  Rear fog light
24.  Brakes (yellow)
25.  ABS malfunction
26.  ESP deactivated

 

Instrument cluster with display (black and white), with steering wheel buttons
1. Speedometer
2.  ESP
3.  Distance warning
4.  Seat belt not fastened
5. Turn signal lights
6. Display of indicator and warning lamps
 At least one door is not completely closed
 Tire pressure loss
 Electric power steering malfunction
 Electrical malfunction
 SOS emergency call system (Mercedes-Benz emergency call system)
 Active Brake Assist switched off
 ATTENTION ASSIST switched off
 Lane Keeping Assist inactive
 Highbeam Assist
 (white) Lane Keeping Assist active and ready to issue warnings and  (red) Lane Keeping Assist issuing a warning
7.  Engine diagnosis
8.  Preglow and malfunction in preglow system
9. Tachometer
10.  and  Parking brake applied
11.  and  Brakes
12.  Reserve fuel
13. DEF supply low
14.  LOW RANGE active
15.  Electric parking brake (yellow)
16. Instrument cluster display
17.  Restraint system
18.  High beam
19.  Low beam
20.  Standing lights
21.   Fog light
22.  Rear fog light
23.  Brakes (yellow)
24.  ABS malfunction
25.  ESP deactivated  

 

Version 1 of the overhead control panel
1. Sun visors
2. Breakdown assistance call button (Mercedes me connect)
3.  Activates/deactivates interior protection
Activates/deactivates the bus interior lighting
4.  Switches the left-hand reading light on/of
5.  Switches automatic light control on/off
6.  Switches the front interior lighting on/off
7.  Switches the rear interior lighting on/off
8. Switches the right-hand reading light on/off
9.  Switches tow-away alarm on/off
10. Eyeglasses compartment
11.  SOS emergency call system
12. ATA indicator lamp 

 

Version 2 of the overhead control panel
1. Sun visors 
2.  Switches the left-hand reading light on/off
3.  Switches automatic light control on/off
4. Switches the front interior lighting on/off
5. Switches the rear interior lighting on/off
6. Switches the right-hand reading light on/off

 

Version 3 of the overhead control panel
1. Sun visors
2.  Switches automatic light control on/off
3.  Switches the front interior lighting on/off
4.  Switches the rear interior lighting on/off

 

Version 4 of the overhead control panel
1. Sun visors
2. Switches the interior lighting on/off

 

Overhead control panel for vehicles with bus equipment
1. Sun visors
2.  Breakdown assistance call button
3.  Activates/deactivates the bus function
4.  Switches the left-hand reading light on/off
5.   Switches automatic light control on/off
6.  Switches the front interior lighting on/off
7.  Switches the rear interior lighting on/off
8.  Switches the right-hand reading light on/of
9. Switches reading lights in the passenger compartment on/of
10. Eyeglasses compartment

 

Door control panel of vehicles with electrically adjustable seat
1. Adjusting the outside mirrors
2. To unlock/lock the central locking system
3. Switching seat heating on/off
4. To adjust the front seats electronically
5. Operating the memory function
6. Opens the door
7. To open/close the right-hand side window
8. To open/close the left-hand side window

 

Door control panel of vehicles without electrically adjustable seat
1. Adjusting the outside mirrors
2. Switching seat heating on/off
3. To unlock/lock the central locking system
4. Opens the door
5. To open/close the right-hand side window
6. To open/close the left-hand side window

 

1. Checking and refilling operating fluids
Starting assistance
2. Buttons for the SOS emergency call system and breakdown assistance
3. Warning lamp
Safety vest
First-aid kit (soft sided)
4. Vehicles with rear wheel drive: hydraulic jack and tire-change tool kit
5. Hazard warning light system
6. B-pillar, driver's side at the level of the door handle
QR code for accessing the rescue card
7. Disconnecting the starter battery
8. Tire pressure table at the base of the driver's seat
9. Fuel filler flap with information label on fuel type
10. Flat tire

 

Example: Spare wheel

General Notes

Environmental Protection 

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to operating conditions and personal driving style

The pollutant emission of the vehicle is directly related to the vehicle's operation.

Operate the vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner to make a contribution to environmental protection. To do this, observe the following recommendations on operating conditions and your personal driving style.

Operating conditions:

  • Make sure that the tire pressures are always correct.
  • Do not transport any unnecessary weight (e.g. a roof luggage rack which is no longer required).
  • Observe the service intervals. A regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection.
  • Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style:

  • Do not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine.
  • Do not warm up the vehicle while stationary.
  • Drive carefully and maintain a sufficient distance to other vehicles.
  • Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration and braking.
  • Shift gears in good time and use each gear only up to 2/3 of its maximum engine speed.
  • Switch off the vehicle in stationary traffic.
  • Drive in a fuel-efficient manner. Pay attention to the ECO display for a fuelefficient driving style.

Environmental issues and recommendations

It is recommended that you re-use or recycle materials instead of just disposing of them.

The relevant environmental guidelines and regulations serve to protect the environment and should be followed carefully.

Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to not using recycled reconditioned components

Mercedes‑Benz AG offers recycled reconditioned components and parts with the same quality as new parts. The same entitlement from the Limited Warranty is valid as for new parts.

  • Use recycled reconditioned components and parts from Mercedes‑Benz AG.
NOTE Effectiveness of the restraint systems impaired due to the installation of accessories, repairs or welding

Air bags and emergency tensioning devices, as well as control units and sensors for the restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas in your vehicle:

  • Door frames
  • Roof frame
  • Doors
  • Door pillars
  • Sills
  • Seats
  • Cockpit
  • Instrument cluster  
  • Center console

Notice

  • Do not install any accessories such as audio systems in these areas.
  • Do not carry out any repairs or welding.
  • Have accessories retrofitted at a qualified specialist workshop.

If you use parts, tires, wheels or safety-relevant accessories which have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz , the operating safety of the vehicle may be jeopardized. Safety-critical systems such as the brake system may malfunction. Only use Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts or parts of equal quality. Use only tires, wheels and accessory parts that are approved for your vehicle model.

Mercedes-Benz tests original parts, conversion parts and accessory parts that have been approved for your vehicle model for reliability, safety and suitability. Despite ongoing market research, we are unable to assess other parts. We therefore accept no responsibility for the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if they have been officially approved or independently approved by a testing center.

In some other countries, certain parts are officially approved for installation or modification only if they comply with legal requirements. All MercedesBenz Genuine Parts satisfy these requirements. Make sure that all parts are suitable for your vehicle.

Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) and the engine number when ordering Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts.

Information about Attachments, bodies, installations and conversions

Notes on body/equipment mounting directives For safety reasons, have bodies produced and installed in accordance with the valid MercedesBenz body/equipment mounting directives. These body/equipment mounting directives ensure that the chassis and body form one unit and that the greatest possible level of operational and driving safety is achieved.

Both vehicle manufacturers and body manufacturers must always ensure that the products they manufacture come into circulation only in a safe state and do not pose any risks to people. Otherwise, there may be consequences under civil, criminal or public law. All manufacturers are responsible for the products that they have manufactured. Manufacturers of attachments, bodies, installations and conversions must guarantee compliance with Directive 2001/95/EC on general product safety.

Mercedes-Benz recommends the following procedure for safety reasons:

  • Do not make any other changes to the vehicle.
  • Obtain approval from the dealer named on the inside title page in the event of deviations from the approved body/equipment mounting directives.

Acceptance tests performed by public test bodies or official approvals do not rule out safety risks.

Observe the information about Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts.

WARNING Risk of accident and injury in the event of improper conversions or changes to the vehicle

Conversions or changes to the vehicle can prevent systems or components from functioning properly and/or jeopardize the vehicle's operational safety.

  • Always have conversions or changes to the vehicle carried out at a qualified workshop.

If you intend to make changes to your vehicle, Mercedes-Benz strongly recommends that you contact the dealer. They will give you all the information you need. There may be a charge for this service.

If body manufacturers and dealers make modifications that affect the final inspection of the engine, vehicle or equipment, they must accept sole responsibility for the vehicle. This also applies to marking and documenting the vehicle parts affected by the changes that they make.

You are responsible for ensuring and providing evidence that the following conditions are met:

  • The vehicle complies with all relevant standards and regulations that are affected by the modification.
  • The modified vehicle still meets the vehicle safety standards and emissions laws and regulations.
  • The modification does not impair the safety of the vehicle.

Mercedes-Benz is not responsible for the final inspection, product liability or warranty claims resulting from modification. This applies to the following points:

  • The modified components or systems
  • The resultant violation of emissions laws and regulations or vehicle safety standards
  • All consequences resulting from the modified, less safe or even faulty vehicle

Mercedes-Benz accepts no responsibility as final manufacturer or for the resultant product liability.

Notes on the radiator

Even seemingly minor changes to the vehicle, such as attaching a radiator grille in winter, are not permitted. Do not cover the radiator. Do not use any thermal mats, insect protection covers, etc. Otherwise, the values of the vehicle's diagnostic system will be distorted. Some of these values are prescribed by law and must be correct at all times.

Notes on the cargo floor

The factory equips the vehicle with a wooden or plastic cargo floor; this is an integral part of the vehicle structure. If you have the cargo floor removed, the vehicle body may be damaged. Load securing will then be impaired and the maximum loading capacity of the tie-down points will no longer be guaranteed. Therefore, do not have the cargo floor removed.

Notes on the partition

Without a partition, vehicles that are approved as commercial vehicles (N1, N2) do not fulfill ISO 27956, which describes the equipment for properly securing a load in delivery vehicles. If the vehicle is used to transport goods, retrofitting the partition is strongly recommended, as properly securing the load in vehicles without a partition will always be complex.

Operator's Manual

This Operator's Manual describes all models, as well as standard and optional equipment of your vehicle that was available at the time of going to press. Country-specific differences are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. Therefore, your vehicle's equipment may differ from that in the descriptions and illustrations.

The original purchase agreement for your vehicle contains a list of all the systems in your vehicle.

Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Note on vehicles that are equipped by body manufacturers

Always observe the body manufacturer's operating instructions. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

Service and Vehicle Operation

Warranty

The Limited Warranty for your vehicle is in accordance with the warranty terms and conditions in the Service and Warranty Information booklet.

Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will replace and repair all factory-installed parts in accordance with the terms of the following warranty terms and conditions:

  • New Vehicle Limited Warranty
  • Exhaust System Warranty
  • Emission Systems Warranty
  • California, Connecticut, Maine, Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island and Vermont Emission Control System Warranty
  • State Warranty Enforcement Laws ("Lemon Laws")

Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessories Warranties. These are available at any authorized MercedesBenz Center.

Note: Should you lose your Service and Warranty Information booklet, have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replacement. The new Service and Warranty Information booklet will be posted to you.

Vehicle operation outside the USA or Canada

When you are traveling abroad with your vehicle, observe the following points:

  • service points or replacement parts may not be available immediately.
  • unleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalytic converter may not be available. Leaded fuel can cause damage to the catalytic converter.
  • the fuel may have a considerably lower octane number. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage.

Certain Mercedes-Benz models are available in Europe through the European Delivery Program.

For more information, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or write to one of the following addresses:

In the USA:

Daimler VANS USA, LLC

European Delivery Department

One Mercedes-Benz Drive

Sandy Springs, GA 30328

In Canada:

Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.

European Delivery Department

98 Vanderhoof Avenue

Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

 

Maintenance information

Your customer service advisor will record every service for you in the Service and Warranty Information booklet.

Information on Roadside Assistance

Roadside Assistance offers technical help in the event of a breakdown. Your calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

1-877-762-8267 (USA)

1-800-387-0100 (Canada)

You can find further information in the Roadside Assistance brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance" section in the Service and Warranty booklet (Canada). You will find both in the vehicle document wallet.

Information on changing address or owner

In the event of a change of address, please send us the "Notification of Address Change" in the Service and Warranty Information booklet or simply call the Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-877-762-8267 or Customer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. This way, if necessary, we can reach you in a timely fashion.

If you sell your Mercedes, please leave the entire literature in the vehicle so that it is available to the next owner. If you have purchased a used vehicle, please send us the "Notice of Purchase of Used Car" in the Service and Warranty Information booklet or call the Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-877-762-8267 or Customer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.

Risk of danger due to substances that are hazardous to health

In compliance with Proposition 65 ("Prop65"), the following detachable label has been added to each vehicle sold in California:

Operating Safety

WARNING Risk of accident due to malfunctions or system failures

If you do not have the prescribed service/ maintenance work or any required repairs carried out, this could result in malfunctions or system failures.

  • Always have the prescribed service and maintenance work as well any required repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

 

WARNING Risk of accident or injury due to incorrect modifications on electronic component parts

Modification of electronic components, their software or wiring could impair their function and/or the function of other networked component parts or safety-relevant systems. This can endanger the operating safety of the vehicle.

  • Never tamper with the wiring and electronic component parts or their software.
  • You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Observe the "Vehicle electronics" section in "Technical data".

WARNING Risk of fire caused by flammable material on hot exhaust system components

Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system.

  • When driving on an unpaved road or offroad, check the vehicle underside regularly.
  • In particular, remove trapped plant parts or other flammable material.
  • If there is damage, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

 

NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to driving too fast and due to impacts to the vehicle underbody or suspension components

In the following situations, in particular, there is a risk of damage to the vehicle:

  • The vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a high curb or an unpaved road
  • The vehicle is driven too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a curb, speed bump or pothole
  • A heavy object strikes the underbody or suspension components

In situations such as these, damage to the body, underbody, suspension components, wheels or tires may not be visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, may no longer absorb the resulting force as intended.

If the underbody paneling is damaged, flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can collect between the underbody and the underbody paneling. These materials may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system.

  • Have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
  • If driving safety is impaired while continuing your journey, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, while paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Declarations of Conformity and Notes on Driving in Different Countries Vehicle Installed Radio Components

USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

  1. These devices may not cause harmful interference
  2. These devices must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment."

 

Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

  1. These devices may not cause interference
  2. These devices must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device".

USA: "Wireless charging system for mobile devices (Model: WMI2 Wireless Mobile Interface): This Device complies with Part 18 of the FCC Rules."

The name and address of the responsible party is: 

peiker acustic GmbH

Max-Planck-Str. 28-32 61381

Friedrichsdorf Germany

Diagnostics Connections

The diagnostics connection is a technical interface in the vehicle. It is used, for example, during repair and maintenance work or for reading out vehicle data in a specialist workshop. Diagnostic devices should therefore be connected only in a qualified specialist workshop.

WARNING Risk of accident due to connecting devices to the diagnostics connection.

If you connect devices to the diagnostics connection of the vehicle, the function of vehicle systems and operating safety may be impaired.

  • For safety reasons, we recommend that you use and connect only products approved by an authorized MercedesBenz Service Center.

 

WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell.

Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.

This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle.

  • Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.
  • Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals.
  • Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another.

 

NOTE Battery discharging from using devices connected to the diagnostics connection

Using devices at the diagnostics connection drains the battery.

  • Check the charge level of the battery.
  • If the charge level is low, charge the battery, e.g. by driving a considerable distance.

The connection and use of another device on the diagnostics connection can have the following effects:

  • Malfunctions in the vehicle system
  • Permanent damage to vehicle components

Please refer to the warranty terms and conditions regarding this.

In addition, connecting equipment to the diagnostics connection can lead to emissions monitoring information being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions inspection during the main inspection.

Notes on changes to the engine output

Output increases can cause:

  • Change the emission values.
  • Lead to malfunctions.
  • Result in consequential damage.

The operating safety of the vehicle is not guaranteed in all situations.

Any tampering with the engine management in order to increase the engine output will lead to the loss of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty and other warranty entitlements.

If you sell the vehicle, inform the buyer of any alterations to the vehicle's engine output. If you do not inform the buyer, this may constitute a punishable offense under national legislation.

Qualified specialist workshop

A qualified specialist workshop has the necessary special skills, tools and qualifications to correctly carry out any necessary work on your vehicle. This particularly applies to work relevant to safety.

Always have the following work on the vehicle carried out at a qualified specialist workshop:

  • Safety-relevant works
  • Service and maintenance work
  • Repair work
  • Modifications as well as installations and conversions
  • Work on electronic component parts

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz for this purpose.

Vehicle registration

Mercedes-Benz may ask its service centers to carry out technical inspections on certain vehicles. The quality or safety of the vehicle is improved as a result of the inspection.

Mercedes-Benz can only inform you about vehicle checks if it Mercedes-Benz has your registration data.

In the following cases your vehicle may not be registered to you yet:

  • you did not purchase your vehicle at an authorized specialist dealer.
  • your vehicle has not yet been inspected at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

It is advisable to register your vehicle with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible about any change in address or vehicle ownership. You can do this, for example, at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Correct use of the Vehicle

If you remove warning stickers, you or others may fail to recognize the dangers. Leave warning stickers in position.

Observe the following information in particular when operating the vehicle:

  • Safety notes in these operating instructions
  • Technical data for the vehicle
  • Traffic rules and regulations
  • Laws pertaining to motor vehicles and safety standards

Multi Purpose Vehicle 

WARNING Risk of accident when the center of gravity is too high.

The vehicle may start to skid and rollover in the event of sudden steering maneuvers and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions.

  • Always adapt your speed and driving style to the vehicle's driving characteristics and to the prevailing road and weather conditions

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.

Unsafe operation of the vehicle can result in an accident or rollover, as well as serious or even fatal injuries.

In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. You and all vehicle occupants should always wear seat belts.

Notes for persons with electronic medical aids

Mercedes-Benz AG cannot, despite carefully developing vehicle systems, completely rule out the interaction of vehicle systems with electronic medical aids such as cardiac pacemakers.

In addition, there are components built into the vehicle that, regardless of the operating status of your vehicle, can generate magnetic fields on a par with permanent magnets. These fields can be found, for example, in the area around the multimedia and sound system or also in the seating area, depending on the vehicle equipment.

For this reason, the following can occur in isolated cases, depending on the aids used:

  • Medical aids malfunctioning
  • Adverse health effects

Observe the notes and warnings of the manufacturer of the medical aids; if in doubt, contact the device manufacturer and/or your doctor. If there is continuing uncertainty concerning the possibility of medical aids malfunctioning, Mercedes-Benz AG recommends using only few electrical vehicle systems and/or maintaining a distance from the components.

Only have repairs and maintenance work in the area of the following components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop:

  • Vehicle components carrying live voltage
  • Transmission antenna
  • Multimedia system and sound system

If you have any queries or suggestions, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Information on problems with your vehicle

If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the problem diagnosed and rectified.

If the problem is not resolved to your satisfaction, please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center again or write to one of the following addresses.

In the USA:

Daimler VANS USA, LLC

Customer Assistance Center

One Mercedes-Benz Drive

Sandy Springs, GA 30328

In Canada:

Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.

Customer Relations Department

98 Vanderhoof Avenue

Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

 

"Reporting safety defects"

USA only:

The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes\-Benz USA, LLC.

Für Übersetzung: To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153) ; go to https://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590, USA. You can find more information on vehicle safety at: https://www.safercar.gov

Canada only:

The following text is published as required of manufacturers under subsection 18.4 (4) of the Motor Vehicle Safety Regulations.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport Canada in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz Canada Inc.

If Transport Canada received similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz Canada Inc.

To contact Transport Canada, you may call the Defect Investigations and Recalls Division toll-free in Canada at 1-800-333-0510 or 819-994-3328 in the Gatineau-Ottawa area or internationally; may also go to the following websites for more information:

  • English: www.tc.gc.ca/recalls
  • French: www.tc.gc.ca/rappels

Limited Warranty

NOTE Damage to the vehicle arising from violation of these operating instructions.

Damage to the vehicle can arise from violation of these operating instructions.

Such damage is not covered by either the Limited Warranty or the new or used-vehicle warranty.

  • Observe the instructions in these operating instructions on proper operation of your vehicle as well as regarding possible vehicle damage.

QR codes for rescue card

The QR code stickers are affixed to the B-pillar on the driver's and front passenger side. In the event of an accident, emergency services can use the QR code to quickly determine the corresponding rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card contains the most important information about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the routing of the electric lines.

Further information can be obtained at https:// www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code

Data Storage Data Processing in the Vehicle

Electronic control units

Electronic control units are installed in your vehicle. Control units process data which they receive from vehicle sensors, for example, generate themselves or exchange between themselves. Some control units are required for the safe operation of your vehicle, some assist you when driving, such as driver assistance systems, while others enable convenience or infotainment functions.

The following provides you with general information regarding data processing in the vehicle. Additional information regarding exactly which data in your vehicle are collected, saved and transmitted to third parties, and for what purpose, can be found in the information directly related to the functional characteristics in question in their respective Operator's Manual. This information is also available online and, depending on the vehicle equipment, digitally.

Personal Data

Every vehicle is identified by a unique vehicle identification number. Depending on the country, this vehicle identification number can be used by, for example, governmental authorities to determine the identity of the owner. There are other possibilities for using data collected from the vehicle to identify the owner or driver, such as the license plate number. Therefore, data generated or processed by control units may be attributable to a person or, under certain conditions, become attributable to a person. Depending on which vehicle data are available, it may be possible to make inferences about, for example, your driving behavior, your location, your route or your use patterns.

Legal Requirements regarding the disclosure of data

If legally required to do so, manufacturers are, in individual cases, legally obliged to provide governmental entities, upon request and to the extent required, data stored by the manufacturer. For example, this may be the case during the investigation of a criminal offense.

Governmental entities are themselves, in individual cases and within the applicable legal framework, authorized to read out data from the vehicle. In the case of an accident, information that can help with an investigation can, therefore, be taken from the air bag control unit, for example.

Operational data in the vehicle

This is data regarding the operation of the vehicle, which have been processed by control units.

This includes the following data, for example:

  • Vehicle status information such as the speed, longitudinal acceleration, lateral acceleration, number of wheel revolutions or the fastened seat belts display
  • Ambient conditions, such as temperature, rain sensor or distance sensor

Generally, these are volatile data and will not be stored beyond the period of operation but will only be processed within the vehicle itself. Control units, for example vehicle keys, often contain data memories. Their use permits the temporary or permanent documentation of technical information about the vehicle's operating state, component loads, maintenance requirements and technical events or malfunctions.

Depending on the technical equipment, the following data are stored:

  • Operating status of system components, such as fill levels, tire pressure or battery status
  • Malfunctions or malfunctions in important system components, such as lights or brakes
  • System reactions in special driving situations, such as air bag deployment or the intervention of stability control systems
  • Information on events in which the vehicle is damaged

In certain cases, it may be required to store data that would have otherwise been temporary. This may be the case if the vehicle has detected a malfunction, for example. If you use services such as repair services and maintenance work, stored operational data as well as the vehicle identification number can be read out and used. They can be read out by service network employees, such as workshops and manufacturers or third parties, such as breakdown services. The same is true in the case of warranty claims and quality assurance measures.

In general, the readout is performed via the legally prescribed port for the diagnostics connection in the vehicle. The operational data that are read out document technical states of the vehicle or of individual components and assist in the diagnosis of malfunctions, compliance with warranty obligations and quality improvement. To that end, this data – in particular information about component loads, technical events, malfunctions and other malfunctions – may be transmitted along with the vehicle identification number to the manufacturer. In addition, the manufacturer is subject to product liability. For this reason, the manufacturer also uses operational data from the vehicle, for example, for recalls. These data can also be used to examine the customer's warranty and guarantee claims. Malfunction memories in the vehicle can be reset by a service outlet or at your request as part of repair or maintenance work.

Convenience and infotainment functions

You can store convenience settings and individual settings in the vehicle and change or reset them at any time. Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes the following settings, for example:

  • Seat and steering wheel positions
  • Suspension and climate control settings
  • Individual settings, such as interior lighting

Depending on the selected equipment, you can import data into vehicle infotainment functions yourself. Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes the following data, for example:

  • Multimedia data, such as music, films or photos for playback in an integrated multimedia system
  • Address book data for use in an integrated hands-free system or an integrated navigation system
  • Entered navigation destinations
  • Data on the use of Internet services

These data for convenience and infotainment functions may be saved locally in the vehicle or they may be located on a device which you have connected to the vehicle, such as a smartphone, USB flash drive or MP3 player. If you have entered these data yourself, you can delete them at any time. These data are transmitted from the vehicle to third parties only at your request. This applies, in particular, when you use online services in accordance with the settings that you have selected.

Smartphone integration (e.g. Android Auto or Apple CarPlay®)

If your vehicle is equipped appropriately, you can connect your smartphone or another mobile end device to the vehicle. You can then control them by means of the control elements integrated in the vehicle. The smartphone's picture and sound can be output via the multimedia system. Simultaneously, specific items of information are transferred to your smartphone. Depending on the type of integration, this includes position data, day/night mode and other general vehicle statuses. For more information, please consult the Operator's Manual for the vehicle or the infotainment system. This integration allows the use of selected smartphone apps, such as navigation or music player apps. There is no additional interaction between the smartphone and the vehicle, particularly active access to vehicle data. The type of additional data processing is determined by the provider of the app being used. Which settings you can make, if any, depends on the specific app and the operating system of your smartphone.

Online Services

Wireless network connection

If your vehicle has a wireless network connection, data can be exchanged between your vehicle and other systems. The wireless network connection is made possible by the vehicle's own transmitter and receiver or by a mobile end device that you have brought into the vehicle, for example, a smartphone. Online functions can be used via this wireless network connection. This includes online services and applications/apps provided to you by the manufacturer or by other providers.

Manufacturer's own services

Regarding the manufacturer's online services, the individual functions are described by the manufacturer in a suitable place, for example, in the Operator's Manual or on the manufacturer's website, where the relevant data protection information is also given. Personal identification data may be used to provide online services. Data is exchanged via a secure connection, e.g. the manufacturer's designated IT systems. Any personal data which are collected, processed and used, other than for the provision of services, is done so exclusively on the basis of legal permission. This is the case, for example, for a legally prescribed emergency call system, a contractual agreement or when consent has been given.

You can have services and functions, some of which are subject to a fee, activated or deactivated. This excludes legally prescribed functions and services, such as an emergency call system.

Services of third parties

If you use online services from other providers (third parties), these services are the responsibility of the provider in question and subject to that provider's data protection conditions and terms of use. As a general rule, the manufacturer has no influence on the content exchanged.

For this reason, when services are provided by third parties, please ask the service provider in question for information about the type, extent and purpose of the collection and use of personal data.

Onboard Logic Unit (OLU)

The Onboard Logic Unit (OLU) is available to commercial customers.

It contains control units, including antennas for connection via wireless networks, that permit the exchange of data between your vehicle and other systems. The control units can be used in conjunction with service provided by a third party. Under certain circumstances, these services may alter the basic configuration of the vehicle and could affect the performance of certain vehicle functions.

For further information about specific services, read the Operator's Manual of the third-party provider. For further information about the Onboard Logic Unit, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

If you, yourself, do not own and are not responsible for the vehicle, you may not know the current status of the Onboard Logic Unit. For further information concerning the services which are currently active, including any data which may be being processed as defined by the GDPR, please contact the person responsible for the vehicle.

Data protection rights

Depending on the country, the equipment and functions of your vehicle, and the services and service offerings used, you are entitled to different data protection rights. Further information on data protection and your data protection rights can either be found on the manufacturer's website or you will receive this information as part of the various services and service offers. There, you will also find the contact information for the manufacturer and its data protection officer.

At a workshop, for example, with the support of a specialist and possibly for a fee, you can have data read out which is stored only locally in the vehicle.

Event Data Recorders

USA only:

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

  • How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
  • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
  • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
  • How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties such as law enforcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is needed to read data that is recorded by an EDR, and special equipment is required. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have the special equipment, such as law enforcement, can read the information by accessing the vehicle or the EDR.

EDR data may be used in civil and criminal matters as a tool in accident reconstruction, accident claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extract data from the EDR is commercially available, Daimler Vans USA, LLC ("DVUSA") expressly disclaims any and all liability arising from the extraction of this information by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz personnel.

DVUSA will not share EDR data with others without the consent of the vehicle owners or, if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the lessee. Exceptions to this representation include responses to subpoenas by law enforcement; by federal, state or local government; in connection with or arising out of litigation involving DVUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or, as required by law.

Warning: The EDR is a component of the Restraint System Module. Tampering with, altering, modifying or removing the EDR component may result in a malfunction of the Restraint System Module and other systems.

State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that conflict with federal regulation are preempted. This means that in the event of such conflict, the federal regulation governs. As of December 2016, 17 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.

Information on registered trademarks

  • Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG Inc.
  • DTS™ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.
  • Dolby® and MLP™ are registered trademarks of DOLBY Laboratories.
  • ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are registered trademarks of Mercedes‑Benz Group AG.
  • HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Gentex Corporation.
  • iPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.
  • Burmester® is a registered trademark of Burmester Audiosysteme GmbH.
  • Microsoft® and Windows Media® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
  • SIRIUS® is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio Inc.
  • HD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiquity Digital Corporation.
  • Gracenote® is a registered trademark of Gracenote, Inc.
  • ZAGAT Survey® and related brands are registered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC

Restraint System 

Protection provided by the Restraint System

The restraint system includes the following components:

  • Seat belt system
  • Air bags
  • Child restraint system
  • Child seat securing systems

The restraint system can help prevent the vehicle occupants from coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior in the event of an accident. In the event of an accident, the restraint system can also reduce the forces to which the vehicle occupants are subjected.

Only a seat belt which is worn correctly can provide the intended level of protection. Depending on the detected accident situation, Emergency Tensioning Devices and/or air bags supplement the protection offered by a correctly worn seat belt. Emergency Tensioning Devices and/or air bags are not deployed in every accident.

Vehicles with a co-driver bench seat: the Emergency Tensioning Device on the co-driver seat is triggered whether or not the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle.

In order for the restraint system to provide the intended level of protection, each vehicle occupant must observe the following information:

  • Fasten seat belts correctly.
  • Sit in an almost upright seat position with their back against the seat backrest.
  • Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if possible.
  • Always secure persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in an additional restraint system suitable for this vehicle.

However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every accident situation. In particular, the seat belt and air bag generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. It is also not possible to completely rule out the risk of injury caused by the air bag deploying.

Restraint System

Protection provided by the restraint system

The restraint system includes the following components:

  • Seat belt system
  • Air bags
  • Child restraint system
  • Child seat securing systems

The restraint system can help prevent the vehicle occupants from coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior in the event of an accident. In the event of an accident, the restraint system can also reduce the forces to which the vehicle occupants are subjected.

Only a seat belt which is worn correctly can provide the intended level of protection. Depending on the detected accident situation, Emergency Tensioning Devices and/or air bags supplement the protection offered by a correctly worn seat belt. Emergency Tensioning Devices and/or air bags are not deployed in every accident.

Vehicles with a co-driver bench seat: the Emergency Tensioning Device on the co-driver seat is triggered whether or not the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle.

In order for the restraint system to provide the intended level of protection, each vehicle occupant must observe the following information:

  • Fasten seat belts correctly.
  • Sit in an almost upright seat position with their back against the seat backrest.
  • Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if possible.
  • Always secure persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in an additional restraint system suitable for this vehicle.

However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every accident situation. In particular, the seat belt and air bag generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. It is also not possible to completely rule out the risk of injury caused by the air bag deploying.

Limitations of the protection provided by the restraint system

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to modifications to the restraint system

Vehicle occupants may no longer be protected as intended if alterations are made to the restraint system.

  • Never alter the parts of the restraint system.
  • Never tamper with the wiring or any electronic component parts or their software

If it is necessary to adjust the vehicle to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details.

USA only: contact our Customer Assistance Center at 1‑877‑762‑8267.

Restraint system functionality

When the vehicle is switched on, a self-test is performed, during which the  restraint system warning lamp lights up. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system are then functional.

Restraint system malfunction

A malfunction has occurred in the restraint system in the following cases:

  • The  restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the vehicle is switched on.
  • The  restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey.
WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system

Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident.

  • Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Function of the restraint system in an accident

How the restraint system works is determined by the severity of the impact detected and the type of accident anticipated:

  • frontal impact
  • Rear impact
  • side impact
  • Overturning or rollover

The activation thresholds for the components of the restraint system are determined based on the evaluation of the sensor values measured at various points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. The triggering/deployment of the components of the restraint system should take place in good time at the start of the collision.

Factors that can be seen and measured only after a collision has occurred cannot play a decisive role in air bag deployment, nor do they provide an indication of air bag deployment.

The vehicle may be deformed significantly without an air bag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of vehicle deceleration is not high. Conversely, an air bag may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. If very rigid vehicle parts, such as longitudinal members, are hit, the vehicle deceleration may be high enough for this to happen.

Depending on the detected deployment situation, the components of the restraint system can be activated or deployed independently of each other:

  • Emergency Tensioning Device: frontal impact, rear impact, side impact, overturning, rollover
  • Driver's air bag, co-driver air bag: frontal impact
  • Side impact air bag: side impact
  • Window curtain air bag: side impact, overturning, rollover, frontal impact

Only when the vehicle is fitted with a side impact air bag or window curtain air bag.

WARNING Risk of burns from hot air bag components

The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has been deployed.

  • Do not touch the air bag parts.
  • Have a deployed air bag replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.

For your safety and that of your passengers, it is recommended that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident. Take this into account, particularly if a Emergency Tensioning Device is triggered or an air bag is deployed.

If the Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggered or an air bag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released:

  • the bang will not generally affect your hearing.
  • in general, the powder released is not hazardous to health but may cause short-term breathing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma or other pulmonary conditions.

Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing difficulties.

Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling or environmental protection measures. National guidelines regarding waste disposal must be observed. In California see https://dtsc.ca.gov/. Using the search function, you will find information on perchlorate, for example.

Seat Belts

Protection provided by the seat belt

Always fasten your seat belt correctly before starting a journey. Only a seat belt which is worn correctly can provide the intended level of protection.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrectly fastened seat belt

If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot perform its intended protective function. In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction suddenly.

  • Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly.

Always observe the instructions about the correct driver's seat position and adjusting the seat.

In order for the correctly worn seat belt to provide the intended level of protection, each vehicle occupant must observe the following information:

  • The seat belt must not be twisted and must fit tightly and snugly across the body.
  • The seat belt must be routed across the center of the shoulder and as low down across the hips as possible.
  • The shoulder section of the seat belt should not touch your neck nor be routed under your arm or behind your back.
  • Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat.
  • Push the lap belt down as far as possible across your hips and pull tight with the shoulder section of the belt. Never route the lap belt across your abdomen. Pregnant women must also take particular care with this.
  • Never route the seat belt across sharp, pointed, abrasive or fragile objects.
  • Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time.
  • Never secure objects with a seat belt if the seat belt is being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. Also ensure that no objects, e.g. a cushion, are ever placed between a person and the seat.

The seat belts on the following seats are equipped with a child seat safety feature:

  • Co-driver seat
  • Rear seats

Activate or deactivate the child seat safety feature of the seat belt.

If children are traveling in the vehicle, always observe the instructions and safety notes on "Children in the vehicle"

Always observe the instructions for loading the vehicle when securing objects, luggage or loads.

Limitations of the protection provided by the seat belt

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position

The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. In particular, you could slip beneath the seatbelt and become injured.

  • Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey.
  • Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder belt is routed across the center of your shoulder.

 

WARNING Risk of injury or death when additional restraint systems are not used for persons with a smaller stature

Persons under 5 ft (1.50 m ) tall cannot wear the seat belt correctly without a suitable additional restraint system.

  • Always secure persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in a suitable restraint system

 

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to damaged or modified seat belts

Seat belts cannot provide protection in the following situations:

  • The seat belt is damaged, has been modified, is extremely dirty, bleached or dyed
  • The seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty
  • Modifications have been made to the Emergency Tensioning Device, seat belt anchorage or seat belt retractor

Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modified or damaged seat belts could tear or fail in the event of an accident, for example. Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices could accidentally trigger or fail to function as intended.

  • Never modify the seat belt system, for example the seat belt, seat belt buckle, Emergency Tensioning Device, seat belt anchorage and seat belt retractor.
  • Make sure that the seat belts are undamaged, not worn and clean.
  • Always have the seat belts checked immediately after an accident at a qualified specialist workshop.

Only use seat belts that are approved by the dealer specified in the publication details for your vehicle.

WARNING Risk of injury or death from deployed pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices

Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices that have been deployed are no longer operational and are unable to perform their intended protective function.

  • Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices immediately replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

For your safety and that of your passengers, it is recommended that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident.

NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt

  • If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it may become trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism.
  • Always ensure that an unused seat belt is fully retracted.

Fastening and adjusting seat belts

If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the seat belt retractor locks. The seat belt strap cannot be pulled out any further.

  • Always engage seat belt tongue 1 of the seat belt into seat belt buckle 2 of the corresponding seat.
  • To adjust the seat belt height: press button 3 on the seat belt outlet and slide the seat belt outlet to the desired position.
  • To engage the seat belt outlet: release button 3 and ensure that the seat belt outlet engages.

NOTE Deployment of components of the restraint system when the front passenger seat is unoccupied and a seat belt is buckled

When the front passenger seat is unoccupied and the seat belt tongue of the seat belt is engaged in the seat belt buckle, components of the restraint system may deploy unnecessarily on the front passenger side, e.g. the Emergency Tensioning Device.

  • Only buckle the seat belts as intended.

Releasing the seat belts

Press the release button in the seat belt buckle and guide the seat belt back with the seat belt tongue.

Function of the seat belt warning system for driver and co-driver

The  seat belt warning lamp in the Instrument Display is a reminder that all vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts correctly.

The  seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds each time the vehicle is switched on.

A warning tone may also sound. After the vehicle is started, the seat belt warning goes out as soon as the driver's and the co-driver's seat belts are fastened.

While driving, the seat belt warning lights up in the following cases:

  • if the vehicle's speed is higher than 15 mph (25 km/h) and the driver's or co-driver's seat belt is not fastened
  • if the driver or co-driver unfasten their seat belt during the journey

Airbags

Overview of air bags

  1. Driver's air bag
  2. Window curtain air bag
  3. Co-driver air bag
  4. Side impact air bag

The installation location of an air bag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol. When enabled, an air bag can provide additional protection for the respective vehicle occupant.

Possible protection per air bag:

  • Driver's air bag, co-driver air bag: head and ribcage
  • Window curtain air bag: head
  • Side impact air bag: ribcage and pelvis
WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injuries if the front passenger air bag is enabled

If the front passenger air bag is enabled, a child on the front passenger seat may be struck by the front passenger air bag in the event of an accident.

  • NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIR BAG. This can result in the DEATH of or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD.

When installing a child restraint system on the codriver seat, observe the vehicle-specific information. Also be sure to observe the notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing child restraint systems on the co-driver seat.

Protection provided by the airbags

Depending on the accident situation, an airbag may supplement the protection offered by a correctly fastened seat belt.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position

If you deviate from the correct seat position, the airbag cannot perform its intended protective function. Each vehicle occupant must make sure of the following:

  • Fasten seat belts correctly. Pregnant women must take particular care to ensure that the lap belt never lies across the abdomen.
  • Adopt the correct seat position and keep as far away as possible from the airbags.
  • Observe the following information.
  • Always make sure that there are no objects between the airbag and vehicle occupant.

To avoid the risks resulting from the deployment of an airbag, each vehicle occupant must observe the following information in particular:

  • Before starting your journey, adjust your seat correctly; both the driver's and co-driver seat should be moved as far back as possible. When doing so, always observe the information on the correct driver's seat position.
  • Only hold the steering wheel by the steering wheel rim. This allows the airbag to be fully deployed.
  • Always lean against the seat backrest when the vehicle is in motion. Do not lean forwards or against the door or side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbags.
  • Always keep your feet on the floor. Do not put your feet on the cockpit, for example. Your feet may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbag.
  • If children are traveling in the vehicle, observe the additional notes.
  • Always stow and secure objects correctly.

Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an airbag from functioning correctly. Each vehicle occupant must always make sure of the following in particular:

  • There are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and an airbag.
  • There are no objects between the seat, door and door pillar (B-pillar).
  • There are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks.
  • There are no accessories, such as mobile navigation devices, mobile phones or cup holders, within the deployment area of an airbag, e.g. on the cockpit, on the door, on the side window or on the side trim. In addition, no connecting cables, tensioning straps or retaining straps must be routed or attached to the vehicle within the deployment area of an airbag. Always comply with the accessory manufacturer's installation instructions and, in particular, the notes on suitable places for installation.
  • There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects in the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place.

Limitations of the protection provided by air bags

WARNING Risk of injury due to modifications to the cover of an airbag

If you change the cover of an airbag or attach objects, e.g. even stickers, to it, the airbag may no longer function as intended.

  • Never modify the cover of an airbag.
  • Do not attach any objects to the cover.

The installation location of an air bag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol. Objects in the deployment area of an air bag may prevent the air bag from functioning correctly.

WARNING Risk of injury from objects in the deployment area of an airbag

Objects in the deployment area of an airbag can hinder or prevent the correct deployment of the airbag.

The airbag may then deploy in an uncontrolled manner and may even cause additional injuries to the vehicle occupants by deploying. This may be the case in particular if the airbag is integrated into the seat.

  • Always stow and secure objects correctly.
  • Before commencing your journey, make sure that no objects are stowed in the deployment area of an airbag.

 

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to the use of unsuitable seat covers

If you use unsuitable seat covers, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do.

  • Only use seat covers that are approved by the sales organization responsible for your vehicle.

You can find information on the sales organization for your vehicle in the publication details for this Operator's Manual.

WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctioning sensors in the door

The function of the airbags can be impaired due to modifications or incorrect work performed on the doors or door trim, or if the doors are damaged.

  • Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.
  • Always have work on the doors or door trim carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

 

WARNING Risk of injury due to deployed airbag

A deployed airbag no longer offers any protection.

  • Have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop in order to have the deployed airbag replaced.

Have deployed air bags replaced immediately.

Automatic measures after an accident

Depending on the type and severity of the accident, and depending on the vehicle's equipment, the following measures can be implemented, for example:

  • automatic braking (post-collision brake)
  • activating the hazard warning lights
  • triggering an automatic emergency call
  • switching off engine

To start the vehicle again, switch the vehicle off and on once more. Depending on the type and severity of the accident, it may possible that the vehicle can no longer be started.

  • switching off the fuel supply
  • unlocking the vehicle doors
  • lowering the front side windows
  • switching on the interior lighting

Function of the post-collision brake

Depending on the accident situation, the post-collision brake can minimize the severity of a further collision or even avoid it. If an accident has been detected, the post-collision brake can implement automatic braking. When the vehicle has come to a standstill, the electric parking brake is automatically applied.

The driver can cancel automatic braking by taking the following actions:

  • braking more strongly than automatic braking
  • fully depressing the accelerator pedal with force

Safely Transporting children in the Vehicle

Always observe when children are traveling in the vehicle

Always observe the safety notes relevant to the situation. In doing so, you will be able to identify possible risks and avoid dangers when children are traveling in the vehicle

Be diligent

Bear in mind that negligence when securing a child in the child restraint system may have serious consequences. Always be diligent and secure a child carefully before each journey. Infants and children must never travel sitting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. To improve protection for children younger than 12 years old or under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height, Mercedes-Benz recommends you always observe the following notes:

  • Always secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehicle.
  • The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child.
  • The vehicle seat must be suitable for installing a child restraint system.

Accident statistics show that children secured on the rear seats are generally safer than children secured on the front seats. For this reason Mercedes-Benz strongly advises you to install a child restraint system on a rear seat.

The generic term child restraint system

The generic term child restraint system is used in this Operator's Manual. A child restraint system is, for example:

  • a baby car seat
  • a rearward-facing child seat
  • a forward-facing child seat
  • a child booster seat with a backrest and seat belt guides

The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child.

Observe laws and regulations

Always observe the legal requirements when using a child restraint system in the vehicle.

Observe standards for child restraint systems

All child restraint systems must meet the following standards:

  • U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225
  • Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2

Confirmation that the child restraint system complies with the standards can be found on an instruction label on the child restraint system. This confirmation can also be found in the installation instructions that are included with the child restraint system.

Detecting risks, avoiding danger

Securing systems for child restraint systems in the vehicle

Only use the following securing systems for child restraint systems:

  • the ISOFIX securing rings
  • the seat belt system of the vehicle
  • the Top Tether anchorages

Installing an ISOFIX child restraint system is preferred. Simply attaching to the securing rings on the vehicle can reduce the risk of installing the child restraint system incorrectly. When securing a child with the integrated seat belt of the ISOFIX child restraint system, always comply with the permissible gross weight for the child and child restraint system. A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt positioning for children over 40 lbs (18 kg) in weight or until they reach a height where a three-point seat belt can be installed properly without a booster seat. Mercedes-Benz recommends a child booster seat with a backrest and seat belt guides.

Advantage of a rearward-facing child restraint system

It is preferable to transport a baby or a small child in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint system. In this case, the child sits in the opposite direction to the direction of travel and faces backwards. Babies and small children have comparatively weak neck muscles in relation to the size and weight of their head. The risk of injury to the cervical spine during an accident can be reduced in a rearward-facing child restraint system.

Always secure a child restraint system correctly

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect installation of the child restraint system

The child can then not be protected or restrained as intended.

  • Be sure to comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions for the child restraint system and its correct use.
  • Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system always rests on the sitting surface of the seat.
  • Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint system.
  • Use child restraint systems only with the original cover designed for them.
  • Always replace damaged covers with genuine covers.

 

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to unsecured child restraint systems in the vehicle

If the child restraint system is incorrectly mounted or unsecured, it may come loose. The child can then not be protected or restrained as intended. Unused child restraint systems could be flung around and hit vehicle occupants.

  • Always comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions for the child restraint system and its correct use.
  • Always fit child restraint systems correctly, even if they are transported in the vehicle unused.

Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions as well as the vehicle-specific information:

  • Installing the ISOFIX child restraint system on the rear seat.
  • Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat.
  • Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the co-driver seat. Observe the specific instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems.
  • Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system.
  • Also secure Top Tether if present.

Do not modify the Child Restraint System 

WARNING Risk of injury due to modifications to the child restraint system

The child restraint system can no longer function properly. This poses an increased risk of injury.

  • Never modify a child restraint system.
  • Only affix accessories which have been specially approved for this child restraint system by the child restraint system's manufacturer.
 

Only use child restraint systems which are in proper working condition

WARNING Risk of injury or death caused by the use of damaged child restraint systems

Child restraint systems or their retaining systems that have been subjected to stress in an accident may not be able to perform their intended protective function. It may be the case that the child cannot be properly restrained.

  • Always immediately replace child restraint systems that have been damaged or involved in an accident.
  • Have the securing systems for the child restraint systems checked at a qualified specialist workshop before installing a child restraint system again.
 

Avoid direct sunlight

WARNING Risk of burns when the child seat is exposed to direct sunlight

If the child restraint system is exposed to direct sunlight or heat, parts could heat up excessively. Children could suffer burns from these parts, particularly the metallic parts of the child restraint system.

  • Always make sure that the child restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight.
  • Cover the child restraint system with a blanket, for example.
  • If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to cool before securing a child into it.
  • Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
 

Observe when stopping or parking

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could, in particular:

  • open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users.
  • get out and be struck by oncoming traffic.
  • operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by:

  • releasing the parking brake.
  • changing the transmission position.
  • starting the vehicle.
  • Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
  • When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
  • Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.
 

Overview of suitable seats in the vehicle for installing a child restraint system

Left/right rear seat 

 ISOFIX child seat anchor

 Also secure Top Tether if present 

Alternative securing system:

 Seat belt on vehicle seat

Co-driver seat

Securing system:

 Seat belt on vehicle seat

Rear center seat

Securing system:

Seat belt on vehicle seat

 Also secure Top Tether if present

Activating or deactivating the special seatbelt retractor of the seat belt

WARNING Risk of injury or death if a seat belt is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion

If the seat belt is released while the vehicle is in motion, the special seat belt retractor is deactivated and the child restraint system is no longer correctly secured. The seat belt is drawn in slightly by the inertia reel and cannot be immediately closed again.

  • Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.
  • Activate the special seat belt retractor again and correctly secure the child restraint system.
 

When activated, the special seatbelt retractor ensures that the seat belts of the front passenger seat and rear seats do not slacken once the child restraint system is secured. The seat belts on the following seats are equipped with a special seatbelt retractor:

  • Front passenger seat
  • Rear seats

Installing a child restraint system

  • When installing a child restraint system, always observe the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used, as well as the notes in this Operator's Manual.
  • Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seat belt outlet.
  • Engage the seat belt tongue in the seat belt buckle.

Activating the special seatbelt retractor

  • Extend the seat belt fully and then allow the inertia reel to retract the belt. When the special seatbelt retractor is activated, you should hear a ratcheting sound.
  • Push the child restraint system down until the seat belt is tight.

Deactivating the special seatbelt retractor

  • Press the release button of the seat belt buckle.
  • Hold the seat belt tongue and guide back to the seat belt outlet.

Installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system on the rear seat

Installing an ISOFIX child restraint system on the rear seat

WARNING Risk of injury or death if the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system together is exceeded.

Too much load may be placed on the LATCHtype (ISOFIX) or iSize child restraint systems and the child may not be restrained correctly in the event of an accident, for example.

  • If the child is secured in a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system with integrated seat belt, the total mass of the child and child restraint system must not exceed 73 lb (33 kg).
 

Always comply with the information about the mass of the child:

  • in the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used
  • on a label on the child restraint system, if available

Check regularly that the permissible gross mass of the child plus the child restraint system is not exceeded.

When you install a child restraint system, observe the following:

  • Always observe the correct use and suitability of the seats for attaching a child restraint system.
  • Always observe the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used.
  • Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards.

When installing an ISOFIX child restraint system, also observe the following:

  • When using a Group 0/0+ baby car seat and a Group 1 rearward-facing child restraint system on a rear seat: adjust the rear and/or front seat so that the front seat does not touch the child restraint system.
  • When using a Group 1 forward-facing child restraint system: the backrest of the child restraint system must, as far as possible, lie flat against the backrest of the seat.
  • For certain child restraint systems in weight category II or III, there may be restrictions on the maximum size setting, e.g. due to possible contact with the roof.
  • Do not put the child restraint system under strain between the roof and the seat surface and/or install it facing the wrong direction. O Do not put the child restraint system under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate.

  1. ISOFIX mounting brackets
  • Before every journey, make sure that the ISOFIX child restraint system is engaged correctly in both mounting brackets in the vehicle.
  • NOTE Damage to the seat belt for the center seat during installation of the child restraint system
  • Make sure that the seat belt is not trapped.
  • Attach the ISOFIX child restraint system to both mounting brackets in the vehicle.

Securing Top Tether

WARNING Risk of injury due to incorrect attachment of the Top Tether belt

If you attach the Top Tether belt incorrectly, the child restraint system is not properly secured and therefore cannot protect as intended.

  • Attach the Top Tether hook only to the intended Top Tether anchorage.
 

If the child restraint system is equipped with a Top Tether belt: The risk of injury can be reduced by Top Tether. The Top Tether belt enables an additional connection between the child restraint system attached with ISOFIX and the vehicle.

Top Tether anchorages 1 are located on the back of the respective rear bench seat on the bench seat legs.

  • If necessary, move the head restraint upwards.
  • Install the ISOFIX child restraint system with Top Tether. Comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
  • Guide Top Tether belt 3 under the head restraint between the two head restraint bars.
  • Hook Top Tether hook 2 into Top Tether anchorage 1 without twisting.
  • Tension Top Tether belt 3. Comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
  • If necessary, slide the head restraint downwards. Make sure that you do not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt 3.

Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt

When installing a belt-secured child restraint system, observe the following:

  • Always observe the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used.
  • When using a baby car seat in weight category 0/0+ and a rearward-facing child restraint system in weight category I on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint system.
  • When using a forward-facing child restraint system in weight category I: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible. After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraint immediately and adjust all head restraints correctly.
  • The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the rear seat.
  • For certain child restraint systems in weight category II or III, there may be restrictions on the maximum size setting, e.g. due to possible contact with the roof.
  • The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly.
  • The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate.
  • Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards.

The seat belts on the following seats are equipped with a child seat safety feature:

  • Co-driver seat
  • Rear seats

When activated, the child seat safety feature ensures that the seat belts of the co-driver seat and rear seats do not slacken once the child restraint system is secured.

  • Install the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the rear seat.
  • Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the seat belt outlet.

Notes on rearward-facing child restraint systems

  • The co-driver air bag cannot be disabled. Always install a rearward-facing child restraint system on a suitable rear seat, but never on the co-driver seat. Observe the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used.

Notes on child restraint systems on the codriver seat

  • Accident statistics show that children secured on the rear seats are safer than children secured on the front seats. For this reason Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install a child restraint system on a rear seat.

Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the co-driver seat:

  • When installing a belt-secured child restraint system on the co-driver seat, always observe the following:
  • Observe the notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the co-driver seat.
  • Observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions.
  • The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the co-driver seat.
  • For certain child restraint systems in weight category II or III, there may be restrictions on the maximum size setting, e.g. due to possible contact with the roof.
  • The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction.
  • The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate.
  • Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint system.

The seat belt on the co-driver side is equipped with a child seat safety feature. When enabled, the child seat safety feature ensures that the seat belt does not slacken once the child seat is secured.

  • Set the co-driver seat as far back as possible and move the seat into the highest position possible.
  • Fully retract the seat cushion length adjustment.
  • Set the seat cushion inclination in such a way that the front edge of the seat cushion is in the highest position and the rear edge of the seat cushion is in the lowest position.
  • Set the seat backrest to the most vertical position possible.
  • Install the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the co-driver seat.
  • Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the seat belt outlet.
  • If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and the co-driver seat as appropriate.

Child Safety Locks

Activating or deactivating child safety locks for the sliding doors

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could, in particular:

  • open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users.
  • get out and be struck by oncoming traffic.
  • operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example.
 

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by:

  • releasing the parking brake.
  • changing the transmission position.
  • starting the vehicle.
  • Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
  • When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
  • Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.
WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle

If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death.

  • Never leave persons, particularly children, unattended in the vehicle
 

 

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If children are traveling in the vehicle, they could, in particular:

  • Open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users
  • Get out and be struck by oncoming traffic
  • Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example
  • Always activate the child safety locks installed if children are traveling in the vehicle.
  • Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
  • When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
 

The following doors have child safety locks:

  • Sliding doors: The child safety locks on the doors secure each door separately. The doors can no longer be opened from the inside (exception: electric sliding door). When the vehicle is unlocked, the door can be opened from the outside.

If the electric sliding door is secured, only the sliding door controls in the rear passenger compartment are deactivated. The electric sliding door can be opened at any time using the switch in the center console.

Example: sliding door child safety lock

  • Slide the child safety lock latch 1 into position 2 (secure) or 3 (unlock).
  • Make sure that the child safety locks are working properly.

Notes on pets in the Vehicle

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to animals left unsecured or unattended in the vehicle

If you leave animals in the vehicle unattended or unsecured, they could possibly press buttons or switches. An animal may:

  • Activate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example
  • Switch systems on or off and endanger other road users

Unsecured animals may be thrown around in the vehicle in the event of an accident or sudden steering and braking maneuvers and injure vehicle occupants in the process.

Never leave animals in the vehicle unattended.

Always correctly secure animals while driving, e.g. using a suitable animal carrier.

 

SmartKey

Notes on radio connections of the key

DANGER Risk of fatal injury to persons with medical devices due to electromagnetic radiation when using the start/stop button

Persons with medical devices, e.g. pacemakers or defibrillators: There is a radio connection between the key and the vehicle. The function of a medical device can be impaired.

  • Before operating the vehicle, consult your doctor or the manufacturer of the medical device about any possible effects from such systems.
 

Detection range of the KEYLESS-START function antenna

1 Position of the key holder when the detection range of the antenna is reduced.

Overview of key functions

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular:

  • open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users.
  • get out and be struck by oncoming traffic.
  • operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example.
 

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example:

  • releasing the parking brake.
  • changing the gearbox position.
  • starting the vehicle.
  • Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
  • When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
  • Keep the key out of reach of children.

NOTE Damage to the SmartKey caused by magnetic fields

  • Keep the SmartKey away from strong magnetic fields.

  1. To lock
  2. Battery check lamp
  3. To unlock
  4. To unlock the cargo compartment (sliding doors and rear-end doors)/to unlock and open/close the electric sliding doors
  5. Mechanical key

The key's factory setting enables you to centrally lock and unlock the following components:

  • the driver's door and co-driver door
  • the sliding doors
  • the rear-end doors

If you do not open the vehicle within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking, the vehicle will lock again and anti-theft protection will be armed again.

Do not keep the key together with electronic devices or metallic objects. This can affect the key's functionality.

  • If the indicator lamp does not light up when you press the unlock or lock button, the battery is discharged. Replace the key battery

Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking verification signal

Multimedia system:

Activate or deactivate Acoustic Lock.

Changing the unlocking settings

The key has the following adjustable unlocking functions:

  • Unlock centrally
  • Unlock the driver's door (vehicles without partition or with cab)
  • Unlock the driver's door and front passenger door (vehicles with partition)
  • To switch between settings: press and hold the lock and unlock buttons at the same time for approximately six seconds until the indicator lamp flashes twice.
  • To unlock the vehicle centrally when the unlocking function is selected for the driver's door or the driver's and front passenger door: press the unlock button a second time.

Reducing the energy consumption of the SmartKey

Deactivating the SmartKey function

  • If you do not use the vehicle or a SmartKey for an extended period of time, you can also deactivate the function of the SmartKey to reduce the energy consumption of the SmartKey.
  • Press and hold the lock button on the SmartKey.
  • While pressing the lock button, immediately press the unlock button on the SmartKey twice in quick succession. The indicator light on the SmartKey will light up once briefly and once for a long time.

Activating the SmartKey function

  • Press any button on the SmartKey.
  • The SmartKey function is automatically activated when the vehicle is started with the SmartKey in the gearshift console slot.

Removing and inserting the emergency key

Removing 

  • Press release button 2. Emergency key 1 is pushed slightly out.
  • Pull emergency key 1 out completely.

Inserting

  • Press release button 2.
  • Slide emergency key 1 in completely until it engages.

Replacing the key battery

DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to swallowing batteries

Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swallowed or otherwise enter the body, severe internal burns can occur within two hours. There is a risk of fatal injury!

  • Keep the batteries out of the reach of children.
  • If the lid and/or the battery compartment do not close securely, stop using the key and keep it away from children.
  • If batteries are swallowed or otherwise enter the body, seek immediate medical attention.
 

Requirements:

  • a CR 2032 3 V cell battery Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the battery replaced by a qualified specialist workshop.
  • Remove the mechanical key

  • Press release button 2 down fully and slide cover 1 forward.
  • Remove battery compartment 3 and remove the discharged battery.
  • Insert the new battery into battery compartment 3. Observe the positive pole marking in the battery compartment and on the battery.
  • Insert battery compartment 3.
  • Replace cover 1 so that it engages.
  • Slide the mechanical key in completely until it engages

Rectifying problems with the key

You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle

Possible causes:

  • The key battery is weak or discharged.
  • There is interference from a powerful radio signal source.
  • The key is faulty.
    • Check the battery with the indicator lamp and replace if necessary.
    • Use the mechanical key to unlock and lock the vehicle.
    • Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You have lost a key

  • Have the key deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.
  • If necessary, have the mechanical locks replaced.

Doors

Unlocking and opening the door from inside

  • To unlock and open the front door: pull door handle 2. Safety pin 1 pops up when the door is unlocked.

The unlock symbol indicates that the rear door is unlocked.

  • To unlock and open the rear door: pull opening lever 1 and open the rear door. When the door unlocks, latch 2 moves forward. The unlock symbol is visible.
  • To close: pull the rear door closed by the door handle.
  • To lock: slide latch 2 back. The & symbol is visible.

Centrally locking and unlocking the door from the inside

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could, in particular:

  • open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users.
  • get out and be struck by oncoming traffic.
  • operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by:

  • releasing the parking brake.
  • changing the transmission position.
  • starting the vehicle.
  • Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
  • When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
  • Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.
 

 

WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle

If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death.

  • Never leave persons, particularly children, unattended in the vehicle.
 

You can use the central locking buttons to centrally lock and unlock the entire vehicle from the inside.

The central locking buttons are located in the driver's and front passenger door.

Central locking buttons (vehicles with electrically adjustable front seats)

Central locking buttons (vehicles with manually adjustable front seats)

If the vehicle is being tow-started, push-started or tested on a roller dynamometer, there is a risk of being locked out when the function is activated.

  • To activate: press and hold button 2 until you hear a tone.
  • To deactivate: press and hold button 1 until you hear a tone.

Automatic locking after closing the last door

WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle

If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death.

  • Never leave persons, particularly children, unattended in the vehicle
 

 

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could, in particular:

  • open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users.
  • get out and be struck by oncoming traffic.
  • operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by:

  • releasing the parking brake.
  • changing the transmission position.
  • starting the vehicle.
    • Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
    • When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
    • Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.
 

 

WARNING Accident‑ and risk of injury with unsecured or unattended animals in parked vehicle

If you leave animals in the vehicle unattended or unsecured, they could possibly press buttons or switches.

An animal may:

  • Activate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example.
  • Switch systems on or‑ off and endanger other road users
  • Never leave animals in the vehicle unattended.
  • Always secure animals properly, e.g. with a suitable animal transport box.
 

After leaving the vehicle and closing the last door, the vehicle is automatically locked. This also applies if the key is still in the vehicle. There is a danger of locking oneself out. The vehicle can only be opened again with a vehicle key.

  • Always carry the vehicle key with you when leaving the vehicle.

Warning notice, depending on the equipment on the driver's door, the partition wall, the sliding door or the speed delivery door.

Unlocking and locking the driver's door with the mechanical key

If you want to lock the vehicle completely with the mechanical key, press the button for the locking mechanism from inside first with the driver's door open. Then lock the driver's door with the mechanical key.

  • To unlock: turn the mechanical key counterclockwise to position 1.
  • To lock: turn the mechanical key clockwise to position 1.
  • Right-hand drive vehicles: turn the mechanical key in the opposite direction for each case.

Using the grab handles when getting into and out of the vehicle

WARNING Risk of injury due to excessive load on the grab handles

If you apply your full body weight to the grab handle or pull it abruptly, the grab handle may be damaged or come loose from its anchorage. This may result in injuries.

  • Use the grab handles only to stabilize the seating position or to assist in getting in and out of the seat.
 

The entrances on buses are equipped with grab handles and steps. The grab handles to enter and exit the vehicle are at the front door and the sliding door.

To avoid risks:

  • When getting into and out of the vehicle, only use the grab handles and steps. Only they are designed for such a load.
  • Keep steps and entry sills free from dirt, e.g. mud, clay, snow and ice.

Getting into and out of the vehicle (example: sliding door)

  • When getting into and out of the vehicle, use grab handles 1 and steps.
  • The grab handles on the sliding door are there to help people enter and exit the vehicle and can hold up to a maximum of 176 lbs (80 kg). Do not use the grab handle on the sliding door to secure a load (lashing down). Do not secure any objects to the easy entry and exit aids.

Sliding Door

Opening and closing the sliding door

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due to an open sliding door which is not engaged in place

On an incline, the sliding door can move by itself. This can cause you or other people to become trapped.

  • Always make sure that the open sliding door is engaged. To do so, open the sliding door to the stop.
 

 

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due to sliding door opening towards the rear

When you open the sliding door, the sliding door could hit other people as it moves towards the rear of the vehicle.

  • Only open the sliding door when traffic conditions permit.
 

To Unlock

  • Pull safety pin 3 upwards manually or use the central locking button to unlock the sliding door

Opening

  • Press the button 1 inside and pull the door 2 handle.
  • Push back the sliding door using door handle 2 fully until it engages.
  • Check the sliding door catch.

Closing

  • Press the button 1 inside and pull the door 2 handle.
  • Slide the sliding door firmly forwards by handle 2 until it closes.

To lock

  • Push safety pin 3 downwards manually or use the central locking button to lock the sliding door.

Notes on electrical closing assist

If your vehicle is fitted with electrical closing assist, you will require less force to close the sliding door.

Electric sliding door

Function of the electric sliding door

Your vehicle can be equipped with an electric sliding door on the left and/or right-hand side. You can operate the electric sliding door in the following ways:

  • by pressing the sliding door buttons on the center console
  • by pressing the sliding door button on the door sill (B-pillar)
  • using the door handle (inside or outside)
  • using the key

If the electric sliding door is obstructed while opening, it moves a few centimeters in the opposite direction and stops. If the sliding door is obstructed during the closing procedure, it opens fully again.

If the electric motor of the sliding door is in danger of overheating, e.g. due to frequent opening and closing within a short period, the sliding door opens fully. The sliding door is then locked in place. The sliding door is operational again after approximately 30 seconds. If there has been a malfunction or if the battery has been disconnected, you can use the release catch to disconnect the sliding door from the electric motor. Then you can open or close the door manually.

Opening/closing the electric sliding door with the button

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due to sliding door opening towards the rear

When you open the sliding door, the sliding door could hit other people as it moves towards the rear of the vehicle.

  • Only open the sliding door when traffic conditions permit.
 

 

WARNING Risk of injury despite the object detection function

The object detection function does not react to soft, light and thin objects, such as fingers. The object detection function cannot prevent someone from becoming trapped in these situations.

  • When opening and closing the electric sliding door, make sure that no parts of the body are within the operating range of the sliding door.
  • If someone becomes trapped, press the button again to stop the sliding door.
 

Object detection:

If an object obstructs the sliding door as it is closing, the sliding door will be stopped. Object detection is only an aid. It is not a substitute you having to pay attention.

1 Opens and closes the sliding door on the right side of the vehicle.

On vehicles with a partition, button 3 is located on the partition next to the doorway at the level of the inside door handle.

When the sliding door is locked, it can only be opened from the inside by manually unlocking locking pin 4.

  • To unlock: pull locking pin 4 upwards manually or use the central locking button to unlock the sliding door.
  • To open: briefly press button 1, 2 or button 3. The sliding door opens automatically. When you open the door using button 1 or 2, you will additionally hear two warning signals. The indicator lamp at the top of button 1 or 2 will flash and button 3 will flash. When the sliding door is completely open, the indicator lamp at the top of button 1 or 2 will light up.
  • To close: briefly press button 1, 2 or button 3. The sliding door closes automatically. When you close the door using button 1 or 2, you will additionally hear two warning signals. The indicator lamp at the top of button 1 or 2 will flash and button 3 will flash. When the sliding door is completely closed, the indicator lamp at the top of button 1 or 2 will go out.
  • To stop automatic operation: briefly press button 1 or 2. The sliding door stops moving.
  • To lock: push locking pin 3 downwards manually or use the central locking button to lock the sliding door
  • When you stop automatic operation upon opening the door, the door closes when you press the button again.
  • In unfavorable operating conditions, e.g. frost or ice, or if the vehicle is very dirty, you can press and hold the corresponding button. The electric sliding door moves with increased force. Observe that, in such circumstances, the object detection function is less sensitive. To stop the movement, release the button.

Opening/closing the electric sliding door with the key

  • To unlock: briefly press the  or  button on the key.
  • To open: press and hold the  or  button on the key for longer than 0.5 seconds. You will hear two acoustic signals and the sliding door will open automatically.
  • To close: press and hold the  or  button on the key for longer than 0.5seconds. You will hear two acoustic signals and the sliding door will close automatically.
  • To interrupt automatic operation: briefly press the  or  button on the key. The sliding door stops moving.
  • When you stop automatic operation upon opening the door, the door closes when you press the button again.

Opening/closing the electric sliding door with the door handle

  • To unlock: pull locking pin 2 upwards manually or use the central locking button to unlock the sliding door.
  • Press button 1 or pull outside door handle 3. The sliding door opens or closes.
  • Press button 1 again or pull outside door handle 3. The sliding door stops moving.

Unlocking the electric sliding door manually

Disconnecting the sliding door from the electric motor

  • Insert the mechanical key into opening 1 of disconnect switch 2 in the "AUTO" position.
  • Turn the mechanical key 180° clockwise. The "MAN" position is set.
  • Open or close the sliding door with the outside or inside door handle.

Establishing the connection between sliding door and electric motor

  • Insert the mechanical key into opening 1 of disconnect switch 2 in the "MAN" position.
  • Turn the mechanical key 180° counter-clockwise. The "AUTO" position is set.
  • Adjust the sliding door

If there has been a malfunction or if the battery has been disconnected, you can use disconnect switch 2 to disconnect the sliding door from the electric motor. Then you can open or close the door manually.

Cover in sliding door trim

  • Vehicles with sliding door trim: fold the cover of disconnect switch 2 up. The disconnect switch is accessible.
  • To disconnect the sliding door from the electric motor: turn disconnect switch 2 180° clockwise. The "MAN" position is set.

To unlock

  • Pull safety pin 3 upwards manually or use the central locking button to unlock the sliding door.
  • Press release button 1.
  • Open or close the sliding door with the outside or inside door handle.

Establishing the connection between sliding door and electric motor

  • Turn disconnect switch 2 180° counterclockwise. The "AUTO" position is set.
  • Adjust the sliding door.
  • If it is not possible to rectify the malfunction, visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Resetting the electric sliding door

Sliding door button on the center console Sliding door button on the center console 1 Opens and closes the sliding door on the right side of the vehicle.

Sliding door button on the door sill (B-pillar)

You must reset the sliding door if there has been a malfunction or a voltage supply interruption.

  • If the sliding door is open: press button 1 on the center console or sliding door button 3 on the door sill (B-pillar) and hold until the door is closed. or
  • Close the sliding door with the door handle.
  • Then briefly press button 1 on the center console or sliding door button 3 on the door sill (B-pillar) once, or pull the door handle to completely open the sliding door. The sliding door is operational.

Rear End Doors

Opening and closing the rear-end doors from outside

WARNING Risk of injury due to the rearend door swinging open

When you open a rear-end door, the following can occur:

  • You or another person can be injured.
  • A person may be struck by oncoming traffic.

This is particularly the case if you open the rear-end door more than 90° or if it opens in an uncontrolled manner.

Even rear-end doors which are properly closed can swing open when the vehicle parked is on an incline or it is windy.

  • Only open a rear-end door when the traffic conditions and surroundings permit.
  • Always make sure that the rear-end doors are properly closed.
 

Opening the right rear-end door

  • Pull handle 1.
  • Swing the rear-end door to the side until it engages.

Opening the left rear-end door

  • Make sure that the right rear-end door is open and engaged.
  • Pull release handle 1 in the direction of the arrow.
  • Swing the rear-end door to the side until it engages.

Opening the rear-end doors fully

  • Open the respective rear-end door outwards beyond the first detent (90°).
  • Open the rear-end door fully. The rear-end door will stay in the stop position.

Closing the rear-end doors from outside

  • Close the left rear-end door firmly from outside.
  • Close the right rear-end door firmly from outside.

Opening rear-end doors with door check more than 90°

WARNING Risk of injury due to the rear end door swinging open

When you open a rear-end door, the following can occur:

  • You or another person can be injured.
  • A person may be struck by oncoming traffic.

This is particularly the case if you open the rear-end door more than 90° or if it opens in an uncontrolled manner.

Even rear-end doors which are properly closed can swing open when the vehicle parked is on an incline or it is windy. 

  • Only open a rear-end door when the traffic conditions and surroundings permit.
  • Always make sure that the rear-end doors are properly closed.
 

  • Open the rear-end door to about 45°.
  • Pull the door check in the direction of the arrow and hold it in place.
  • Open the rear-end door more than 90° so that the door check can no longer engage.
  • Release the door check and open the rear-end door fully.

Opening/closing the rear-end doors from the inside

WARNING Risk of injury due to the rear-end door swinging open

When you open a rear-end door, the following can occur:

  • You or another person can be injured.
  • A person may be struck by oncoming traffic.

This is particularly the case if you open the rear-end door more than 90° or if it opens in an uncontrolled manner. Even rear-end doors which are properly closed can swing open when the vehicle parked is on an incline or it is windy.

  • Only open a rear-end door when the traffic conditions and surroundings permit.
  • Always make sure that the rear-end doors are properly closed.
 

The unlock symbol indicates that the rear-end door is unlocked.

  • To unlock: slide latch 2 to the left. The unlock symbol is visible.
  • To open: pull opening lever 1 and open the rear-end door. Swing the rear-end door to the side until it engages.
  • To close: make sure that the left rear-end door is closed. Pull the rear right door firmly to by the door handle.
  • To lock: slide latch 2 to the right. The lock symbol is visible.

Partition sliding door

Opening and closing the partition sliding door

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the partition sliding door is not engaged

The partition sliding door may move on its own while the vehicle is in motion. This can cause you or other people to become trapped.

  • Before every journey, close the partition sliding door and ensure that it is engaged.
 

Partition from the cab

Partition from the cargo compartment

  • To open: turn the key to the left 3 from the cab or push the lever to the right 3 from the cargo compartment. The sliding door is unlocked.
  • Push the sliding door as far as it will go to the right 2 from the cab or to the left 1 from the cargo compartment.
  • To close: push the sliding door to the left 1 from the cab or to the right 2 from the cargo compartment until it engages. You can lock the sliding door from the cab with the key.

Electrical Step

Function of the electrical step

Your vehicle's sliding door may be equipped with an electrical step.

Electrical step 1 automatically extends when the sliding door opens, and retracts after the sliding door closes. Electrical step 1 is equipped with object recognition at the front. If the step meets an object while extending, it stops. Once you have removed the object, you must first close the sliding door and then open it again so that the step extends completely.

If the electrical step prevents loading, you can block it via object recognition when the sliding door opens. The electrical step then remains retracted and a fork-lift truck or another lifting vehicle can move closer to the cargo compartment.

Vehicles with an instrument cluster (color): if the instrument cluster display shows the Step Not Retracted See Operator's Manual or Step Not Extended See Operator's Manual message and a warning tone sounds, electrical step 1 is malfunctioning. If electrical step 1 is malfunctioning, the step may not extend or retract, or do so only partially. After a malfunction occurs, you must retract and lock electrical step 1 manually in order to continue your journey (/ page 60). Before passengers exit the vehicle, inform them that electrical step 1 may be missing.

Releasing the electrical step in an emergency (manual retraction)

If the electrical step does not automatically retract, you must manually retract the step and lock it in order to continue driving.

  • On the underside of step 2 on both bars 1 remove the spring cotters 3 from the pin.
  • Remove the washers 4 and detach both bars.

  • Fold bars 1 into the step's housing.
  • Slide the step into its housing.

  • On both sides, insert spring cotters 1 through the housing's holes and into the step as far as they will go. The step has been secured in its housing.

Side Window

Opening and closing the side windows

WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening a side window

When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame.

  • When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side window.
  • If someone is trapped, release the button immediately or pull it in order to close the side window again.
 

 

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when closing a side window

When closing a side window, body parts could be trapped in the closing area in the process.

  • When closing, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.
  • If someone is trapped, release the button immediately or press the button in order to reopen the side window.
 

 

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when children operate the side windows

Children could become trapped if they operate the side windows, particularly when unattended.

  • Activate the child safety lock for the rear passenger compartment side windows.
  • When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
  • Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
 

  • To open manually: press and hold button 1 or 2.
  • To close manually: pull and hold button 1 or 2.

The windows in the front doors can also be operated automatically.

  • To open completely: briefly press button 1 or 2 beyond the pressure point. Automatic operation will start.
  • To close completely: briefly pull button 1 or 2 beyond the pressure point. Automatic operation will start.
  • To interrupt automatic operation: briefly press or pull button 1 or 2 again.

Note: If an object blocks a side window during the automatic closing process, the side window will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.

Note: If automatic operation of the side window does not work, there is no automatic reversing function.

Automatic reversing function of the side windows

If an object blocks a side window during the closing process, the side window will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.

  • During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite there being reversing protection on the side window

The reversing function will not react:

  • to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers
  • over the last ã in (4 mm) of the closing path
  • during resetting
  • when the side window is closed again manually immediately after automatic reversing

The reversing function cannot prevent someone from becoming trapped in these situations.

  • During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.
  • If someone becomes trapped, press the  button to open the side window again.
 

Ventilating the vehicle before starting a journey (convenience opening)

WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening a side window

When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame.

  • When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side window.
  • Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped
 

You can ventilate the vehicle before you start driving. The "convenience opening" function can be operated using the SmartKey without switching on the vehicle. The SmartKey must be in close proximity to the driver's or front passenger door.

  • Press and hold the unlock button on the SmartKey. The following functions are performed:
    • the vehicle is unlocked
    • the side windows are opened
  • To interrupt convenience opening: release the unlock button.

Closing the side windows from the outside (convenience closing)

WARNING Risk of entrapment due to not paying attention during convenience closing

When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side windows.

  • When the convenience closing feature is operating, monitor the entire closing process and make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.
 
  • Press and hold the lock button on the SmartKey. The following functions are performed:
    • the vehicle is locked
    • the side windows are closed
  • To interrupt convenience closing: release the lock button.

Adjusting the side windows

The side windows must be readjusted after a malfunction or a voltage supply interruption.

  • Switch on the power supply.
  • Push both buttons on the power window and hold for approximately one second after the side window has closed.

Rectifying problems with the side windows

A side window cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause

  • Check to see if there are any objects in the window guide.
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatally injured if reversing protection is not activated

If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked, the side window will close with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then not active and body parts may become trapped.

  • Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
  • To stop the closing process, release the button or press the button again to reopen the side window.
 

If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly, you can proceed as follows:

  • Immediately after the window is obstructed, pull the corresponding button again until the side window has closed, and hold the button for an additional second. The side window will be closed with increased force.

If the side window is obstructed again and reopens slightly, you can proceed as follows:

  • Repeat the previous step. The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function.

The side windows cannot be opened or closed using the convenience opening feature

  • Possible cause: The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged.
  • Check the battery using the indicator lamp and replace it if necessary

Anti-theft prevention

Function of immobilizer

The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct key. The immobilizer is automatically activated when the vehicle is switched off, and deactivated when the vehicle is switched on. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. If the key is left inside the vehicle, anyone can start the vehicle. In the event the engine does not start despite the vehicle's starter battery having sufficient charge, the immobilizer is faulty. Contact a qualified specialist workshop or call 1-800-367-6372 (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Function of ATA (Anti-theft Alarm system)

If the ATA system is armed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered in the following situations:

  • a side door is opened
  • the rear-end door is opened
  • the hood is opened
  • the interior motion sensor is triggered
  • the tow-away alarm is triggered  

ATA is automatically armed after approximately five seconds in the following situation:

  • after the vehicle has been locked with the SmartKey

When the ATA system is armed, indicator lamp 1 flashes in the overhead control panel.

ATA is automatically deactivated in the following situations:

  • After unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey.
  • After pressing the start/stop button with the SmartKey inside the vehicle.

Arming/deactivating ATA (Anti-theft Alarm system)

  • Activating
    • Close all the doors.
    • Lock the vehicle with the key. Indicator lamp 1 in the overhead control panel flashes.
  • Deactivating
    • Unlock the vehicle with the key. Indicator lamp 1 in the overhead control panel goes out.
    • The vehicle locks again automatically if you do not open a door within 40 seconds after unlocking the vehicle.
  • Stopping the alarm
    • Press the unlock or lock button on the key. 
    • Press the Start/Stop button with the key inside the vehicle. The alarm stops.
  • If the alarm system is armed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered in the following situations:
    • A door is opened
    • The hood is opened

The alarm will not be deactivated, even if you immediately close the open door that has triggered it, for example.

Function of the tow-away alarm

A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the inclination of the vehicle changes when the tow-away alarm is activated. This can be the case if the vehicle is raised on one side, for example.

Arming/disarming

  • Lock the vehicle with the key. The tow-away alarm is automatically armed after about 40 seconds:
  • Open the vehicle with the key. The tow-away alarm is deactivated.

The tow-away alarm is only armed when the following components are closed:

  • the driver's door and the front-passenger door
  • the side doors
  • the rear-end doors

Deactivating

  • Switch off the power supply.
  • Press button 1. When the button is released, indicator lamp 2 in the button lights up for approximately five seconds.
  • Lock the vehicle with the key. The tow-away alarm is deactivated.

The tow-away alarm remains deactivated until you lock the vehicle again.

Deactivate the tow-away alarm when locking your vehicle in the following situations:

  • when loading and/or transporting the vehicle on a ferry or car transporter, for example
  • when parking the vehicle on a movable surface, such as a split-level garage

This will prevent false alarms.

Interior motion sensor

Function: If the activated the interior motion sensor detects motion in the vehicle interior, a visual and acoustic alarm is triggered. This can happen if someone reaches into the vehicle interior, for example.

Activating/deactivating the interior motion sensor

Activating

  • Close the side windows.
  • Make sure that nothing (such as mascots or coat hangers) is hanging on the inside rearview mirror or on the grab handles on the headliner. This will prevent false alarms.
  • Lock the vehicle with the key. The interior motion sensor is activated after approximately 30 seconds.

The interior motion sensor is only activated when the following components are closed:

  • the driver's door and the co-driver door
  • the side doors
  • the rear-end doors

Deactivating

  • Unlock the vehicle with the key. The interior motion sensor automatically switches off.

  • Switch off the power supply.
  • Press button 1. When the button is released, indicator lamp 2 in the button lights up for about five seconds.
  • Lock the vehicle with the key. The interior motion sensor is deactivated.

The interior motion sensor remains deactivated until you lock the vehicle again.

Deactivate the interior motion sensor when locking your vehicle in the following situations:

  • if there are people or animals remaining inside
  • if the side windows remain open
  • when transporting the vehicle on a ferry or car transporter, for example

This will prevent false alarms.

Notes on the correct driver's seat position 

WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular:

  • If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion
  • If you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion
  • Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.
 

Ensure the following when adjusting steering wheel 3, seat belt 2 and driver's seat 1:

  • You are sitting as far away from the driver's air bag as possible.
  • You are sitting in an upright position.
  • Your thighs are gently supported by the seat cushion.
  • Your legs are not fully extended and you can reach the pedals easily.
  • The back of your head is supported at eye level by the middle part of the head restraint.
  • You can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent.
  • You can move your legs without any restrictions.
  • You can see all of the instrument cluster displays well.
  • You have a good overview of the traffic conditions.
  • Your seat belt sits snugly against your body and passes across the center of your shoulder and across your hips in the pelvic area.

Notes on grab handles

WARNING Risk of injury due to excessive load on the grab handles

If you apply your full body weight to the grab handle or pull it abruptly, the grab handle may be damaged or come loose from its anchorage. This may result in injuries.

  • Use the grab handles only to stabilize the seating position or to assist in getting in and out of the seat.
 

Seats

Adjusting the front seats manually (without Seat Comfort Package)

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seat is adjusted by children

Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly if they are unattended.

  • When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
  • Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
 

 

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seat

When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail.

  • When adjusting a seat, make sure that no one has any part of their body within the sweep of the seat.
 

Observe the safety notes on "Air bags" and "Children in the vehicle".

WARNING Risk of accident due to the driver's seat not being engaged

The driver's seat may move unexpectedly while driving. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

  • Always make sure that the driver's seat is engaged before starting the vehicle.
 

 

WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular:

  • If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion
  • If you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion
  • Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.
 

 

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seat height is adjusted carelessly

If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped.

  • While moving the seats, make sure that hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system.
 

 

WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being installed or being adjusted incorrectly

If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking.

  • Always drive with the head restraints installed.
  • Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.
 

Do not rotate the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to set the height and inclination of the head restraints to the correct position. Using the head restraint fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust the head restraint so that it is as close to the back of your head as possible.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position

The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. In particular, you could slip beneath the seatbelt and become injured.

  • Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey.
  • Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder belt is routed across the center of your shoulder.
 

1 Seat fore-and-aft position

2 Seat height

3 Seat backrest inclination

  • To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position: lift lever 1 and slide the seat into the desired position. Ensure that the seat is engaged.
  • To set the seat height: keep on pressing or pulling lever 2 until the required seat height has been reached.
  • To adjust the seat backrest inclination: rotate handwheel 3 forwards and backwards until the desired position has been reached.

Adjusting the front seats manually (with Seat Comfort Package)

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seat is adjusted by children

Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly if they are unattended.

  • When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
  • Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
 

 

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seat

When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail.

  • When adjusting a seat, make sure that no one has any part of their body within the sweep of the seat.
 

 

WARNING Risk of accident due to the driver's seat not being engaged

The driver's seat may move unexpectedly while driving. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

  • Always make sure that the driver's seat is engaged before starting the vehicle.
 

 

WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular:

  • If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion
  • If you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion
  • Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.
 

 

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seat height is adjusted carelessly

If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured.

Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped.

  • While moving the seats, make sure that hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system.
 

 

WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being installed or being adjusted incorrectly

If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking.

  • Always drive with the head restraints installed.
  • Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.
 

Do not rotate the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to set the height and inclination of the head restraints to the correct position. Using the head restraint fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust the head restraint so that it is as close to the back of your head as possible.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position

The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. In particular, you could slip beneath the seatbelt and become injured.

  • Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey.
  • Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder belt is routed across the center of your shoulder.
 

Example image of comfort suspension seat

1 Seat cushion length

2 Seat backrest inclination

3 Seat height

4 Seat cushion inclination

5 Seat fore-and-aft position

6 Seat suspension

7 Vibration limiting

  • To adjust the seat cushion length: lift lever 1 and slide the front part of the seat cushion forwards or backwards.
  • To adjust the seat backrest inclination: rotate handwheel 2 forwards and backwards until the desired position has been reached.
  • To adjust the seat height: pull or push lever 3 until the desired position has been reached.
  • To adjust the seat cushion inclination: rotate handwheel 4 forwards and backwards until the desired position has been reached.
  • To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position: lift lever 5 and slide the seat into the desired position.
  • To check for safety: ensure that the seat is engaged.
  • To adjust the seat suspension: take your weight off the seat.
  • Using handwheel 6, set the body weight (88 lb (40 kg) to 265 lb (120 kg)) so that the seat suspension works optimally. If you set a higher weight, the seat suspension will become firmer. The seat will then not vibrate as much. If the seat vibrates often and significantly, you can engage it in the lower area.
  • To engage vibration limiting: turn lever 7 upwards. The next time the seat vibrates, it will engage.
  • To release vibration limiting: turn lever 7 to the right. The seat can vibrate.

Adjusting the front seat electrically

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seat is adjusted by children

Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly if they are unattended.

  • When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
  • Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
 

The seats can be adjusted when the vehicle is switched off.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seat

When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail.

  • When adjusting a seat, make sure that no one has any part of their body within the sweep of the seat.
 

Observe the safety notes on "air bags" and "Children in the vehicle".

WARNING Risk of accident due to the driver's seat not being engaged

The driver's seat may move unexpectedly while driving. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

  • Always make sure that the driver's seat is engaged before starting the vehicle.
 

 

WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular:

  • If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion
  • If you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion
  • Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.
 

 

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seat height is adjusted carelessly

If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped.

  • While moving the seats, make sure that hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system.
 

 

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seat height is adjusted carelessly

If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped.

  • While moving the seats, make sure that hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system.
 

 

WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being installed or being adjusted incorrectly

If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking.

  • Always drive with the head restraints installed.
  • Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.
 

Do not rotate the head restraints of the front and rear passenger compartment seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to set the height and inclination of the head restraints to the correct position. Using the head restraint fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust the head restraint so that it is as close to the back of the head as possible.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position

The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. In particular, you could slip beneath the seatbelt and become injured.

  • Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey.
  • Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder belt is routed across the center of your shoulder.
 

1 Seat backrest inclination

2 Seat height

3 Seat cushion inclination

4 Seat fore-and-aft position

Setting 4-way lumbar support

1 Higher

2 Softer

3 Lower

4 Firmer

Use buttons 1 to 4 adjust the backrest contour individually to your spine.

Opening the Memory Function

WARNING Risk of an accident if the memory function is used while driving

If you use the memory function on the driver's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made.

  • Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary.
 

 

WARNING Risk of entrapment when adjusting the seat with the memory function

When the memory function adjusts the seat, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped.

  • During the adjustment process of the memory function, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.  
  • If somebody becomes trapped, immediately release the memory function position button. The adjustment process is stopped.
 

 

WARNING Risk of entrapment if the memory function is activated by children

Children could become trapped if they activate the memory function, particularly when unattended.   

  • Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
  • When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
 

The memory function can be used when the vehicle is switched off.

Storing seat settings

Seat settings for up to three people can be stored and called up using the memory function. You can adjust the seat and the backrest.

  • Adjust the seat to the desired position.
  • Press memory button M together with one of the preset position buttons 1, 2 or 3. An acoustic signal sounds. The settings are stored.
  • To call up: press and hold memory position button 1, 2 or 3 until the front seat is in the stored position.

Rotating the front seats

WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injuries if the driver's seat and front passenger seat are not engaged

In this situation, the restraint systems cannot perform their intended protective function.

  • Engage the driver's seat and front passenger seat in the direction of travel before you start the vehicle.
 

 

WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular:

  • If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion
  • If you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion
  • Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.
 

You can rotate the driver's and front passenger seats by 50° and 180°. The seats engage both in and opposite to the direction of travel as well as at 50° towards the exit.

  • Ensure that the parking brake is applied and the brake lever is down as far as it will go.
  • When rotating the seat, open the respective front door in order to avoid a collision with the door trim.
  • Adjust the steering wheel in such a way that there is sufficient clearance to rotate and adjust the driver's seat.
  • Slide the front passenger seat forward before rotating it.
  • To rotate the seat: push lever 1 towards the door and rotate the seat slightly inwards. The turning device will be unlocked.
  • Release lever 1 again.
  • Rotate the seat outwards or inwards into the required position.

Moving the co-driver bench seat surface forwards and backwards

  • To fold the seat surface forward: lift seat surface out of front anchorage 1.
  • Pull the seat surface out of rear anchorage 2 and move it slightly forwards.
  • Fold the rear edge of the seat surface upwards.
  • You can stow individual objects in the stowage compartment beneath the co-driver bench seat.
  • To fold away the seat surface: fold the rear edge of the seat surface downwards.
  • Slide the seat surface under the seat backrest into rear anchorage 2.
  • Push the front seat surface downwards until it engages in the front anchorage 1.

Folding the folding seat up or down

WARNING Risk of injury when using the folding seat due to inserted key

The key in the lock of the partition wall sliding door may come into contact with the person on the folding seat.

  • Always remove the key before a person sits on the folding seat.
 

  • Remove key 1 from the partition sliding door.
  • Press the push button on catch 2 and fold seat cushion 3 up or down.
  • Release push button on catch 2 when seat cushion 3 reaches its end position.
  • Move seat cushion 3 until it has locked. The push button on catch 2 must be completely flush with the seat frame.

Installing and removing the rear bench seat

WARNING Risk of injury due to incorrect installation of the rear bench seat

If the rear seat is unsuitable, the seat belts may not perform their intended protective function.

  • Install the rear seat bench as described and only in the direction of travel.
  • Installation of the rear bench seat in a face-to-face position is not permitted.
  • Use only rear bench seats that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.
 

 

WARNING Risk of injury if the rear bench seat is not locked in place

If the rear bench seat is not stable, it may tip over during a journey.

  • Before setting off, ensure that the rear bench seat is engaged. The red indicator tabs must not be visible on the release handle.
  • If the red indicator tabs are visible on the release handle, re-engage the rear bench seat.
 

 

WARNING Risk of injury when installing and removing the rear bench seat

When you install or remove the rear bench seat, body parts such as feet may become trapped when the rear bench seat is tipped.

  • When installing and removing the rear bench seat, ensure that there are no body parts between the rear bench seat and the floor.
 

 

Installation position of three-person and four-person rear bench seat with strut

The three-person rear bench seat is available with or without a strut. The four-person rear bench seat is available only with a strut. The strut is located on the rear side of the rear bench seat.

Install the three-person rear bench seat with strut only in the third seat row (above the rear axle). Install the four-person rear bench seat only on the last row of seats.

Vehicles with four rows of seats

  • 1 First row of seats
  • 2 Second row of seats
  • 3 Third row of seats: three-person rear bench seat with strut
  • 4 Fourth row of seats: four-person rear bench seat with strut
  • Install the three-person rear bench seat on the third seat row 3.
  • Install the four-person rear bench seat on the fourth seat row 4.

  • Vehicles with three rows of seats
  • 1 First row of seats
  • 2 Second row of seats
  • 3 Third row of seats: four-person rear bench seat with strut
  • Install the four-person rear bench seat on the third seat row 3.

Removing the rear bench seat

Perform these tasks carefully with the assistance of a second person.

  • To remove the covers of the seat shells: push retaining clip 1 in the direction of the arrow and detach cover 2 by pushing it to the top rear at an angle.

  • Push release handle 2 for the bench seat all the way down and hold it there. At the same time, tilt the bench seat backwards slightly using the release handle and pull it slightly backwards.
  • Let go of the release handle. The locks on the bench seat legs will be unlocked and red indicator tabs 3 on the housing of release handle 2 will be visible.
  • Hold the unlocked bench seat by grab handles 1 and pull backwards slightly.

  • Tilt bench seat 1 backwards and pull it out of the seat shells.  
  • If the bench seat cannot be pulled out of the seat shells, the bench seat may be wedged in the seat anchorage. This can happen if the bench seat is tilted too far backwards. If the seat cannot be pulled out of the seat shells, proceed as follows:
  • Tilt the bench seat forwards without engaging it.
  • Pull the bench seat backwards again using release handle 2.
  • Tilt the bench seat slightly backwards and pull it out of the seat shells.
  • To remove or store the bench seat, place it next to the seat shells and roll it towards the rear doors. or # Lift the bench seat out from the side to store it.
  • It may be necessary for the bench seats in front or behind to be removed.

  • To attach the covers of the seat shells: hold cover 3 such that retaining lug 1 is pointing towards rear seat anchorage 2.
  • Insert cover 3 into rear seat anchorage 2 by pushing it downwards at an angle and then clip it to the seat shell.
  • After removing the rear bench seats, ensure that the rear bench seats stand firmly and cannot tip over when in storage.
  • Please note that the metallic seat support in the vehicle floor will heat up during a journey if the rear seating has been removed.

Installing the rear bench seat

Warning notice on the rear bench seat: Secure engagement of the rear bench seat is guaranteed only if the seat anchorages are kept clean and free of objects.

  • In vehicles registered as passenger vehicles, observe the maximum permitted number of seats.
  • Remove the covers of the seat shells as described under "Removing the rear bench seat".
  • Ensure that there are no objects in the seat anchorages and seat shells.
  • Position the bench seat behind the installation position.
  • Hold the bench seat by the grab handles and tilt it backwards.
  • Roll the bench seat forwards on the level plastic carriers.
  • Ensure that the rear legs of the bench seat are engaged.

  • Tilt the bench seat forwards firmly until the locks on the front legs of the bench seat engage audibly. The locks on the front legs of the bench seat will now be locked and the red indicator tabs on the housing of release handle 1 should no longer be visible.
  • If the red indicator tabs on the release handle housing are visible, the bench seat is not correctly engaged.

If the bench seat is not correctly engaged, you can rectify this situation as follows:

  • Unlock the bench seat again and tilt it forwards firmly until the locks on the bench seat front legs engage audibly.
  • Attach the covers of the seat shells as described under "Removing the rear bench seat".

Adjusting the seat backrest of the rear bench seat

  • If a partition is installed: the rear bench seat must not come into contact with the partition at any time.
  • Move the seat backrest to the desired position.

Head restraints

Adjusting the head restraint manually

WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular:

  • If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion
  • If you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion
  • Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.
 

 

WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being installed or being adjusted incorrectly

If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking.

  • Always drive with the head restraints installed.
  • Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.
 

Do not rotate the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to set the height and inclination of the head restraints to the correct position. Using the head restraint fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust the head restraint so that it is as close to the back of your head as possible.

Head restraint (example of luxury head restraint on the driver's seat)

  • To raise: pull the head restraint upwards into the desired position and ensure that it engages.
  • Use the head restraint only when it is engaged.
  • To lower: press release button 1, slide the head restraint downwards into the desired position and ensure that it engages.
  • Use the head restraint only when it is engaged.
  • To move forwards: press release button 2 and pull the head restraint forwards until it engages in the desired position.
  • To move backwards: press release button 2 and slide the head restraint backwards into the desired position.
  • To remove: press release button 1 and pull the head restraint up and out.
  • To install: press the head restraint with detent into the holes on the left-hand side when viewed in the direction of travel until it engages.

Switching the seat heating on and off

WARNING Risk of burns due to repeatedly switching on the seat heating

Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and seat backrest padding to become very hot. The health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries.

  • Do not repeatedly switch on the seat heating.
 

To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactivated after it is switched on repeatedly.

Requirements:

  • The power supply has been switched on.

  • To switch on: press button 1. All indicator lamps on the button light up.
  • To lower the level: press button 1 until the required heating level is reached. Depending on the heating level, one to three indicator lamps light up.
  • To switch off: press button 1 until all indicator lamps are off.
  • The seat heating automatically switches back out of the three heating levels after 8, 10 and 20 minutes until the seat heating switches off.

Steering Wheel

Adjusting the steering wheel

WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular:

  • If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion
  • If you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion
  • Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.
 

 

WARNING Risk of accident due to unlocked steering wheel

The steering wheel may move unexpectedly if it is unlocked while the vehicle is in motion.

  • Make sure that the steering wheel is locked before driving off.
  • Never unlock the steering wheel when the vehicle is in motion.
 

 

WARNING Risk of entrapment for children when adjusting the steering wheel

Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel.

  • Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
  • When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
 

 

Adjusting the steering wheel

  • 1 Lever
  • 2 Steering column height
  • 3 Steering column fore-and-aft adjustment
  • To unlock: swing lever 1 down as far as it will go. The steering wheel is unlocked.
  • To lock: pull lever 1 up as far as it will go. The steering wheel is locked.

Stowage Areas

Overview of the front stowage compartments

  • 1 Lockable compartment above windshield (subject to a maximum load of 4 lb (2 kg))
  • 2 Windshield storage compartment with two cup holders/ashtray storage space. Storage compartment with cover, depending on specification
  • 3 Center console storage compartment with USB port, charging interface, NFC interface and 12 V socket
  • 4 Storage compartment above windshield (subject to a maximum load of 5 lb (2.5 kg))
  • 5 Co-driver side storage compartment (subject to a maximum load of 11 lb (5 kg))
  • 6 Cup holders 
  • 7 Storage compartment in the doors

Information about the bottle holder

  • 1 Bottle holder in the front doors (example: front passenger door)

Cup Holders

Overview of cup holders in the center console

WARNING ‑ Risk of accident or injury when using the cup holder while the vehicle is moving

The cup holder cannot secure containers while the vehicle is moving. If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is moving, the container may be flung around and liquids may be spilled. The vehicle occupants may come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded. You could be distracted from traffic conditions and you may lose control of the vehicle.

  • Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is stationary.
  • Only use the cup holder for containers of the right size.
  • Close the container, particularly if the liquid is hot.
 

The cup holders for the driver and front passenger are in the center console. The key holder 1 for vehicles with a reduced antenna detection range (KEYLESS-START) is located in the driver's cup holder. For vehicles with manual transmission, the key holder is located in the front passenger's cup holder.

Opening the cup holder in the rear passenger compartment

WARNING Risk of injury due to cup holder being extended when exiting the vehicle

You may bump into the cup holder.

  • Before getting out of the vehicle, push the cup holder back under the rear bench seat.
 

  • To open: press the cup holder 1 or 2.
  • Fold out the cup holder.
  • To close: slide the cup holder 1 or 2 back in until it engages.

Ashtray and cigarette lighter

Using ashtrays

  • Place the closed ashtray in a cup holder in the windshield stowage compartments.
  • Check that the ashtray is seated securely.
  • Do not place the ashtray in the center console cup holders. It cannot sit securely here.

Using the cigarette lighter in the center console

WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from hot cigarette lighter

You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the cigarette lighter. In addition, flammable materials may ignite if:

  • you drop the hot cigarette lighter
  • a child holds the hot cigarette lighter to objects, for example
  • Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.
  • Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children.
  • Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
 

Requirements:

  • The vehicle is switched on.

  • Press in cigarette lighter 1. The cigarette lighter will pop out when the heating element is red-hot.

Sockets

Using the 12V Sockets

Requirements:

  • Only devices with a maximum power consumption of 180 W (15 A) may be connected.

12 V socket in storage compartment

  • Open the lid of the storage compartment in the center console .
  • Fold up cover 1 of the socket.
  • Insert the plug of the device.
  • Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle has additional 12 V sockets:
    • In the lower control panel in the front center console
    • In the driver's seat
    • In the cargo compartment

Using the 115 V socket in the lower control panel

DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to damaged connecting cables or sockets

If a suitable device is connected, the 115 V socket will be carrying a high voltage. If the connecting cable or the 115 V socket is pulled out of the trim or is damaged or wet, you could receive an electric shock.

  • Only use dry and damage-free connecting cables.
  • When the ignition is switched off, ensure that the 115 V socket is dry.
  • If the 115 V socket is damaged or gets pulled out of the paneling, immediately have the socket checked or replaced at a qualified specialized workshop.
  • Never plug the connecting cable into a 115 V socket that is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim.
 

 

DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to incorrect handling of the socket

You could receive an electric shock:

  • if you reach into the socket.
  • if you insert unsuitable devices or objects into the socket.
  • Do not reach into the socket.
  • Only connect suitable devices to the socket
 

Requirements:

  • The devices must be equipped with a suitable plug which conforms to the standards specific to the country you are in.
  • Only devices up to a maximum of 150 watts are permitted.
  • Do not use multiple socket outlets.

  • Open flap 3.
  • Insert the plug of the device into 115 V socket 1. When the on-board electrical system voltage is sufficient, indicator lamp 2 lights up.
  • If you will not be using the 115 V power socket, keep the flap closed.

Charging a mobile phone using the USB port in the rear passenger compartment

  • Place the mobile phone in stowage compartment 1 and connect it to USB port 2 to charge.

Wirelessly charging the mobile phone and coupling with the exterior antenna

Notes on wirelessly charging the mobile phone

WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly

If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open storage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or abrupt changes in direction.

  • Always store objects such that they cannot be thrown around in such situations.
  • Always make sure that objects do not protrude from storage spaces, parcel nets or storage nets.
  • Close the lockable storage spaces before starting a journey.
  • Stow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the cargo compartment.
 

Comply with the instructions for loading the vehicle.

WARNING Risk of fire from placing objects in the mobile phone storage compartment

Placing other objects in the mobile phone storage compartment could constitute a fire hazard.

  • Apart from a mobile phone, do not place any other objects in the mobile phone storage compartment, especially those made of metal.
 

Observe the following notes on wireless charging:

  • The charging function is only available when the drive system has been started.
  • In some cases, it may not be possible to charge small mobile phones at every position of the mobile phone compartment.
  • It may not be possible to charge large mobile phones that do not rest in the mobile phone receptacle.
  • The mobile phone can warm up during the charging process. This depends on the applications (apps) currently running.
  • For more efficient charging, the protective case should be removed from the mobile phone. Protective cases designed for wireless charging are an exception.
  • When charging, the mat should be used if possible.

Charging the mobile phone wirelessly in the front

Requirements:

  • The mobile phone must be suitable for wireless charging.

  • Open the flap of stowage compartment 1 above the media display.
  • Place the mobile phone as centrally as possible with the display facing upwards on the marked surface of mat 2. When the charging symbol is shown in the multimedia system, the mobile phone is being charged.Malfunctions during charging are shown in the media display of the multimedia system.
  • The mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g. using clean, lukewarm water.

Installing or removing the floor mats

WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell

Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle.

  • Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.
  • Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals.
  • Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another.
 

  • To install: press pushbuttons 1 onto holders 2.
  • To remove: pull the floor mats off holders 2.

Lighting 

Notes on changing the lights when driving abroad 

Vehicles with halogen or static LED headlamps: Changing the headlamps is not necessary. The legal requirements will also be fulfilled in countries with left and right-hand traffic.

Information about lighting systems and your responsibility

The vehicle's various lighting systems are only aids. The vehicle driver is responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility, statutory conditions and traffic conditions.

Operating the Light Switch

  • 1 Activates or deactivates parking lights and license plate and instrument lighting.
  • 2 Activates or deactivates automatic driving lights/daytime running lights (preferred light switch position).
  • 3 Activates or deactivates low beam/ high beam.
  • 4 Activates or deactivates fog light.
  • 5 Activates or deactivates rear fog light.
  • 6 Applies or releases the electric parking brake.
  • If you hear a warning tone when exiting the vehicle, the lights may still be on.
  • The turn signal light, the high beam and the high-beam flasher are operated with the combination switch.
  • Leaving the parking lights on for several hours drains the battery. If the battery condition of charge is very low, the parking lights will switch off automatically to enable the next vehicle start.

Automatic driving lights function

WARNING Risk of accident when the low beam is switched off in poor visibility

When the light switch is set to Auto, the low beam may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility such as spray.

  • In such cases, turn the light switch to .
 

The automatic driving lights are only an aid. Responsibility for vehicle lighting rests with you. Turn the light switch from  to  immediately in the event of fog, snow or spray. Otherwise, the driving light will be temporarily interrupted. To switch the automatic driving lights on:

  • Turn the light switch to the  position. Switch the power supply on: the parking lights will automatically switch on or off depending on the brightness of the ambient light.
  • The daytime running lights are switched on when the vehicle is started. The parking lights and the low beam also switch on or off depending on the brightness of the ambient light.
  • When the low beam is switched on, the  indicator lamp on the instrument cluster will also switch on.

Activating/deactivating the fog lights

Requirements:

  • The light switch is in the  or  position.
  • The vehicle has been switched on or started.
  • To switch the fog light on or off: press button 7.
  • To switch the rear fog light on or off: press button 6.
  • Comply with the country-specific regulations for using the rear fog lamp.

Operating the combination light switch

  • 1 High beam
  • 2 Right turn signal light
  • 3 Headlamp flashing
  • 4 Left turn signal light
  • Use the combination switch to select the desired function.

Switching on high beam

  • Switch on the low beam.
  • Push the combination switch forwards 1. The  indicator lamp on the instrument cluster will light up. The combination switch will return to its starting position.
  • In the  position, the high beam switches on only in darkness and when the vehicle is switched on.
  • To switch off: push the combination switch forwards 1 or briefly pull it in the direction of arrow 3 (the action for headlamp flashing switches high beam off). The  indicator lamp on the instrument cluster will go out. The combination switch will return to its starting position.
  • Vehicles with High beam Assist: when high beam Assist is active, it controls the activation and deactivation of the high beam.
  • Headlamp flashing: Briefly pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow 3.

Turn signal light

  • To indicate: push the combination switch in the required direction 2 or 4 until it engages. When significant steering movements are made, the combination switch will automatically reset itself.
  • To indicate briefly: tap the combination switch briefly in the required direction 2 or 4. The corresponding turn signal lamp will flash three times.

Switching the hazard warning light system on/off

  • Press button 1.
  • If you operate a turn signal indicator while the hazard warning light system is switched on, only the turn signal lamps on the relevant side of the vehicle will light up.
  • The hazard warning light system will work even when the vehicle has been switched off.

Cornering light function

\

The cornering light improves the illumination of the roadway over a wide angle in the turning direction, e.g. enabling better visibility in tight bends.

The function is active under the following conditions:

  • The speed is less than 37 mph (60 km/h) and the indicator has been switched on or the steering wheel is turned.
  • The speed is between 37 mph (60 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h) and the steering wheel is turned.

The cornering light may still light up for a short time but is switched off automatically after a maximum of three minutes.

  • When reverse gear is engaged, the lighting switches to the opposite side.

Highbeam Assist

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Function

WARNING Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist

Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not react to:

  • Road users without lights, e.g. pedestrians
  • Road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
  • Road users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. by a barrier

On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognize other road users with their own lighting, or may recognize them too late. In these, or in similar situations, the automatic high beam will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users.

  • Always observe the road and traffic conditions carefully and switch off the high beam in good time.
 

The Adaptive Highbeam Assist automatically switches between the following settings:

  • Low beam
  • High beam

The system detects that vehicle lights are approaching in the opposite direction or driving ahead of the vehicle. At speeds greater than 19 mph (30 km/h), the system will switch to the following setting:

  • If no other road users are detected, high beam will switch on automatically.

At speeds lower than 16 mph (25 km/h) or if there is sufficient street lighting, the system will switch to the following setting:

  • High beam will automatically switch off.

System limits

Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take the road, weather or traffic conditions into consideration. The detection of obstacles may be restricted if:

  • visibility is poor, e.g. in fog, heavy rain or snow.
  • the sensors are dirty or covered.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for ensuring correct vehicle lighting in accordance with the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions. The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel.

Switching Highbeam Assist on/off

Requirements:

  • The light switch is in the  position.
  • To switch on: switch on high beam using the combination switch. When the high beam is switched on automatically in the dark, the  indicator lamp will light up on the instrument cluster display.
  • To switch off: switch off high beam using the combination switch.

Setting the exterior lighting switch-off delay time

Requirements:

  • The light switch is in the  position.

  • Set a switch-off delay time.

When the vehicle is switched off, the exterior lighting will be activated for the set time.

Activating and deactivating the surround lighting

Multimedia system:

  • Activate or deactivate the function.

The surround lighting will remain on for 40 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked. When you start the vehicle, the surround lighting will be deactivated and the automatic driving lights activated.

Adjusting the interior lighting

Versions 1 to 4

  • 1  Switches the front-left reading lamp on/off
  • 2 To switch off automatic interior lighting control: press the  button. The interior lighting will switch on automatically if you:
    • Unlock the vehicle
    • Open a door
  •  Switches the (front) interior lighting on/off
  •  Switches the rear passenger compartment/cargo compartment lamp on/off
  •  Switches the front-right reading lamp on/off

Adjusting the interior lighting for body manufacturer add-on equipment

Variants 1 and 2 combined

  • 1  Switches the front left reading lamp on/off
  • 2  Activates/deactivates automatic interior lighting control
  • 3  Switches the front interior lighting on/off
  • 4  Switches the body manufacturer lamps on/off
  • 5  Switches the front right reading lamp on/off
  • To switch the front left reading lamp on/off: press button 1.
  • To deactivate automatic interior lighting control: press button 2. Interior lighting control will switch on automatically if you do the following, for example:
    • Unlock the vehicle
    • Open a door
  • To switch the front interior lighting on/off: press button 3.
  • To switch body manufacturer lamps on/off: press button 4.
    • Your vehicle may be equipped with a functional feedback system:  will light up in red if the body manufacturer lamps are switched on.
    • If the body manufacturer lamps have been switched on manually, they will also remain switched on for an extended period of time after locking.
  • This period of time is shortened if there is undervoltage in the starter battery.
  • If the body manufacturer lamps have been switched off automatically to protect the battery, restart the vehicle before switching them on again.
  • The body manufacturer lamps can be switched on only when the battery voltage is stable.
  • To switch the front right reading lamp on/off: press button 5.

Adjusting interior lighting on bus equipment

  • 1  Activates/deactivates the bus function
  • 2  Switches the front left reading lamp on/off
  • 3  Activates/deactivates automatic interior lighting control
  • 4  Switches the front interior lighting on/off
  • 5  Switches passenger compartment lighting on/off
  • 6  Switches the front right reading lamp on/off
  • 7  Activates/deactivates reading lighting in the passenger compartment
  • # To activate the bus function: press button 1. The LED will light up. The bus function will be in one of the following modes:
    • Stop mode If the vehicle comes to a standstill at a stop, for example, and the passenger door opens, the passenger compartment will be illuminated (undimmed).
    • Driving mode If all doors are closed and the vehicle is traveling faster than walking pace, the passenger compartment will be illuminated (dimmed).
    • Automatic off mode If automatic interior lighting control 3 is deactivated, thereby activating automatic off mode, the passenger compartment will be continuously illuminated (dimmed).

When the bus function is activated, the modes can be selected via button 5 that switches passenger compartment lighting on/off. Passenger compartment lighting will then be deactivated completely. When button 5 is pressed again to switch passenger compartment lighting on/off, the bus function will again be in one of the modes.

  • If automatic interior lighting control 3 was previously activated, automatic off mode will be inactive again.
  • If automatic off mode was not previously activated, either driving or stop mode will be active.

The bus function can be operated independently of button 5 that switches passenger compartment lighting on/off. The passenger compartment lighting must not be switched on beforehand.

  • To deactivate the bus function: press button 1. The LED will not light up.
  • To switch the front left reading lamp on/off: press button 2.
  • To deactivate automatic interior lighting control: press button 3. Interior lighting control will switch on automatically if you do the following, for example:
    • Unlock the vehicle
    • Open a door
  • To switch the front interior lighting on/off: press button 4.
  • To switch passenger compartment lighting on or off: press button 5.
  • To switch the front right reading lamp on/off: press button 6.
  • To activate reading lighting in the passenger compartment: press button 7. The LED will light up. Passengers will be able to switch the reading lamps on and off.
  • To deactivate reading lighting in the passenger compartment: press button 7. The LED will not light up. Passengers will no longer be able to operate the reading lamps.

Switching the reading lamp above the passenger seat on and off (bus equipment)

  • Press the  button above the passenger seat.

Rear interior lighting

  • 1 Switches rear compartment/cargo compartment lamp on or off

Motion detector

WARNING Risk of injury due to laser beam of the motion detector

The motion detector emits non-visible radiation from LEDs that are classified as class 1M lasers. This may damage the retina in the following situations:

  • If you look directly into the unfiltered laser beam of the motion detector for an extended period.
  • If you look directly into the laser beam of the motion detector with optical instruments, such as glasses or magnifying glasses.
  • Never look directly into the motion detector.
 

The motion detector is located in the cargo compartment behind the partition, in the middle of the roof.

  • 1 Position of motion detector

If the vehicle is equipped with a motion detector, the cargo compartment lamp is also activated via the motion detector. If the motion detector detects movement in the cargo compartment while the vehicle is stationary, the cargo compartment lamp will switch on for approximately two minutes. The cargo compartment lamp will be switched on via the motion detector in the following situations:

  • The vehicle is stationary, the parking brake is applied and you are not depressing the brake pedal.
  • Vehicles with automatic transmission: the selector lever is in position  and you are not depressing the brake pedal.
  • The vehicle has not been locked from the outside using the key.

If no change to the vehicle, such as a door opening, is detected over several hours, the motion detector will automatically switch off. This prevents the battery from discharging.

Switching the interior lighting switch-off delay time on/off

Multimedia system:

  • Switch the switch-off delay time on or off. If the function is active, the interior lighting will switch on automatically when the vehicle is unlocked or switched off.

Changing Bulbs

Instructions for replacing illuminants

WARNING Risk of burns from hot component parts whilst replacing a bulb

Bulbs, lamps and plug connectors can become very hot during operation. When replacing a bulb, you could burn yourself on these component parts.

  • Allow the component parts to cool down before replacing the bulbs.
 

Important safety notes

  • Before changing the bulbs, switch off the vehicle's lighting system. This will prevent a short circuit.
  • Use only spare bulbs of the same type and with the correct voltage.
  • Use bulbs only in enclosed lamps that have been designed for them.
  • Do not use any illuminant that has been dropped or has scratches on its glass tube. Otherwise, the illuminant may explode.
  • The illuminant may explode under the following conditions:
    • if it is hot and you touch it
    • if you drop it
    • if you scratch it
  • Stains on the glass tube will reduce the service life of the illuminant. Do not touch the glass tube with your bare hands. If necessary, clean the glass tube with alcohol or spirits while it is cold and wipe it down with a lint-free cloth.
  • Protect light bulbs from humidity and do not bring them into contact with liquids.

Always ensure the bulbs are firmly secured. If your vehicle is equipped with LED modules, you can check this as follows: the light cone will move from top to bottom and back again when the vehicle starts. For this to work, low beam needs to have been switched on before the vehicle is started. Bulbs and lamps are major elements in vehicle safety. Therefore, ensure that they are always working. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. If the new light source also does not light up, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Replacing front light bulbs (vehicles with halogen headlamps)

You can replace the following light sources.

Halogen headlamps

  • 1 High beam/daytime running lights: H15 55 W/15 W
  • 2 Low beam/perimeter light: H7 55 W/W 5 W
  • 3 Turn signal light: 3457 NAK 28 W

Replacing halogen headlamps

Requirements:

  • Low beam: bulb type H7 55 W
  • High beam/daytime running lamps: bulb type H15 55 W/15 W
  • Perimeter lights: bulb type W 5 W
  • Turn signal lights: bulb type 3457 NAK 28 W

  • 1 Low beam/perimeter light housing cover
  • 2 High beam/daytime running lamps housing cover
  • 3 Turn signal light socket

Replacing instructions:

  • Switch off the lighting system.
  • Low beam/perimeter light: remove housing cover 1 towards the rea
  • Pull out the socket towards the rear.
  • Remove the bulb from the socket.
  • Insert the new bulb into the socket such that the base of the bulb rests fully against the base of the socket.
  • Align and insert the socket.
  • Attach housing cover 1.
  • High beam/daytime running lamps: remove housing cover 2 towards the rear.
  • Turn the socket counter-clockwise and pull it out.
  • Remove the bulb from the socket.
  • Insert the new bulb into the socket such that the base of the bulb rests fully against the base of the socket.
  • Insert the socket and turn it clockwise.
  • Attach housing cover 2.
  •  Turn signal light:
  • Turn socket 3 counter-clockwise and remove it.
  • Gently turn the bulb counter-clockwise and take it out of the socket.
  • Insert the new bulb into the socket and turn it clockwise.
  • Insert socket 3 and turn it clockwise.

Additional turn signal light

Requirements:

  • Additional turn signal light (all-wheel drive vehicles): bulb type P 21 W

  • Switch off the lighting system.
  • Unscrew screws 1 and remove light lens 2.
  • Gently turn the light source counter-clockwise and take it out of the socket.
  • Insert the new light source into the socket and turn it clockwise.
  • Position light lens 2 and tighten screws 1.

Replacing rear light bulbs (Cargo Van and Passenger Van)

Overview of rear bulb types (Cargo Van and Passenger Van). You can replace the following bulbs.

Vehicles with standard tail lamps

  • 1 Brake light/tail light/perimeter light: P 21 W 
  • 2 Backing up light: P 21 W
  • 3 License plate lamp: W 5 W
  • 4 Rear fog light: P 21 W

You can replace the following bulbs.

Vehicles with partial LED tail lamps

  • 1 Backing up light: P 21 W
  • 2 License plate lamp: W 5 W
  • 3 Rear fog light: P 21 W

Changing the tail lamps (Cargo Van and Passenger Van)

Requirements:

  • Brake lights/tail lights/perimeter lights: bulb type P 21 W
  • Backing up lights: bulb type P 21 W
  • Rear fog lights: bulb type P 21 W

  • 1 Brake light/tail light/perimeter light
  • 2 Backing up light
  • 3 Rear fog light

Instructions

  • Switch off the lighting system.
  • Open the rear-end door.

  • To remove: loosen screws 1 and pull out the tail lamp in the direction of the arrow.
  • Remove the plug from bulb mount 3.
  • Loosen screws 2 and remove bulb mount 3 from the tail lamp.
  • Gently turn the bulb counter-clockwise and take it out of the socket.
  • Insert the new bulb into the socket and turn it clockwise.
  • To install: set bulb mount 3 on the tail lamp and screw in screws 2.
  • Press the plug into bulb mount 3.
  • Insert the tail lamp and screw in screws 1.

License plate lamp: 

Requirements: License plate lamp: light bulb type W 5 W

  • Switch off the lighting system.
  • Place a screwdriver, for example, at opening 2 between lamp 3 and panel 1 and carefully pry off lamp 3.
  • Remove lamp 3 from panel 1.
  • Rotate the bulb holder by around 45° and detach it from the lamp.
  • Remove the light bulb.
  • Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder.
  • Insert the bulb holder into the lamp and rotate it by around 45°.
  • Insert the lamp into the panel opening until it engages.

Replacing rear light bulbs (chassis)

Overview of rear light source types (chassis) You can replace the following light sources.

Vehicles with standard tail lamps

  • 1 Clearance lamp: R 5 W 
  • 2 Tail light: R 5 W 
  • 3 Brake light: P 21 W 
  • 4 Turn signal lights: PY 21 W
  • 5 Backing up light: P 21 W
  • 6 Rear fog light (driver's side): P 21 W
  • 7 License plate lamp: R 5 W

Replacing the tail lamps on the chassis

Requirements:

  • Rear fog lights: bulb type P 21 W
  • License plate lighting: bulb type R 5 W
  • Backing up lights: bulb type P 21 W
  • Turn signal lights: bulb type PY 21 W
  • Clearance lamps: bulb type R 5 W
  • Brake lights: bulb type P 21 W
  • Tail lights: bulb type R 5 W

  • 1 Light lens
  • 2 Screws
  • 3 Rear fog light
  • 4 License plate lamp
  • 5 Backing up light
  • 6 Turn signal light
  • 7 Clearance lamp
  • 8 Brake light
  • 9 Tail light

Instructions:

  • Switch off the lighting system.
  • Unscrew screws 2 and remove light lens 1.
  • Remove the plug from the bulb mount.
  • Gently turn the bulb counter-clockwise and take it out of the socket.
  • Insert the new bulb into the socket and turn it clockwise.
  • Position light lens 1 and tighten screws 2.

Replacing interior light bulbs

Replacing rear interior lamps

Requirements: For the standard bulb failure indicator function to work correctly, only lights bulbs must be used that are the same type and power as those installed during production.

Instructions:

  • Switch off the interior lighting.
  • Press in catch spring of lens 1 with a suitable object e.g. a screwdriver, and then lever off the lens with the lamp housing.
  • To pull back lens from the lamp housing: press the lugs of lens 2 inwards.
  • Remove light bulb 3 from the lamp housing.
  • Insert the new light bulb.
  • Insert the lens in the lamp housing until it engages.
  • Place the lens with the lamp housing in position and engage it.

Windshield Wipers

Switching the windshield wipers on and off

  • 1 Single wipe / wiping with washer fluid
    • 1 Windshield wipers off
    • 2 Intermittent wiping, normal Vehicles with rain sensors: automatic wiping, normal
    • 3 Intermittent wiping, frequent Vehicles with rain sensors: automatic wiping, frequent
    • 4 Continuous wiping, slow
    • 5 Continuous wiping, fast
  • Turn the combination switch to the corresponding position 1 – 5.
  • Single wipe/washing: press the button on the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1.
    • Single wipe
    • Wiping with washer fluid

Switching the rear window wiper on and off

  • 1 Single wipe/wash
  • 2 Intermittent wiping
  • Single wipe: press button 1 to the pressure point.
  • Wiping with washer fluid: press button 1 beyond the pressure point.
  • To switch intermittent wiping on or off: press button 2. The  symbol will appear on the instrument cluster when the rear window wiper is switched on.

Replacing the windshield wiper blades

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the windshield wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced

If the windshield wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm.

  • Always switch off the windshield wipers and vehicle before changing the wiper blades.
 

 

WARNING Risk of injury from using the windshield wipers when the hood is open

If the windshield wipers start moving when the hood is open, you could be trapped by the wiper linkage.

  • Always switch off the windshield wipers and vehicle before opening the hood.
 

Replacing the wiper blades

  • If the wiper blades are worn out, they will no longer wipe the windshield properly. Replace the wiper blades twice a year, preferably in spring and fall.

  • Fold wiper arm 3 away from the windshield.
  • Hold wiper arm 3 and turn the wiper blade away from wiper arm 3 in the direction of the arrow as far as it will go.
  • Slide catch 2 upwards in the direction of the arrow until it engages.
  • Fold the wiper blade back onto the wiper arm.
  • Remove the wiper blade 1 from the wiper arm.
  • Insert new wiper blade 1 in the holder on wiper arm 3.

When doing so, take into account the different lengths of the wiper blades:

  • Driver's side: long wiper blade
  • Front passenger side: short wiper blade
  • Slide catch 2 downwards until it engages.
  • Fold wiper arm 3 back onto the windshield.

Replacing the windshield wiper blades (WET WIPER SYSTEM)

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the windshield wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced

If the windshield wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm.

  • Always switch off the windshield wipers and vehicle before changing the wiper blades.
 

 

WARNING Risk of injury from using the windshield wipers when the hood is open

If the windshield wipers start moving when the hood is open, you could be trapped by the wiper linkage.

  • Always switch off the windshield wipers and vehicle before opening the hood.
 

Replacing the wiper blades

If the wiper blades are worn out, they will no longer wipe the windshield properly. Replace the wiper blades twice a year, preferably in spring and fall.

  • Fold wiper arm 3 away from the windshield.
  • Hold wiper arm 3 and turn the wiper blade away from wiper arm 3 in the direction of the arrow as far as it will go.
  • Slide catch 2 upwards in the direction of the arrow until it engages.
  • Remove wiper blade 1 from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 4.
  • Carefully remove hose 5 from the wiper blade. # Attach hose 5 to the new wiper blade.
  • Insert new wiper blade 1 in the holder on wiper arm 3.
  • When doing so, take into account the different lengths of the wiper blades:
    • Driver's side: long wiper blade
    • Front passenger side: short wiper blade
  • Slide catch 2 downwards until it engages.
  • Fold the wiper blade back onto the wiper arm.
  • Fold wiper arm 3 back onto the windshield.

Replacing rear window wiper blades

  • Fold wiper arm 3 away from the rear window.
  • Press both retaining clips 2 together in the direction of the arrow and swivel the wiper blade away from the wiper arm.
  • Pull wiper blade 1 upwards out of the holder on wiper arm 3.
  • Insert new wiper blade 1 in the holder on wiper arm 3.
  • Push new wiper blade 1 onto wiper arm 3 until the retaining clips engage.
  • Fold wiper arm 3 back onto the rear window.

Mirrors

Operating the outside mirrors

WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular:

  • If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion
  • If you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion
  • Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.
 

 

WARNING Risk of accident due to misjudgment of distance when using the front-passenger mirror

The outside mirror on the front passenger side reflects objects on a smaller scale. The objects in view are in fact closer than they appear.

  • Therefore, always look over your shoulder to check the actual distance between you and the road users traveling behind you.
 

Adjusting the outside mirrors manually

  • Adjust the outside mirrors to the correct position manually.
  • To engage an outside mirror that has been pushed out of position: push the outside mirror into position manually.

Adjusting the outside mirrors electrically

  • Before setting off, switch on the power supply or the vehicle.
  • To fold in or out: briefly press button 2.
  • To select: use button 1 or 3 to select the outside mirror to be adjusted.
  • To set: use button 4 to set the position of the mirror glass.
  • To engage an outside mirror that has been pushed out of position: press and hold button 2. You will hear a click and the mirror will audibly engage in position. The outside mirror is set in the correct position.

Heating the outside mirrors

  • Vehicles without a rear window heater: at low temperatures, the mirror heater will switch on automatically once the vehicle has been started.
  • Vehicles with a rear window heater: at low temperatures, the mirror heater will switch on automatically once the vehicle has been started. The mirror heater can also be switched on together with the rear window heater using the rear window heater button.

Using the digital inside rearview mirror

The vehicle may be equipped with a digital inside rearview mirror. This uses a camera on top of the roof at the rear to provide a better view to the rear. The inside rearview mirror can be used either as a standard inside rearview mirror or as a display. To prevent glare from the digital inside rearview mirror, first set the digital inside rearview mirror as the standard inside rearview mirror.

Digital image noise may occur on the display under certain circumstances in unfavorable ambient light. Certain types of sunlight, e.g. sun low on the horizon or light from another intense light source, can reduce the display's contrast and cause it to become too bright. In such situations, objects on the display may be obscured or difficult to see. In these cases, be particularly careful and adapt your driving style accordingly.

Drivers must always wear the necessary personal visual aids required for them to drive a vehicle. Drivers with presbyopia (age-related long-sightedness) should, if necessary, wear visual aids with multifocal lenses to be sufficiently able to see traffic including via the displays. If the camera on top of the roof at the rear is dirty, the image may be impaired. In this case, clean the camera manually with a damp cloth. Observe the notes on cleaning the digital inside rearview mirror.

  • To use the standard inside rearview mirror: move the switch to position 1.
  • To use the display: move the switch to position 2.

Adjusting the display brightness

The digital inside rearview mirror is equipped with light sensors on the front and back and automatically adjusts the brightness of the display to the ambient light. Do not cover the light sensors, e.g. with a sticker.

  • Press menu button 3 once.
  • Press button 4 to reduce the display brightness. or
  • Press button 5 to increase the display brightness.

Adjusting the angle of the camera

  • Press menu button 3 twice.
  • Press button 4 to move the angle downwards. or
  • Press button 5 to move the angle upwards.

Activating and deactivating the rear view camera image

The vehicle may be equipped with a rear view camera with image in the inside rearview mirror.

  • To activate, put the vehicle in reverse gear or press button 5.
  • To deactivate, take the vehicle out of reverse gear or press button 5 again.

Error mode of the digital inside rearview mirror

If a system error occurs, e.g. if the camera fails, a crossed-out camera will appear at the top left of the display and no camera image will be visible in the mirror.

  • Switch to the standard inside rearview mirror if there is a system error.

If the vehicle is equipped with a rear view camera with image in the inside rearview mirror and a system error occurs, a crossed out camera with the number 2 will appear on the left side of the display. In this case, no camera image is available for maneuvering.

Setting anti-glare mode for the inside rearview mirror

  • Fold anti-glare lever 1 in the direction of the arrow.

Overview of climate control systems

Heating System Overview

  • 1 Sets the temperature
  • 2  Switches the rear passenger compartment heating on/off
  • 3  Switches the rear window defroster on/off
  • 4  Switches footwell air distribution on/off
  • 5  Switches windshield demisting on/off 
  • 6 Vehicles with stationary heater or heater booster:  switches the stationary heater or heater booster on/off 
  • 7 Sets the airflow
  • The indicator lamps on the buttons signal that the function in question has been activated.

TEMPMATIC overview

  • 1  Sets the temperature
  • 2 Display
  • 3  Sets the airflow
  • 4  Vehicles with windshield heaters: switches the windshield heater on/off
  • 5 Vehicles with stationary heaters or booster heaters:  switches the stationary heater or booster heater on/off 
  • 6 Vehicles with a rear window defroster:  switches the rear window defroster on/off
  • 7  Switches air-recirculation mode on/off
  • 8  Switches windshield demisting on/off
  • 9  Sets the air distribution
  • 10  Switches the A/C function on/off
  • 11  Vehicles with dual-zone climate control systems: adjusts the rear passenger compartment climate control/heating (indicator lamp flashes)
  • The indicator lamps on the buttons signal that the function in question has been activated.

3-zone automatic climate control overview

  • 1  Sets the temperature
  • 2 Display
  • 3  Sets the airflow
  • 4  Vehicles with windshield heater: switches the windshield heater on/off 
  • 5 Vehicles with stationary heaters or booster heaters:  switches the stationary heater or booster heater on/off 
  • 6 Vehicles with a rear window heater:  switches the rear window heater on/off
  • 7  Switches air-recirculation mode on/off
  • 8  Switches windshield defrosting on/off 
  • 9  Sets the air distribution
  • 10  Switches the A/C function on/off 
  • 11  Sets climate control to automatic mode, front and rear 
  • 12  Activates/deactivates synchronization
  • 13  Vehicles with dual-zone climate control systems: adjusts the rear-compartment climate control/heating (indicator lamp flashes)
  • The indicator lamps on the buttons signal that the function in question has been activated.

Operating climate control systems

Switching the climate control system on/off

  • To switch on: set the airflow to 1 or higher on the front-compartment menu.
  • To switch off: set the airflow to 0 or OFF on the front-compartment menu. OFF will appear on the climate control system display.
  • When the climate control system is switched off, the windows may fog up more quickly. Switch the climate control system off only briefly.
  • If the front-compartment system has already been switched on and the rear passenger compartment system has been switched off, you can switch it on by turning up the blower on the rear passenger compartment menu. If the front-compartment system is switched on, the rear passenger compartment system will automatically switch on as well.

Setting the rear-compartment climate control

Requirements: The climate control system has been switched on

Setting the temperature and airflow with dual-zone and 3-zone automatic climate control:

  • Press the  button. The indicator lamp on the  button and the  symbol on the climate control system display will flash. The display will switch to the temperature and the blower on the rear menu.
  • Use the  and  rocker switches to set the required temperature and airflow on the rear-compartment menu.
  • If there are significant differences between the temperature settings of the front and rear systems, these cannot be regulated accurately.
  • If the rear-compartment climate control has been switched off, you can switch it on automatically by pressing the  button.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, climate control will switch on the roof-mounted air conditioning system or rear-compartment heating as required:

  • Vehicles with a roof-mounted air conditioning system: the rear compartment can only be cooled.
  • Vehicles with rear-compartment heating: the rear compartment can only be heated.

Switching off rear-compartment climate control via dual-zone and 3-zone automatic climate control:

  • Press the  button.
  • If the indicator lamp on the  button and the  symbol on the climate control system display flash, set the airflow to 0 on the rearcompartment menu.
  • Indicator lamp on: rear-compartment climate control has been switched on. Indicator lamp off: rear-compartment climate control has been switched off. Indicator lamp flashes: the setting mode of the rear-compartment climate control is active.

Switching the A/C function on/off

Requirements:

  • The climate control system has been switched on.

The A/C function controls the climate and dries the air inside the vehicle.

  • Press the  button.
  • Switch off the A/C function only briefly. Otherwise, the windows could fog up more quickly.
  • Condensation may leak from the underside of the vehicle in cooling mode. This is not a sign of a defect.

Automatically regulating climate control

Requirements:

  • The climate control system has been switched on.

Switching on automatic climate control In automatic mode, the temperature, airflow and air distribution are regulated and kept constant.

  • Press the  button. The display will show the temperature. The airflow and air distribution will disappear from the display. If the rear passenger compartment climate control has been switched on, the setting for the rear passenger compartment will be carried over.

Switching off automatic climate control  

  • Use the  rocker switch to change the airflow setting or the  button to change the air distribution. The other setting will remain unaffected by the change.

Automatically controlling climate control in the rear compartment

Requirements:

  • Rear compartment climate control has been switched on.

In automatic mode, the temperature, airflow and air distribution are regulated and kept constant.

  • Press the  button.
  • Press the  button.
  • Even if the front compartment system is in automatic mode, the rear compartment system can exit automatic mode if you adjust the blower on the rear compartment menu.
  • If the air is cooled and the driver's, front passenger or sliding door is opened, the rear air conditioning system blower will be turned down after around 15 minutes. When all doors have been closed again, the blower will be reset to the previous setting after around one minute.

Information on the air distribution settings

The symbols on the display indicate the vents through which the air is being directed.

TEMPMATIC

  •  Defroster and center air vents
  •  All vents
  •  Center vents
  •  Center and footwell vents

THERMOTRONIC

  •  Defroster vent
  •  Defroster and center air vents
  •  All vents
  •  Defroster and footwell vents
  •  Center vents
  •  Center and footwell vents
  •  Footwell vents

Setting the air distribution

Requirements:

  • The climate control system is switched on.
  • Press the  button repeatedly until the desired air distribution appears in the air conditioning system display.

Switching the synchronization function on/off

Requirements:

  • The climate control system has been switched on.

The synchronization function controls the climate control function centrally. The settings for the temperature and airflow in the front zone are automatically adopted for the rear zone.

  • Press the 0 button.
  • If the rear passenger compartment climate control has been switched off, you can switch it on automatically by pressing the  button.

Defrosting the windows

Windows fogged up on the inside

  • Vehicles with a heating system: press the  button. When windshield defrosting is switched on, the temperature and airflow cannot be adjusted.
  • Close the front air vents.
  • Vehicles with TEMPMATIC or THERMOTRONIC: press the  button and, if necessary, use the  button to direct the air onto the windshield .
  • Increase the airflow as necessary and close the front air vents (/ page 104).
  • If the windows remain fogged up: press the  button. When windshield defrosting is switched on, the temperature and airflow cannot be adjusted.  or no symbol will appear on the climate control system display.
  • Vehicles with a windshield heater: press the  button.

Depending on operation, you can achieve faster defrosting and drying of the windshield with the following settings:

  • Use the  button to direct air onto the windshield .
  • Set the temperature  and the airflow  to maximum using the rocker switches.
  • Close the front air vents.
  • Switch on the windshield heater .
  • Switch off the rear-compartment climate control .
  • For vehicles with heating systems: set the air distribution so that LEDs  and  are off.

Windows fogged up on the outside

  • Switch on the windshield wipers

Switching air-recirculation mode on/off

  • Press the  button. The interior air will be recirculated.

Air-recirculation mode will switch off automatically. When air-recirculation mode is switched on, the windows may fog up more quickly. Switch on air-recirculation mode only briefly.

Air-recirculation mode will automatically switch on in the following cases:

  • In high outside temperatures
  • While the vehicle is driving through a tunnel (vehicles with 3-zone automatic climate control only)
  • When the wipe-wash function is switched on

The indicator lamp on the  button will not light up in this case. After a maximum of 30 minutes, outside air will automatically be introduced again.

Switching the windshield heater on and off

  • In the event of high outside temperatures, the windshield heater may not switch on.
  • Press the  button. If the indicator lamp on the button lights up, the windshield heater has switched on.
  • The windshield heater switches off automatically after a few minutes.
  • If the battery voltage is too low, it may not be possible to switch the windshield heater on. If the battery voltage becomes too low while the windshield heater is in operation, the windshield heater will switch off automatically

Switching the rear window heater on or off

  • Press the  button. If the indicator lamp lights up, the rear window heater is switched on.

Operating air vents

Adjusting the front-compartment air vents

WARNING Risk of burns or frostbite due to being too close to the air vents

Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents.

  • Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance from the air vents.
  • If necessary, direct the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior.
 

  • To open or close: hold the center 2 of the air vent 1 and turn it to the left or right as far as it will go.
  • To set the air direction: hold the center 2 of the air vent 1 and swivel it upwards, downwards, to the left or to the right.

  • To open or close: turn the adjustment wheels 1 on the high-power air vents to the left or right as far as they will go.
  • Cooled air will flow out of the high-power air vents. Heating will not be possible. Open the high-power air vents only in summer during cooling mode and keep them closed in winter.

Adjusting air vents in the roof air duct

In vehicles with a rear air conditioning system, adjustable air vents have been integrated in the roof air duct.

  • To adjust the airflow: if necessary, open or close the air flaps in the air vents 1.
  • To adjust the air distribution: turn the air vents 1 to the required position.

Information about air vents in the rear passenger compartment

WARNING Risk of burns or frostbite due to being too close to the air vents

Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents.

  • Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance from the air vents.
  • If necessary, direct the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior.
 

Depending on the vehicle equipment, there will be an air duct or a heater with additional air vents in the rear footwell on the left-hand side 1. No objects may be placed there. Occupants must maintain a sufficient distance due to the warm air flow and air intake.

Auxiliary heating

Notes about Auxiliary heating

DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poisonous exhaust gases

If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventilation is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehicle. This is the case in enclosed spaces or if the vehicle gets stuck in snow, for example.

  • Always switch the stationary heater off in enclosed spaces without an air extraction system, e.g. in garages.
  • Keep the tailpipe and the area around the vehicle free from snow when the engine or the stationary heater is running.
  • Open a window on the side of the vehicle facing away from the wind to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air.

 

WARNING Risk of fire due to hot stationary heater components and exhaust gases

Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite.

  • When the stationary heater is switched on, make sure that:
  • Hot vehicle parts do not come into contact with flammable materials.
  • The exhaust gas can flow out of the stationary heater exhaust pipe unhindered.
  • The exhaust gas does not come into contact with flammable materials.

Vehicles with a modified fuel display: if an externally operated consumer is connected via the cable for the auxiliary heating, this is not taken into consideration on the "remaining range" display of the on-board computer. In this case, observe the fuel display. The fuel display reflects the actual fill level. If you are transporting hazardous materials, comply with the relevant safety regulations. Place objects a sufficient distance from the auxiliary heating outlet opening. Auxiliary heating works independently of the engine and complements the climate control system in the vehicle. Auxiliary heating heats the air inside the vehicle to the set temperature.

Hot-water auxiliary heater

Function of the hot-water auxiliary heater

The hot-water auxiliary heater complements your vehicle's climate control system, and has a heater booster, auxiliary heating and auxiliary ventilation function. In addition, the auxiliary heating system heats the engine coolant to protect the engine and save fuel during the warming-up phase. The auxiliary heating heats the air inside the vehicle to the set temperature. It is not dependent on the heat output of the running engine. The auxiliary heating is operated directly using the vehicle's fuel. For this reason, the fuel tank must have been filled above the reserve fuel level so that the auxiliary heating can work. The auxiliary heating automatically adapts its operating mode to the outside temperature and weather. It is therefore possible that the auxiliary heating may switch from ventilation to heating mode or from heating to ventilation mode. When the engine is running, auxiliary ventilation is not active. Auxiliary heating automatically switches itself off after a maximum of 50 minutes. You cannot use the "auxiliary ventilation" operating mode to cool the air inside the vehicle to below the outside temperature. Auxiliary heating helps to heat up the vehicle while the engine is running and at low outside temperatures.

Operating the hot-water auxiliary heater draws power from the vehicle battery. Therefore, drive a reasonably long distance after heating or ventilating the vehicle twice in succession at most. Auxiliary heating can be activated only at temperatures below 40 °F (4.5 °C).

Switching the hot-water auxiliary heater on/off with the button

Requirements:

  • The fuel tank is filled above the reserve level.
  • To switch the auxiliary heating on and off: press the  button.
  • To activate the specified temperature: switch on the vehicle and press the  button.
  • To deactivate the specified temperature: press the  button.
  • To set the specified temperature: set the temperature using the  button and press the  button.

Colors of the indicator lamp:

  • Blue: stationary ventilation has been switched on.
  • Red: the stationary heater has been switched on.
  • Yellow: a departure time has been preselected.

The stationary heater or stationary ventilation switches off after a maximum of 50 minutes.

  • To activate the heater booster mode: switch on the vehicle and press the  button.
  • To switch off heater booster mode: press the  button.

Setting the hot-water auxiliary heater using the on-board computer

Requirements:

  • The fuel tank is filled above the reserve level.
  • The vehicle is switched on.

On-board computer:

Setting the switch-on time

  • Select Settings.
  • Select the desired departure time.

Activating the departure time

  • Activate the departure time by ticking the box.
  • Ensure that A, B and C each correspond to a programmed departure time.
  • The programmed time will remain set only until the next time the vehicle is started.

Selecting a programmed time

  • Set the required programmed time – A, B or C.
  • The required programmed time – A, B or C – will appear only if the box to activate the departure time is ticked.
  • Select the required programmed time by swiping left or right, e.g. A, B or C.

Rectifying problems with the hot-water auxiliary heater

FAIL appears on the remote control display

Possible cause:

  • Signal transmission between transmitter and receiver is malfunctioning.
  • Change your position in relation to the vehicle, moving closer if necessary.

FAIL appears on the remote control display

Possible cause:

  • The starter battery is not sufficiently charged.
  • Charge the starter battery.

Possible cause:

  • The fuel tank is not filled up to the reserve level.
  • Refuel at the nearest gas station.

FAIL appears on the remote control display

Possible cause:

  • The auxiliary heating has malfunctioned.
  • Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Operating cargo compartment ventilation

If your vehicle is equipped with a roof ventilator, you can admit fresh air to the cargo compartment, or extract air from it as well.

  • Switch on the vehicle.
  • To switch on and extract: press switch 1 at the top. The roof ventilator will remove used air from the cargo compartment.
  • To switch on and admit fresh air: press switch 2 at the bottom. The roof ventilator will feed fresh air into the cargo compartment.
  • To switch off: place the switch in the center position.

Driving

Switching on power supply or vehicle with the start/stop button

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could, in particular:

  • open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users.
  • get out and be struck by oncoming traffic.
  • operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by:

  • releasing the parking brake.
  • changing the transmission position.
  • starting the vehicle.
  • Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
  • When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
  • Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.

 

 

DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning.

  • Never leave the engine or, if present, the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient ventilation.

 

WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable material in the engine compartment or the exhaust system

Flammable materials may ignite.

  • Therefore, check regularly that there are no flammable materials in the engine compartment or on the exhaust system.

Requirements:

  • The key is in detection range of the antenna and the key battery is not discharged.
  •  In addition, the following applies for vehicles with a reduced detection range: The key is located in the key holder provided in the driver's cup holder.

  • To switch on the power supply: Press button 1 once. You can, for example, activate the windshield wipers.

The power supply is switched off again when one of the following conditions is met:

  • The driver's door is open.
  • You press button 1 twice.
  • To switch on the vehicle: Press button 1 twice. The indicator lamps appear in the instrument cluster.

The vehicle is switched off again if one of the following conditions is met:

  • You do not start the vehicle within 15 minutes.
  • You press button 1 once.

Starting the engine

Starting the vehicle with the start/stop button

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could, in particular:

  • open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users.
  • get out and be struck by oncoming traffic.
  • operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by:

  • releasing the parking brake.
  • changing the transmission position.
  • starting the vehicle.

 

  • Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
  • When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
  • Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.

 

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to animals left unsecured or unattended in the vehicle

If you leave animals in the vehicle unattended or unsecured, they could possibly press buttons or switches. An animal may:

  • Activate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example
  • Switch systems on or off and endanger other road users

Unsecured animals may be thrown around in the vehicle in the event of an accident or sudden steering and braking maneuvers and injure vehicle occupants in the process.

  • Never leave animals in the vehicle unattended.
  • Always correctly secure animals while driving, e.g. using a suitable animal carrier.

Requirements:

  • The key is in detection range of the antenna and the key battery is not discharged.
  • In addition, the following applies for vehicles with a reduced detection range: The key is located in the key holder provided in the driver's cup holder.

  • Vehicles with automatic transmission: Shift the transmission to position  or .
  • Depress the brake pedal and press button 1 once.
  • If the vehicle does not start: Switch off unnecessary consumers and press button 1 once.
  • If the vehicle still does not start and the display message Place Key in Marked Space See Operator's Manual appears in the instrument cluster: Start the vehicle in emergency operation mode.

Starting the vehicle via Remote Online Services

Cooling or heating the vehicle interior before commencing your journey

  • Remote engine start may not be available in all Sprinter models. The availability of the function for the Sprinter depends on the services offered by "Mercedes me".

Ensure the following before starting the engine:

  • The legal stipulations in the area where your vehicle is parked allow engine starting by smartphone.
  • It is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked.
  • The fuel tank is sufficiently filled.
  • The starter battery is sufficiently charged.

Starting vehicle (Remote Online)

WARNING Risk of crushing or entrapment due to unintentional starting of the engine

Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the engine is started unintentionally during service or maintenance work.

  • Always secure the engine against unintentional starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work.

Requirements

  • The park position is engaged.
  • The anti-theft alarm system is not activated.
  • The panic alarm is not activated.
  • The hazard warning light system is switched off.
  • The hood is closed.
  • The doors are closed and locked.
  • Start the vehicle using the smartphone. After every vehicle start, the engine runs for ten minutes.

You can carry out a maximum of two consecutive starting attempts. The vehicle must be started once with the key before trying to start the vehicle again with the smartphone. You can stop the vehicle again at any time. Further information can be found in the smartphone app.

To prevent the engine from starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work:

  • Switch on the hazard warning light system. or
  • Unlock the doors. or
  • Open a side window or the soft top.

Starting the vehicle in emergency operation mode

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could, in particular:

  • open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users.
  • get out and be struck by oncoming traffic.
  • operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by:

  • releasing the parking brake.
  • changing the transmission position.
  • starting the vehicle.
  • Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
  • When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
  • Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.

If the vehicle does not start and the Place Key in Marked Space See Operator's Manual display message appears in the instrument cluster, you can start the vehicle in emergency operation mode.

  • Remove key 1 from your key ring.
  • Insert key 1 in the slot. The vehicle is started after a brief time.
  • Leave the key inserted during the entire journey. If you pull key 1 out of the slot, the engine continues to run.
  • Have key 1 checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

If the vehicle does not start:

  • Leave key 1 in the slot.
  • Depress the brake pedal.
  • Start the vehicle with the start/stop button.
  • You can also switch on the power supply or the vehicle with the start/stop button.

Breaking-in notes

Protect the engine during the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km) by:

  • Driving at varying road and engine speeds.
  • Shifting to the next highest gear at the very latest when the needle reaches the last third before the red area in the tachometer.
  • Avoiding stress on the vehicle such as driving at full throttle.
  • Not shifting manually to a lower gear to brake.
  • After 1,000 miles (1,500 km), gradually increasing the engine speed and accelerating the vehicle up to full speed.
  • Vehicles with automatic transmission: not depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown).

This also applies if the engine or parts of the drivetrain have been replaced. Also observe the following breaking-in notes:

  • After the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs, the sensor system of the ESP® driving safety system adjusts itself automatically after the vehicle has been driven a certain distance. Full system effectiveness is not reached until the end of this teach-in process.
  • New or exchanged brakepads, brake discs and tires only provide optimal braking and bonding after several hundred kilometers. Until then, compensate for the reduced braking effect by applying greater pressure to the brake pedal.

Driving Tips

WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell

Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle.

  • Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that they do not get into the driver's footwell.
  • When using floor mats or carpets, make sure that they are properly secured so that they do not slip or obstruct the pedals.
  • Do not lay multiple floor mats or carpets on top of one another.

 

WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect footwear

Incorrect footwear includes, for example:

  • Shoes with platform soles
  • Shoes with high heels
  • Slippers

There is a risk of an accident.

  • Always wear suitable footwear so that you can operate the pedals safely.

 

WARNING Risk of accident if the vehicle is switched off while driving

If you switch off the vehicle while driving, safety functions are restricted or no longer available. This may affect the power steering system and the brake force boosting, for example. You will need to use considerably more force to steer and brake, for example.

  • Do not switch off the vehicle while driving

 

DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning.

  • Never leave the engine or, if present, the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient ventilation.

 

DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poisonous exhaust gases

If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventilation is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehicle. This is the case, for example, if the vehicle gets stuck in the snow.

  • Keep the tailpipe and the area around the vehicle free from snow when the engine or the stationary heater is running.
  • Open a window on the side of the vehicle facing away from the wind to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air.

 

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to being under the influence of alcohol and drugs while driving

Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgment. The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident are greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive.

  • Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs.

 

WARNING Risk of accident and injury from operating mobile communications equipment

If you operate mobile communication equipment when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. The probability of a serious or even fatal accident increases greatly if you operate mobile communication equipment when driving.

  • Only operate mobile communication equipment when the vehicle is stationary.

For your own safety, observe the following points when operating mobile communications equipment:

  • Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are driving.
  • While driving, only operate mobile communications equipment when the traffic conditions permit it. You may otherwise be distracted from the traffic conditions, cause an accident and injure yourself and others.
WARNING Risk of accident due to overheated brake system

If you rest your foot on the brake pedal during while driving, the brake system may overheat. This increases the braking distance and the brake system may even fail.

  • Never use the brake pedal as a footrest.
  • Do not press the brake pedal and accelerator pedal simultaneously while driving.

On long and steep downhill gradients, you should change down to a lower gear in good time. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By doing so, you will make use of the engine's braking effect. This will take some of the strain off the brake system and prevent the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly.

Exhaust emission monitoring

Specific engine systems are designed to keep poisonous components of exhaust gases within legal limits. These systems only work optimally if they are maintained exactly according to manufacturer's specifications. It is for this reason that all work on the engine should only be performed by qualified and authorized Mercedes-Benz Center technicians.

Under no circumstances should engine settings be changed. In addition, all specific maintenance work must be performed at regular intervals and in compliance with the service regulations of the dealer named in the imprint. Refer to the Maintenance Booklet for details.

Notes on short-distance trips

If the vehicle is predominantly used for short-distance driving, fuel may accumulate in the engine oil and cause engine damage. If you mainly drive short distances, you should drive on a freeway or go for a country drive for 20 minutes every 480 km (300 miles). This facilitates the regeneration of the diesel particulate filter.

Notes on the speed limitation

WARNING Risk of injury through exceeding the specified tire load-bearing capacity or the permissible speed rating

Exceeding the specified tire load rating or the permissible speed rating may lead to tire damage and to the tires bursting.

  • Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model.
  • Observe the tire load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle.

Find out about the maximum permissible speed resulting from the tires, i.e. tires and tire pressure. Please observe the legal requirements for tires for the country you are in.

Vehicles with tachograph: due to the different certification requirements for the tachograph and instrument cluster, the displayed speeds may differ. Please keep to the speed display in the instrument cluster. You can permanently limit the speed of your vehicle. Mercedes-Benz recommends a qualified specialist workshop for programming the limit speed. Note that you cannot exceed a programmed limit speed when overtaking. On downhill gradients, the limit speed may be exceeded. Apply the brakes if necessary. Display messages will warn you that you are approaching the limit speed. For bus-equipped vehicles, the ex-works speed limit for your vehicle is 60 mph (100 km/h) When overtaking, bear in mind that the limit speed cannot be exceeded.

Information about driving abroad

Service: An extensive Mercedes-Benz service is also available abroad. Nevertheless, please remember that services facilities or spare parts may not be available immediately. The relevant workshop directories are available from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Fuel: In some countries, only fuels with an increased sulfur content are available.

Mercedes-Benz recommends installing a fuel filter with a water separator for countries with an increased water content in diesel. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage. Information about fuel can be found in the "Fuel" section

Information on brakes

WARNING Risk of skidding and of an accident due to shifting down on slippery road surfaces

If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine braking effect, the drive wheels may lose traction.

  • Do not shift down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine braking effect.

 

WARNING Risk of accident due to the brake system overheating

If you leave your foot on the brake pedal when driving, the brake system may overheat. This increases the braking distance and the brake system can even fail.

  • Never use the brake pedal as a footrest.
  • Do not depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at the same time while driving.

Downhill gradients

On long and steep downhill gradients you should observe the following instructions:

  • in vehicles with an automatic transmission, shift down to shift ranges 2 or 1 in good time so that the engine is running at a medium to high engine speed.
  • Change the shift range in good time when cruise control is activated. Observe the driving tips. You thereby make use of the braking effect of the engine and do not have to brake as often to maintain the speed. This relieves the load on the service brake and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly.

Heavy and light loads

If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy load, do not stop the vehicle immediately. Drive on for a short while. The brakes cool down more quickly in the airflow. If the brakes have been used only moderately, you should occasionally test their effectiveness. To do this, brake more firmly from a higher speed while paying attention to the traffic conditions. The brakes will grip better as a result.

Wet road surfaces

If you have been driving for a long time in heavy rain without braking, there may be a delayed response when you first apply the brakes. This may also occur after driving through a car wash or deep water. You must depress the brake pedal more firmly. Maintain a greater distance to the vehicle in front. While paying attention to the traffic conditions, you should brake the vehicle firmly after driving on a wet road surface or through a car wash. This heats the brake disks so that they dry more quickly, which protects them against corrosion.

Limited braking effect on salt-treated roads:

  • a layer of salt on the brake disks or brake linings can increase braking distances considerably, or braking may happen on only one side
  • maintain an especially large safe distance to the vehicle in front

To remove the layer of salt:

  • apply the brakes from time to time, paying attention to traffic conditions
  • carefully depress the brake pedal at the end of a journey and after the start of a new journey

Checking the brake lining thickness

In addition to monitoring using the brake lining wear sensor, regularly monitor and check all of the brake linings by performing a visual inspection to look for material wear on the pads. If you are unable to check the brake lining wear on the inside of the wheels, remove the wheels if you possess the required skills, or visit a qualified specialist workshop. If the brake lining material thickness is less than 0.12 in (3 mm), have the brake linings checked and replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, if necessary.

Do not solely rely on the brake lining wear sensor. It is also strongly recommended that you have the brake linings checked at a qualified specialist workshop, not only at every service displayed by the maintenance interval display, but also prior to long journeys and whenever the wheels are removed.

In the following situations, check the brake linings:

  • at every service according to maintenance interval
  • before long journeys
  • every time a tire is replaced
  • during regular visual inspections for your own safety

New brake disks and brake linings

New brake linings and brake disks only reach their optimal braking effect after a few hundred miles (a few hundred kilometers). Until then, compensate for the reduced braking effect by applying greater pressure to the brake pedal. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only have brake linings and brake disks which are approved by Mercedes-Benz installed on your vehicle. Other brake disks or brake linings may compromise the safety of your vehicle. Always replace all brake disks and brake linings on an axle at the same time. Always install new brake linings when replacing brake disks.

Vehicles with a manual parking brake

WARNING Risk of skidding or an accident by braking with the parking brake

If you have to brake your vehicle with the parking brake, the braking distance is considerably longer and the wheels may lock. There is an increased risk of skidding and/or accident.

  • Only brake the vehicle with the parking brake if the service brake has failed.
  • In this case, do not apply the parking brake with too much force.
  • If the wheels lock, immediately release the parking brake as much as required for the wheels to turn again.

When driving on wet roads or dirt-covered surfaces, road salt or dirt may get into the parking brake. This causes corrosion and a reduction of braking force. In order to prevent this, drive with the parking brake lightly applied from time to time. When doing so, drive for a distance of approximately 300 ft at a maximum speed of 13 mph (20 km/h). The brake lights do not light up when you brake the vehicle with the parking brake.

Information about driving on wet roads

Hydroplaning

WARNING Risk of aquaplaning because tire tread is too low

Depending on the depth of the water on the roadway, aquaplaning can occur despite sufficient tire tread depth and low speed.

  • Avoid tire ruts and brake carefully.

Therefore, in heavy rain or other conditions in which hydroplaning can occur, drive as follows:

  • Reduce your speed
  • Avoid tire ruts
  • Brake carefully

Driving on flooded roads

Bear in mind that vehicles traveling in front or in the opposite direction create waves. This may cause the maximum permissible depth of water to be exceeded. These notes must be observed under all circumstances. Otherwise, you can damage the engine, electrics and transmission.

If you have to drive on stretches of road on which water has collected, please bear in mind the following:

  • The water level of standing water may not be above the lower edge of the front bumper.
  • You may drive no faster than walking pace.

Observe the notes on fording while off-road for allwheel drive vehicles.

Information about driving in winter

DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poisonous exhaust gases

If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventilation is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehicle. This is the case when the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, for example.

  • Keep the tailpipe and the area around the vehicle free from snow when the engine or the stationary heater are running.
  • Open a window on the side of the vehicle facing away from the wind to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air.

 

WARNING Risk of skidding and of an accident due to shifting down on slippery road surfaces

If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine braking effect, the drive wheels may lose traction.

  • Do not shift down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine braking effect.

Vehicles with automatic transmissions are permitted to roll when in neutral for only a short time. Allowing the wheels to roll for longer, e.g. when towing, causes transmission damage. If the vehicle threatens to skid, or cannot be brought to a standstill when traveling at a low speed, you can stabilize the vehicle using the following measures:

  • Shift the automatic transmission to neutral.
  • Try to maintain control of the vehicle using corrective steering.

Drive particularly carefully on slippery roads. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and braking maneuvers. Have your vehicle winterized at a qualified specialist workshop in good time at the onset of winter. Observe the notes on snow chains. Regularly check the vehicle and remove snow or ice when traveling in wintry conditions.

An accumulation of snow and ice, particularly when frozen, in the area around the air intake, moving parts, the axles, and the wheel wells may cause the following problems:

  • Obstruction of the air intake
  • Damage to vehicle parts
  • Malfunctions due to restriction of the mobility intended by the design (e.g. reduced steering movement)

If there is any damage, inform a qualified specialist workshop.

Information about driving off-road

WARNING Risk of accident if you do not keep to line of fall on inclines

If you drive at an angle or turn on an incline, the vehicle could slip sideways, tip and rollover.

  • Always drive on inclines in the line of fall (straight up or down) and do not turn.

 

WARNING Risk of injury from acceleration forces during off-road driving

You could be thrown from your seat, for example.

  • Always wear your seat belt even when driving off-road.

 

WARNING Risk of injury to the hands when driving over obstacles

If you drive over obstacles or in tire ruts, the steering wheel may whip around.

  • The steering wheel must always be held securely with both hands.
  • Always hold the steering wheel so that your thumbs are on the outer rim of the steering wheel.
  • When driving over obstacles, expect increased steering forces at short notice.

 

WARNING Risk of fire caused by flammable material on hot exhaust system components

Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system.

  • When driving on an unpaved road or offroad, check the vehicle underside regularly.
  • In particular, remove trapped plant parts or other flammable material.
  • If there is damage, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

When driving off-road or on unpaved surfaces, check the vehicle underside, wheels and tires at regular intervals. In particular, remove any trapped foreign bodies, e.g. stones and branches. Observe the following notes regarding foreign bodies of this kind:

  • They may damage the suspension, the fuel tank or the brake system.
  • They may cause imbalances and thus vibrations.
  • They may be flung out from the vehicle when you continue driving.

If there is any damage, inform a qualified specialist workshop. When driving off-road on steep inclines, you must make sure that the DEF® tank is sufficiently filled. Therefore, ensure a level of at least 2.6 gal (10 l) before off-road driving. When driving off-road and on construction sites, sand, mud and water, for example, also mixed with oil, can get into the brakes. This may lead to a reduction in braking effect or total brake failure, including as a result of increased wear. The braking characteristics will vary depending on the material that has got into the system. Clean the brakes after driving off-road. If you then notice a reduced braking effect or hear scraping noises, have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Adjust your driving style to the changed braking characteristics.

Driving off-road or on construction sites increases the possibility of vehicle damage which may in turn lead to the failure of certain major assemblies and systems. Adapt your driving style to the off-road driving conditions. Drive carefully. Have any vehicle damage rectified at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. When driving on rough cross-country terrain, do not shift the transmission to neutral and do not disengage the clutch. You could lose control when attempting to brake the vehicle with the service brake. If your vehicle cannot manage an uphill incline, drive back down in reverse gear. When loading your vehicle for off-road driving or on a construction site, keep the vehicle's center of gravity as low as possible.

Check-list before off-road driving

  • Check the fuel and DEF® levels and refill if necessary.
  • Engine: check the oil level and add oil if necessary. Before driving up or down extreme inclines or slopes, fill the oil to the maximum level.
  • If you drive up or down extreme inclines or slopes, the 4 symbol may appear in the instrument cluster. The engine operating safety is not put at risk if you have filled the engine oil to the maximum level before the journey.
  • Vehicle tool kit: check that the jack is working.
  • Make sure that a lug wrench, a wooden underlay for the jack, a robust tow rope, a folding spade and a wheel chock (may be present, depending on equipment) are carried in the vehicle.
  • Tires and wheels: check the tire tread depth and the tire pressure.

Rules for off-road driving

Always be aware of the vehicle's ground clearance, and avoid obstacles such as deep tire ruts. Obstacles can damage the following parts of the vehicle, for example:

  • suspension
  • drivetrain
  • fuel and operating fluid reservoirs

Therefore, always drive slowly when off-road. If you must drive over obstacles, have the co-driver instruct you.

  • Make sure that loads and items of luggage are securely stored or lashed down.
  • Before driving off-road, stop the vehicle and engage a low gear.
  • Vehicles with DSR: activate DSR when you are driving downhill.
  • All-wheel drive vehicles with engine OM642 or engine OM651: activate all-wheel drive and, if necessary, activate the LOW RANGE transmission ratio.
  • If the surface requires, temporarily deactivate ESP® when pulling away.
  • Only drive off-road with the engine running and a gear engaged.
  • Drive slowly and smoothly. It may often be necessary to drive at walking pace.
  • Avoid spinning the drive wheels.
  • Ensure that the wheels remain in contact with the ground.
  • As a precaution, get out of the vehicle to take a look at the route to be taken. Exercise the utmost caution when driving across unfamiliar, unpredictable terrain.
  • Look out for obstacles (e.g. rocks, holes, tree stumps and tire ruts).
  • Avoid edges where the surface could crumble or break away.

Notes on driving when there is water on the road

Water which has entered the vehicle can damage the engine, electrics and transmission. Water can also enter the air intake fitting of the engine and cause engine damage. Observe the following if you must drive through water:

  • The water, when calm, may only reach the lower edge of the front bumper.
  • Drive at walking pace at most; water can otherwise enter the vehicle interior or engine compartment.
  • Vehicles traveling in front, or oncoming vehicles, can create waves which may exceed the maximum permissible height of the water.

The braking effect of the brakes is reduced after fording. Brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until braking power has been fully restored. After the vehicle has forded at maximum depth several times, all oils in the major assemblies (front axle differential, locking differential, manual transmission/automatic transmission and transfer case) must be replaced.

Rules for off-road fording

  • Observe the safety notes and general notes on driving off-road.
  • Check the depth and characteristics of the body of water before fording. The water, when calm, may only reach the lower edge of the front bumper.
  • The climate control system is switched off.
  • The stationary heater is switched off.
  • Activate all-wheel drive and activate the LOW RANGE transmission ratio.
  • Restrict the shift range to 1 or 2.
  • Avoid high engine speeds.
  • Drive slowly and smoothly at no more than a walking pace.
  • Ensure that no wave forms at the front of the vehicle while driving.
  • After fording, dry the brakes.
  • After the vehicle has forded at maximum depth several times, all oils in the major assemblies (front axle differential, locking differential, manual transmission/automatic transmission and transfer case) must be replaced.

Check-list after driving off-road

Driving over rough terrain places greater demands on your vehicle than normal road operation. Check your vehicle after driving on rough terrain. This allows you to detect damage promptly and reduce the risk of an accident for yourself and other road users. Clean your vehicle thoroughly before driving on public roads. If you find damage to the vehicle after off-road driving, have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Observe the following points after driving off-road, on construction sites and before driving on public roads:

  • Vehicles with DSR: deactivate DSR.
  • All-wheel drive vehicles with engine OM642 or engine OM651: deactivate all-wheel drive.
  • Activate ESP®.
  • Clean the exterior lighting, particularly the headlamps and tail lamps, and check them for damage.
  • Clean the front and rear license plates.
  • Clean the windshield, windows and outside mirrors.
  • Clean the steps, entrances and grab handles. This will make your footing safer.
  • Clean the wheels and tires, wheel wells and the underbody of the vehicle with a water jet. This increases road adhesion, especially on wet road surfaces.
  • Check the wheels and tires and wheel wells for trapped foreign objects and remove them. Trapped foreign objects can damage the wheels and tires or may be flung out from the vehicle when the journey is continued.
  • Check the underbody for trapped branches or other parts of plants and remove them.
  • Clean the brake disks, brakepads and axle joints, particularly after operation in sand, mud, grit and gravel, water or similarly dirty conditions.
  • Check the entire floor assembly, the tires, wheels, bodywork structure, brakes, steering, suspension and exhaust system for any damage.
  • Check the service brake for operating safety, e.g. carry out a brake test.
  • If you notice strong vibrations after driving offroad, check the wheels and drivetrain for foreign objects again. Remove any foreign objects which can lead to imbalances and thus cause vibrations. In the event of damage to the wheels and the drivetrain, visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Deactivating/activating the reverse warning device

WARNING Risk of accidents due to persons or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering

Other road users may not hear or may ignore the warning tone of the backing up warning device. There is a risk of an accident.

  • Make sure that there are no persons or objects in the maneuvering area during maneuvering.
  • If necessary, a second person must assist with maneuvering.

The reverse warning device is a system designed to assist you in ensuring the safety of other road users. The reverse warning device cannot guarantee that no persons or objects are situated behind the vehicle. The reverse warning device is an acoustic warning system integrated into the tail lamp of the vehicle. When you shift to reverse gear, the reverse warning device will be activated. Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when using the reverse warning device.

For vehicles in the United Kingdom and Switzerland: the reverse warning device can be deactivated.

  • To deactivate/activate: press the upper section of switch 1. When the reverse warning device is deactivated, the indicator lamp on the switch will light up.

Function of the ECO display

The ECO display summarizes your driving style from the start of the journey to its completion and assists you in achieving the most economical driving style. An economical driving style means that the ECO display will feature a star or a shine effect. You can influence fuel economy as follows:

  • Anticipate road and traffic conditions.
  • Observe the gearshift recommendations. Observe the gearshift recommendations .

Instrument cluster display (color)

The segment's lettering lights up brightly, the outer edge lights up and the segment is filled when the vehicle is driven as follows:

  • 1 ACCELERATION: Moderate acceleration
  • 2 CONSTANT: Consistent speed
  • 3 COASTING: Gentle deceleration and rolling

The segment's lettering is gray, the outer edge is dark and the segment is emptied when the vehicle is driven as follows:

  • 1 ACCELERATION: Sporty acceleration
  • 2 CONSTANT: Speed fluctuations
  • 3 COASTING: Heavy braking

You have driven in an economical manner if:

  • The three segments have been completely filled simultaneously.
  • The edge of all three segments lights up.

Instrument cluster display (black and white)

The bars will fill up when the vehicle is driven as follows:

  • 1 Moderate acceleration
  • 2 Consistent speed
  • 3 Gentle deceleration and rolling

The bars will empty when the vehicle is driven with the following characteristics:

  • 1 Sporty acceleration
  • 2 Speed fluctuations
  • 3 Heavy braking

The instrument cluster display will also show additional range 4 Bonus miFrom Start or miFrom Start you have achieved with your driving style compared with a driver with a very sporty driving style. The range displayed does not indicate a fixed reduction in consumption.

Diesel particulate filter

Notes on regeneration

DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning.

  • Never leave the engine or, if present, the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient ventilation.

 

WARNING Risk of fire caused by hot exhaust system parts

Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite.

  • Park the vehicle so that no flammable material can come into contact with hot vehicle components.
  • In particular, do not park on dry grassland or harvested grain fields.

 

WARNING Risk of accident with regeneration activated

The transmission is in neutral if the vehicle has a manual transmission and the regeneration of the diesel particulate filter is activated. The vehicle may thereby inadvertently roll away.

  • Apply the parking brake.
  • Turn the front wheels towards or away from the curb on steep uphill or downhill gradients.
  • Use a chock.

Regeneration is only permitted while driving or at a qualified specialist workshop with extraction system. Regeneration without interruption takes approx. 20–25 minutes. If the vehicle is predominantly used for short-distance driving or has extended non-operational times, this could lead to a malfunction in the automatic cleaning function of the diesel particulate filter. As a result, the diesel particulate filter may become blocked. Fuel may also accumulate in the engine oil and cause engine damage. If you mainly drive short distances, you should drive on a freeway or go for a country drive for 20 minutes every 500 km (300 miles). This facilitates the diesel particulate filter's burn-off process.

Starting and canceling regeneration

Requirements:

  • All system conditions are fulfilled.
  • The load condition of the diesel particulate filter is at least 100%.
  • The vehicle is stationary.
  • The vehicle has been started.
  • If the vehicle has a transmission-mounted power take-off, the latter is deactivated.
  • If the vehicle has a parameterizable special module, the rpm request is deactivated.

On-board computer:

  • To request regeneration: Select OK.
  • To observe the vehicle surroundings: Make sure that no injuries or damage due to the hot exhaust gases can occur in the vehicle surroundings. Confirm for three seconds with OK. Regeneration starts. The engine speed increases and the message Regeneration Active appears.
  • To cancel regeneration: Switch off the vehicle or depress the clutch (for manual transmission) or brake (for automatic transmission). Regeneration is canceled.

Regeneration cannot be requested again until the load condition of the diesel particulate filter is at least 100%.

Displaying the load

On-board computer:

The load of the diesel particulate filter is displayed.

Load display at 75% load

  • To exit the display: press the back button on the left-hand side of the steering wheel.

Battery Main switch

Notes on the battery main switch

You can use the battery main switch to disconnect the current to all your vehicle's consumers. This will prevent uncontrolled battery discharge caused by quiescent current consumers. If your vehicle is equipped with an auxiliary battery in the engine compartment or in the base of the front passenger seat, you must disconnect both batteries. Only then will the electrical system be fully disconnected from the power supply. % Disconnect the vehicle from the power supply only using the battery main switch in the following situations:

  • the vehicle is stationary for a long time
  • it is absolutely necessary to disconnect the vehicle from the power supply

Switching the power supply on/off

Switching off the power supply

Battery main switch

  • Switch off the vehicle and wait at least 20 minutes.
  • Remove cover 1. To do this, take hold of the cover at the upper edge, move it outwards in the direction of the driver's door and lift it off.
  • Press and hold button 3.
  • Pull plug 2 out of the earth pin.
  • Push plug 2 as far as possible in the direction of the arrow so that it cannot make contact with the earth pin. All starter battery consumers are disconnected from the power supply.

Switch on the power supply

  • Press plug 2 onto the earth pin until you feel it engage and plug 2 is in full contact with the earth pin. All starter battery consumers are reconnected to the power supply.
  • Fasten cover 1. To do this, place the cover on from above.
  • Press the cover into the neighboring switching console on the right hand side.

Automatic Transmission

DIRECT SELECT lever

Function of the DIRECT SELECT lever:

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could, in particular:

  • open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users.
  • get out and be struck by oncoming traffic.
  • operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by:

  • releasing the parking brake.
  • changing the transmission position.
  • starting the vehicle.
  • Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
  • When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
  • Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.

 

WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect gearshifting

If the engine speed is higher than the idle speed and you engage the transmission position D or R, the vehicle may accelerate sharply.

  • If you engage the transmission position D or R when the vehicle is at a standstill, always depress the brake pedal firmly and do not accelerate at the same time.

You use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the transmission position. The current transmission position will appear on the display of the instrument cluster.

The shifting characteristics of the automatic transmission are designed for comfortable and economical handling. For this reason, the display of the instrument cluster shows, in addition to the transmission position display, the  for Comfort.

  • P - park position
  • R - Reverse gear
  • N - Neutral
  • D - Drive position

Engaging reverse gear R

  • Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever upwards past the first point of resistance. The transmission position display will show R on the instrument cluster.

Selecting neutral N

WARNING Risk of accident and injury when neutral position is engaged

If you park the vehicle with the transmission in neutral position N and the parking brake is not engaged, the vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of accident and injury.

  • Before parking the vehicle, apply the parking brake.

  • Press the brake pedal and the DIRECT SELECT lever upwards or downwards to the first point of resistance. Transmission position display N is shown in the instrument cluster.

Subsequently releasing the brake pedal will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it away.

If the automatic transmission should also stay in neutral i when the vehicle is switched off, carry out the following:

  • Start the vehicle.
  • Depress the brake pedal and engage neutral N.
  • Release the brake pedal.
  • Switch off the vehicle.
  • If you then leave the vehicle and the key is still in the vehicle, the automatic transmission will stay in neutral N from then on.

Engaging park position P

  • Press button 1. Transmission position display P will be shown on the instrument cluster.

Park position P is engaged automatically when one of the following conditions is met:

  • You switch the vehicle off with the transmission in position D or R.
  • You open the driver's door when the vehicle is stationary or moving at a very low speed and with the transmission in position D or R.

Engaging drive position D

  • Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever downwards past the first point of resistance. Transmission position display D is shown in the instrument cluster.

The automatic transmission shifts through the individual gears automatically when it is in transmission position D. This is determined by the following factors:

  • Position of the accelerator pedal
  • Driving speed

Restricting the shift range

Requirements: Transmission position D is engaged

  • To restrict the shift range: briefly pull steering wheel paddle shifter 1. The automatic transmission shifts to the next lower gear, depending on the gear currently engaged. The shift range is also restricted. The selected shift range is shown in the instrument cluster display. The automatic transmission shifts only as far as the selected gear.
  • Pull and hold steering wheel paddle shifter 1. The automatic transmission will change to a shift range which allows easy acceleration and deceleration. To do this, the automatic transmission shifts down one or more gears and restricts the shift range. The selected shift range is shown in the instrument cluster display. The automatic transmission shifts only as far as the selected gear.
  • The automatic transmission does not shift down if you pull steering wheel paddle shifter 1 while traveling at too high a speed. For vehicles with engine OM642, OM651, OM654: the automatic transmission does not shift up if the shift range is restricted and the maximum engine speed of the restricted shift range has been reached. For vehicles with engine M274: if the maximum engine speed for the restricted shift range is reached and you continue to depress the accelerator pedal, the automatic transmission will shift up automatically
  • To derestrict the shift range: briefly pull steering wheel paddle shifter 2. The automatic transmission shifts to the next gear up, depending on the gear currently engaged. This derestricts the shift range at the same time. The selected shift range is shown in the instrument cluster display. The automatic transmission shifts only as far as the selected gear
  • To derestrict the shift range: pull and hold steering wheel paddle shifter 2.
  • Or Engage transmission position D again. The automatic transmission shifts up one or more gears depending on the gear currently engaged. Simultaneously, the shift range restriction is deactivated and transmission position D appears in the instrument cluster display.

Recommended shift ranges for the following driving conditions:

  • 3 Use the engine's braking effect.
  • 2 Use the engine's braking effect on downhill gradients and when driving on steep roads, in mountainous areas and under arduous operating conditions.
  • 1 Use the engine's braking effect on extremely steep downhill gradients and on long downhill stretches.

Using kickdown

  • For maximum acceleration: depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point.
  • Ease off the accelerator pedal once the desired speed is reached.

All-Wheel drive

Notes on all-wheel drive

All-wheel drive ensures permanent drive for all four wheels and, together with ESP®, improves the traction of the vehicle. With the OM651 and OM642 engines, all-wheel drive must be switched on . With the OM654 engine, there is smart closed-loop control of the drive torque between the front and rear axles. Traction control for all-wheel drive also takes place via the brake system. This may cause the brake system to overheat. Decelerate or stop to let the brake system cool down.

If a wheel spins due to insufficient traction, observe the following notes:

  • When pulling away, make use of the traction control integrated in ESP®. Depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary.
  • Take your foot off the accelerator pedal, slowly, while the vehicle is in motion.

In wintry driving conditions, always use winter tires (M+S tires) and, if necessary, snow chains. Only in this way can the maximum effect of all-wheel drive be achieved. Use DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) when driving downhill off-road. If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are inattentive, the all-wheel drive system can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. The all-wheel drive system cannot take road, weather and traffic conditions into account. The all-wheel drive system is only an aid. You are responsible for maintaining a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane.

Engaging/disengaging all-wheel drive

  • To engage/disengage: press the upper section of switch 1. The indicator lamp in switch 1 flashes while the all-wheel drive is engaged or disengaged. The  and  warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. ESP® and ASR are deactivated for the duration of the shift operation. Once the engaging/disengaging process has been completed, the  and  warning lamps in the instrument cluster go out and ESP® and ASR are reactivated.

As long as the indicator lamp in switch 1 is flashing, you can cancel the shift operation by pressing switch 1 again. If the shift operation fails, the indicator lamp in switch 1 briefly flashes three times. One of the shift conditions was not met. If the indicator lamp in switch 1 lights up, allwheel drive is engaged.

  • If the LOW RANGE transmission ratio is engaged, the all-wheel drive cannot be disengaged.

Conditions for engaging/disengaging

You can engage and deactivate the all-wheel drive when stationary or while driving slowly.

When stationary, observe the following:

  • The vehicle has been started.
  • The steering wheel in the straight-ahead position.

If the all-wheel drive cannot be engaged when stationary:

  • Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the selector lever from N to D from D to N from N to R and back to N. Engaging and disengaging the all-wheel drive can be made easier in this way.

Observe the following when driving slowly:

  • The vehicle has been started.
  • The vehicle is not traveling faster than 6.2 mph (10 km/h).
  • The vehicle is not being driven around a curve.

If it is not possible to engage all-wheel drive when the vehicle is rolling:

  • Vehicles with automatic transmission: briefly move the selector lever to N.

Function of the LOW RANGE transmission ratio

The LOW RANGE transmission ratio enables very slow driving in the respective gears. If you engage LOW RANGE, the engine's performance characteristics and the automatic transmission's shifting characteristics are adapted accordingly. The transmission ratio from the engine to the wheels is around 40% lower than in the road position. The drive torque is increased correspondingly.

Conditions for engaging/disengaging

The following shifting conditions must be met in order to engage or disengage LOW RANGE:

  • All-wheel drive is engaged.
  • The vehicle has been started.
  • The vehicle is stationary.
  • You depress the brake pedal.
  • Vehicles with automatic transmission: the selector lever is in position P or N.

Engaging and disengaging LOW range

  • On vehicles with DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation), switch 1 is replaced with the switch for DSR.
  • To engage and disengage: Press the upper section of switch 1. The  indicator lamp will flash on the instrument cluster for the duration of the shift operation .
  • When the shift operation takes place and LOW RANGE is engaged, the  indicator lamp will light up.
  • When the shift operation takes place and LOW RANGE is disengaged, the  indicator lamp will go out.

As long as the  indicator lamp is flashing, you can cancel the shift operation by pressing button 1 again. If the shift operation fails, the  indicator lamp will flash briefly three times. This means that one of the shift conditions has not been met.

Electronic level control

Function of ENR (electronic level control)

WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehicle lowering

When lowering the vehicle, people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tires or underneath the vehicle.

  • Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered.
 

 

WARNING Risk of injury due to the jack tipping over

If you park a vehicle with air suspension, the air suspension can remain active for up to an hour, even if the vehicle is switched off. If you then raise the vehicle using the jack, the air suspension will attempt to even out the vehicle level. The jack can tip over.

  • Before raising the vehicle, press the Service button on the remote control for the air suspension. This prevents the vehicle level from being automatically readjusted or manually raised or lowered.
 

 

WARNING Risk of accident due to lowered or raised chassis frame

If the chassis frame is adjusted, the braking and driving characteristics can be severely impaired. You could also exceed the permissible vehicle height.

  • Adjust the driving level before driving off.
 

 

WARNING Risk of accident due to a malfunction of electronic level control

The vehicle level may be too high, too low or asymmetrical. The driving and steering characteristics of the vehicle may be noticeably different.

  • Adapt your driving style to the changed driving characteristics.
  • Stop, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
  • Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
 

The level of the vehicle depends on vehicle load and the load distribution. Electronic level control adjusts the level of the rear axle automatically on vehicles with an air-sprung rear axle. The vehicle level is thereby always maintained at the driving level, regardless of vehicle load. Driving dynamics remain unaffected. The height difference between the sides of the vehicle may be up to 0.4 in (1 cm).

Electronic level control is not engine-dependent and is only operational when the vehicle is switched on. The electronic level control compressor works audibly.

  • If the compressor works constantly or starts up several times per minute, electronic level control is malfunctioning.

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, electronic level control switches between manual mode and automatic mode. This is dependent on the driving speed or the parking brake position. If electronic level control switches depending on vehicle speed, manual operation is automatically activated when the vehicle is stationary. You may raise or lower the vehicle level. If you subsequently drive faster than 6 mph (10 km/h), manual mode is automatically deactivated and automatic mode sets the vehicle level.

If electronic level control switches depending on the parking brake position, manual mode is automatically activated when the parking brake is applied. You may raise or lower the vehicle level to load and unload. If you release the parking brake, manual mode is automatically deactivated and automatic mode sets the driving level. When working on the vehicle or changing a wheel, you can deactivate electronic level control.

If electronic level control is malfunctioning or the vehicle level is too high or too low, a warning tone sounds. The driving and steering characteristics of the vehicle will be noticeably different. Electronic level control adjusts the vehicle level to the normal level as soon as possible. Drive on carefully until the warning tone stops. Only then is the vehicle at normal level.

To restore the vehicle level, automatic mode and electronic level control automatically switch on again depending on the option selected:

  • when the parking brake is released
  • from speeds of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)

If the electronic level control compressor is in danger of overheating, for example, due to repeated raising or lowering within a short period, electronic level control is deactivated. You can raise or lower the vehicle level again after a few minutes.

Raising and lowering the vehicle level

Using the remote control

Certain special equipment enables other operation options:

  • Ambulance: raising the vehicle level above the driving level (center position) is not possible. Only the lowest position and the driving level can be set.
  • Speed signal: in order to operate electronic level control, the parking brake must not be applied. Electronic level control can be operated manually up to 6.2 mph (10 km/h). If this speed is exceeded, driving level will be set automatically.
  • 30-minute run-on module: electronic level control can be operated up to 30 minutes after switching off the vehicle.

The remote control is located in a holder on the B‑pillar on the driver's side. Remove the remote control from the holder before use.

Electronic level control starts automatically if the vehicle is switched on. Operation is only possible after the parking brake has been applied. Electronic level control performs a self-check regularly when it is activated and while in use. Indicator lamp 7 on the remote control lights up for about one second when you switch on the vehicle.

There is a malfunction if indicator lamp 7 behaves in the following ways:

  • the indicator lamp does not light up when you switch on the vehicle or
  • the indicator lamp then lights up again or flashes

In addition, a warning tone is emitted from the remote control for approximately 30 seconds. The malfunction that has been detected can be shown using the indicator lamps (signaling of malfunction codes).

  • Park the vehicle safely and leave it switched on.
  • Apply the parking brake.
  • To raise or lower the vehicle level: press and hold button 4 or 5 until the vehicle level reaches the required height. The indicator lamp on button 4 or 5 flashes as long as the vehicle level is being changed. When the vehicle level has been set, the indicator lamp on button 4 or 5 lights up.
  • To lower automatically: briefly press button 5. Electronic level control automatically lowers the vehicle to the next lower position:
    • From the highest position to driving level
    • From driving level to the lowest position
  • The indicator lamp on button 5 flashes as long as the vehicle level is being changed. When the vehicle level has been set, the indicator lamp on button 5 lights up
  • % By pressing button 4 during the movement, the original position will be reset.
  • To raise automatically: briefly press button 4. Electronic level control automatically raises the vehicle to the next higher position:
    • From the lowest position to driving level
    • From driving level to the highest position
  • The indicator lamp on button 4 flashes as long as the vehicle level is being changed. When the vehicle level has been set, the indicator lamp on button 4 lights up.
  • By pressing button 5 during the movement, the original position will be reset.
  • To raise or lower automatically to driving level (center position): press and hold button 6. Electronic level control automatically raises or lowers the vehicle to driving level.
  • To save the set vehicle level: set the required vehicle level.
  • Press and hold button 1 or 2 until you hear a warning tone. The vehicle level set has been saved on corresponding button 1 or 2.
  • To call up the saved vehicle level: briefly press button 1 or 2. Electronic level control automatically raises or lowers the vehicle to the saved driving level. The indicator lamp on button 1 or 2 flashes as long as the vehicle level is being changed. When the vehicle level has been set, the indicator lamp on button 1 or 2 lights up.
  • Service mode may only be activated or deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop by trained personnel. In service mode, the air suspension system is deactivated for maintenance or error detection.
  • To activate service mode: press button 3. Service mode is active and the indicator lamp in button 3 lights up continuously.
  • To deactivate service mode: press button 3. Service mode is deactivated and the indicator lamp in button 3 goes out.
  • To switch on automatic mode: drive at over 6.2 mph (10 km/h) or release the parking brake. Electronic level control controls the vehicle level automatically.

Using the button in the switch panel

  • Park the vehicle safely and leave it switched on.
  • Apply the parking brake.
  • To raise or lower the vehicle level: press and hold button 1 or 2 until the vehicle level reaches the required height.
  • To lower automatically: briefly press the lower section of switch 2. Electronic level control automatically lowers the vehicle to the next lower position:
    • From the highest position to driving level
    • From driving level to the lowest position
  • By pressing button 1 during the movement, the original position will be reset.
  • To raise automatically: briefly press the lower section of switch 1. Electronic level control automatically raises the vehicle to the next higher position:
    • From the lowest position to driving level
    • From driving level to the highest position
  • By pressing button 2 during the movement, the original position will be reset.
  • To switch on automatic mode: drive at over 6.2 mph (10 km/h) or release the parking brake. Electronic level control controls the vehicle level automatically.

Using the button in the rear

  • Park the vehicle safely and leave the vehicle switched on.
  • Apply the parking brake.
  • To raise or lower the vehicle level: press and hold button 1 or 2 until the vehicle level reaches the required height.
  • To lower automatically: briefly press the lower section of switch 2. Electronic level control automatically lowers the vehicle to the next lower position:
    • From the highest position to driving level
    • From driving level to the lowest position
  • By pressing button 1 during the movement, the original position will be reset.
  • To raise automatically: briefly press the lower section of switch 1. Electronic level control automatically raises the vehicle to the next higher position:
    • From the lowest position to driving level
    • From driving level to the highest position
  • By pressing button 2 during the movement, the original position will be reset.
  • To switch on automatic mode: drive at over 6.2 mph (10 km/h) or release the parking brake. Electronic level control controls the vehicle level automatically.

Using electronic level control for charging with air in an emergency

Only for vehicles with valves for electronic level control emergency charging: if electronic level control is malfunctioning and the vehicle is leaning, you can raise or lower the vehicle by connecting an external compressed-air source to one of the emergency valves (similarly to tire valve). If electronic level control is not operational, you can drive on carefully to the nearest qualified specialist workshop and have the malfunction remedied.

  • Apply the parking brake.
  • Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position P.
  • Switch off the vehicle.
  • Turn the valve cap of the corresponding valve (1 L = left, 2 R = right).
  • Stand to the side of the vehicle when connecting the external compressed-air source.
  • Raise or lower the vehicle level by charging or releasing compressed air until the driving level has been reached and the vehicle is in a horizontal position. While doing so, ensure you observe the maximum permissible operating pressure of 900 kPa (9 bar/130 psi).
  • Disconnect the external compressed-air source.
  • Tighten the valve cap on the valve (1 L = left, 2 R = right).
  • Drive on carefully to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.

Rectifying problems with the electronic level control

You cannot raise or lower the vehicle level when stationary.

Possible cause:

  • The compressor is in danger of overheating. After repeatedly raising and lowering the vehicle, electronic level control play protection is deactivated.
  • Try to set the vehicle level manually again after approximately one minute.

Possible cause:

  • Electric level control has been deactivated due to undervoltage. The battery may not be charging.

Handling and ride comfort may suffer.

  • Start the vehicle.
  • Consult a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.

Refueling

Refueling the vehicle

WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from fuel

Fuels are highly flammable.

  • Fire, open flames, smoking and creating sparks must be avoided.
  • Before refueling, switch off the vehicle and, if installed, the stationary heater, and leave them switched off during refueling
 

 

WARNING Risk of injury from fuels

Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health.

  • Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
  • Do not inhale fuel vapor.
  • Keep children away from fuel.
  • Keep doors and windows closed during the refueling process.

If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following:

  • Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with soap and water.
  • If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately.
  • If you swallow fuel, seek medical attention immediately. Do not induce vomiting. 
  • Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel.
 

 

WARNING Risk of fire and explosion due to electrostatic charge

Electrostatic charge can ignite fuel vapor.

  • Before you open the fuel filler cap or take hold of the pump nozzle, touch the metallic vehicle body.
  • To avoid creating another electrostatic charge, do not get into the vehicle again during the refueling process.
 

 

 

WARNING Risk of fire from fuel mixture

Vehicles with a diesel engine: If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flash point of the fuel mixture is lower than that of pure diesel fuel. While the vehicle is running, component parts in the exhaust system may overheat without warning.

  • Never refuel using gasoline.
  • Never mix gasoline with diesel fuel.
 

Requirements:

  • The vehicle is unlocked.
  • The auxiliary heating is switched off.
  • The vehicle is switched off.
  • The front left-hand door is open.
  • Do not get back into the vehicle during the refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again.

  • 1 Fuel filler flap
  • 2 Fuel filler cap

The fuel filler flap is beside the front left-hand door when viewed in the direction of travel. The position of the fuel filler cap is also shown on the instrument cluster . The arrow on the filling pump specifies the side of the vehicle.

  • Open fuel filler flap 1.
  • Turn fuel filler cap 2 counter-clockwise and remove it.
  • Close all vehicle doors to prevent fuel vapors from entering the vehicle interior.
  • Completely slide the filler neck of the pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and refuel.
  • Fill the fuel tank only until the pump nozzle switches off.
  • Replace fuel filler cap 2 and turn it clockwise. You will hear a click when the fuel filler cap is closed fully.
  • Open the front left-hand door.
  • Close fuel filler flap 1.

Rectifying problems with the fuel and fuel tank

Fuel is leaking from the vehicle

Possible cause:

  • The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.
  • Apply the parking brake.
  • Switch off the vehicle.
  • Open the driver's door. The tow position is set to 0.
  • Under no circumstances restart the vehicle!
  • Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
  • Take measures to contain leaked fuel.

The vehicle does not start

Possible cause:

  • The fuel tank is completely empty.
  • Refuel the vehicle with at least 1.3 gal (5 l) of fuel.
  • Switch on the vehicle for approx. ten seconds.
  • Start the vehicle continuously for a maximum of ten seconds until it runs smoothly.

If the vehicle does not start:

  • Switch on the vehicle again for approx. ten seconds.
  • Restart the vehicle continuously for a maximum of ten seconds until it runs smoothly.

If the vehicle does not start after three attempts:

  • Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

DEF

Notes on DEF

DEF is a liquid urea solution used for exhaust gas aftertreatment of diesel engines. In order for the exhaust gas aftertreatment to function properly, only use DEF in accordance with ISO 22241. DEF has the following properties:

  • Non-toxic
  • Colorless and odorless
  • Non-flammable

DEF availability:

  • You can have DEF refilled by fast service at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
  • DEF is available at numerous gas stations via DEF filling pumps.
  • Alternatively, DEF is available at qualified specialist workshops, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, and at numerous gas stations as a DEF refill canister or DEF refill bottle
  • DEF freezes at a temperature of approximately 12.2 °F (-11 °C). The vehicle is equipped with a DEF preheating system at the factory. This means that winter operation is also ensured for temperatures below 12.2 °F (-11 °C). If you refill DEF at temperatures below 12.2 °F (-11 °C), the DEF level in the instrument cluster may not be displayed correctly. If the DEF is frozen, drive for at least 20 minutes and then park the vehicle for a minimum of 30 seconds, so that the level is correctly displayed. In extreme winter conditions, the time needed to detect the amount topped up may be considerably longer. Park the vehicle in a warm garage to speed up this process.
  • Ensure the connection between the refill container and vehicle filler neck does not drip

Calling up the DEF level gauge

On-board computer

  • Select Additive (DEF) and confirm. The DEF level appears.

Instrument cluster with display (color)

  • 1 DEF level

Instrument cluster with display (black and white)

  • 1 DEF level

Refilling DEF

Requirements:

  • The vehicle is switched off.

The following messages that appear in succession in the instrument cluster display indicate that you need to refill the DEF tank:

  • Refill Additive See Operator's Manual

The DEF level has fallen below the first warning threshold.

  • Refill Additive (DEF) Starts until Emerg. Op.: XXX See Operator's Manual

The DEF level has fallen into the reserve range. After the message appears for the first time, the remaining DEF supply will last for approximately 1,200 mi (1,900 km) and you can start the engine a further 16 times. The number of remaining vehicle starts "XX" (16 to 1) is shown in the message every time the vehicle is started.

  • Refill Additive Emer. Op.: Max. XXX mph See Operator's Manual

You can only drive the vehicle at a maximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).

Opening the DEF filler cap on filler caps that are not lockable

  • Open the hood.
  • Turn DEF filler cap 1 counter-clockwise and remove it.

Opening the DEF filler cap on lockable filler caps

  • Open the hood.
  • Take tool 4 for unlocking DEF filler cap 1 from the vehicle tool kit.
  • Pull cover 3 on DEF filler cap 1 up, turn 90° and release it.
  • Insert tool 4 in holes 2 of DEF filler cap 1.
  • Turn DEF filler cap 1 counter-clockwise and remove it.

Preparing the DEF refill canister

Variant 1

Variant 2

  • Unscrew the cap on DEF refill canister 1.
  • Screw disposable hose 2 onto the opening of DEF refill canister 1 until hand-tight.

Refilling DEF

Variant 1

Variant 2

  • Screw on hand-tight (variant 1) or insert (variant 2) disposable hose 2 into the filler neck of the vehicle.
  • Lift up and tip DEF refill canister 1. The filling process stops when the DEF tank is completely full. DEF refill canister 1 can be removed when it has been only partially emptied.
  • Unscrew disposable hose 2 and close DEF and refill canister 1 in reverse order.
  • Switch on the vehicle for at least 60 seconds.
  • Start the vehicle.
  • Avoid storing DEF containers permanently in the vehicle.

DEF refill bottle

Only screw the DEF refill bottle hand-tight onto the filler opening in the engine compartment. It may otherwise be damaged.

DEF refill bottles 1 can be obtained at many gas stations or at a qualified specialist workshop. Refill bottles without a threaded cap offer no overfill protection. DEF may leak out as a result of overfilling. Mercedes-Benz offers special refill bottles with a threaded cap. You can obtain this from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

  • Unscrew the protective cap from DEF refill bottle 1.
  • Place DEF refill bottle 1 as shown on filler opening 2 and screw it on clockwise until hand-tight.
  • Press DEF refill bottle 1 towards filler opening 2. The DEF tank is filled. This could take up to one minute.
  • Let go of DEF refill bottle 1.
  • Turn DEF refill bottle 1 counter-clockwise and remove it.
  • Screw the protective cap onto DEF refill bottle 1 again.

Filling procedure with the pump nozzle of a DEF filling pump

  • Insert the pump nozzle into the filler neck and add DEF. When doing so, do not overfill the DEF tank. You can also use a DEF filling pump for trucks.

Closing the DEF filler cap on filler caps that are not lockable

  • After filling the DEF tank, place DEF filler cap 1 on the filler neck and tighten it clockwise.
  • Turn the DEF filler cap until the lettering is legible and horizontal. The filler neck is only locked correctly when this is the case.
  • Close the hood.

Closing the DEF filler cap on lockable filler caps

  • After filling the DEF tank, place DEF filler cap 1 on the filler neck and tighten it clockwise.
  • Remove tool 4 from DEF filler cap 1 and store it in the vehicle tool kit.
  • Pull cover 3 on DEF filler cap 1 up over holes 2 of DEF filler cap 1, turn and release.
  • Turn DEF filler cap 1. If DEF filler cap 1 turns freely, the DEF tank is closed.

Parking

Parking the vehicle

WARNING Risk of fire caused by hot exhaust system parts

Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite.

  • Park the vehicle so that no flammable material can come into contact with hot vehicle components.
  • In particular, do not park on dry grassland or harvested grain fields.
 

 

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could, in particular:

  • open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users.
  • get out and be struck by oncoming traffic.
  • operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by:

  • releasing the parking brake.
  • changing the transmission position.
  • starting the vehicle.
  • Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
  • When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
  • Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.
 

 

WARNING Risk of accident and injury if parking brake is not applied

If you park the vehicle with the transmission in park position P and the parking brake is not engaged, the vehicle may roll away. Engaging park position P is not a fully adequate replacement for the parking brake. There is a risk of accident and injury!

  • Secure the vehicle against rolling away as described below.
 

Observe the following points to ensure that the vehicle is properly secured against rolling away unintentionally.

  • Always apply the parking brake.
  • Vehicles with automatic transmission: Engage transmission position P.
  • On uphill or downhill inclines: Secure the rear axle with a chock or an object without any sharp edges.

Manual parking brake

Applying or releasing the parking brake lever

WARNING Risk of skidding or an accident by braking with the parking brake

If you have to brake your vehicle with the parking brake, the braking distance is considerably longer and the wheels may lock. There is an increased risk of skidding and/or accident.

  • Only brake the vehicle with the parking brake if the service brake has failed.
  • In this case, do not apply the parking brake with too much force.
  • If the wheels lock, immediately release the parking brake as much as required for the wheels to turn again.
 

 

WARNING Risk of fire and an accident if the parking brake is not released

If the parking brake is not fully released when driving, the following situations can occur:

  • The parking brake can overheat and cause a fire
  • The parking brake can lose its holding function
  • Completely release the parking brake before driving off.
 

The brake lights do not light up when you brake the vehicle with the parking brake.

Generally, you may only apply the parking brake when the vehicle is stationary.

  • To apply the parking brake: pull handbrake lever 1 up as far as the last possible detent. When the vehicle has been started, the  and  (USA) or  (Canada) indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up. If the vehicle is in motion, a warning tone sounds. % In vehicles with a folding parking brake lever, you can then press parking brake lever 1 down as far as it will go.
  • To release the parking brake: on vehicles with a folding handbrake lever, first pull handbrake lever 1 up as far as it will go.
  • Pull parking brake lever 1 slightly and press release knob 2.
  • Guide handbrake lever 1 down as far as it will go with release knob 2 pressed. The  and  (USA) or  (Canada) indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out.

Folding the handbrake lever up or down (only in vehicles with a folding handbrake lever)

Requirements:

  • The handbrake lever is applied.
  • To fold down the handbrake lever: push the handbrake lever down as far as it will go.
  • To raise the handbrake lever: pull the handbrake lever up as far as it will go.

Performing emergency braking with the handbrake lever

If, in exceptional cases, the service brake fails, you may use the parking brake to perform emergency braking. 

  • Emergency braking: press and hold release button 2 and carefully pull brake lever 1.

Electric parking brake

Information on the electric parking brake

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular:

  • open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users.
  • get out and be struck by oncoming traffic.
  • operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example:

  • releasing the parking brake.
  • changing the gearbox position.
  • starting the vehicle.
  • Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
  • When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
  • Keep the key out of reach of children.
 

The function of the electric parking brake is dependent on the on-board electrical system voltage. If the on-board electrical system voltage is low or there is a malfunction in the system, the electric parking brake may not be able to be applied. In this case, the yellow  indicator lamp lights up.

In this case, park the vehicle in the following way:

  • Park the vehicle on level ground and secure it to prevent it from rolling away.
  • Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position .

It may not be possible to release a parking brake if the on-board electrical system voltage is low or if there is a malfunction in the system. Inform a qualified specialist workshop. When the vehicle is not switched on, the electric parking brake carries out a function test at regular intervals. Noises are normal in this process.

Function of the electric parking brake

Vehicles with automatic transmission: The electric parking brake is automatically applied when the transmission is in position .

In addition, at least one of the following conditions must be fulfilled:

  • The vehicle has not been started
  • The driver is not sitting in the driver's seat
  • The belt buckle is undone

The electric parking brake is also automatically applied if Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has brought the vehicle to a standstill. The electric parking brake is also automatically applied when the transmission is not in position P, but the following situations occur:

  • There is a system malfunction
  • The power supply is insufficient
  • The vehicle is stationary for a long time

The red  and  (USA) or  (Canada) indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up. The electric parking brake is only actually applied when the red  and  (USA) or  (Canada) indicator lamps light up continuously.

Releasing the electric parking brake automatically

Vehicles with automatic transmission: The electric parking brake of your vehicle is released when all of the following conditions are fulfilled:

  • The driver is sitting in the driver's seat.
  • The driver is belted.
  • The vehicle has been started.
  • The transmission is in position D or R and you depress the accelerator.

You switch from transmission position P to position D or R. You must also depress the accelerator if traveling on steep uphill gradients.

  • If the transmission is in position R, the rearend doors must be closed

Applying/releasing the electric parking brake manually

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could, in particular:

  • open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users.
  • get out and be struck by oncoming traffic.
  • operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by:

  • releasing the parking brake.
  • changing the transmission position.
  • starting the vehicle.
  • Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
  • When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
  • Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.
 

Observe "Notes on pets in the vehicle".

  • To apply: press the  switch when the vehicle is stationary. When the electric parking brake is applied, the red  and  (USA) or  (Canada) indicator lamps light up in the instrument cluster. The electric parking brake is only actually applied when the red  and  (USA) or  (Canada) indicator lamps light up continuously. It is also possible to apply the electric parking brake when the vehicle is switched off.
  • To release: pull the  switch. The red  and (USA) or  (Canada) indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. You may only release the electric parking brake if the vehicle is switched on with the start/ stop button.

Emergency braking

In the event of an emergency, you can brake the vehicle while it is in motion with the electric parking brake.

  • While driving, press the  switch of the electric parking brake. The vehicle is braked as long as you keep the  switch of the electric parking brake depressed. The vehicle's brake lights light up.
  • The longer the  switch of the electric parking brake is depressed, the greater the braking force.

During the braking procedure, you will receive the following feedback from the vehicle:

  • A warning tone sounds.
  • The Release Parking Brake message appears in the instrument cluster.
  • The red  and  (USA) indicator lamps flash in the instrument cluster or the red  (Canada) indicator lamp flashes in the instrument cluster.

When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is applied.

Parking the vehicle for an extended period

Parking the vehicle for more than four weeks

  • Method 1: connect the batteries to a trickle charger via the jump-start connection.
  • Method 2: interrupt the power supply by activating standby mode.
  • Method 3: disconnect all batteries. For this, please contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Standby mode

Activating or deactivating standby mode

Requirements:

  • The power supply is switched on.
  • The vehicle is not switched on.

If standby mode is activated, energy loss will be minimized during extended periods of non-operation. Standby mode is characterized by the following:

  • The starter battery is preserved.
  • The maximum non-operational time appears in the media display.
  • The connection to online services is interrupted.
  • The ATA (anti-theft alarm system) is unavailable.
  • The interior protection and tow-away alarm functions are not available.

Exceeding the vehicle's displayed non-operational time may cause inconvenience; i.e. it cannot be guaranteed that the starter battery will reliably start the vehicle. Charge the starter battery first in the following situations:

  • In order to extend the vehicle's non-operational time.
  • The Battery Charge Insufficient for Standby Mode message appears in the media display.
  • Standby mode is automatically deactivated when the vehicle is switched on.

On-board computer:

  • To activate/deactivate: select Yes or No.
  • If the options are grayed out, the charge level of the battery is not sufficient for standby mode.

Driving and driving safety systems

Notes on driving systems and your responsibility

Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems that assist you while driving, parking and maneuvering. The driving systems are only aids. They are not a substitute for you paying attention to your surroundings and do not relieve you of your responsibility pertaining to road traffic law. The driver is always responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Always pay attention to the traffic and intervene if necessary. Be aware of the limitations regarding the safe use of these systems. Driving systems can neither reduce the risk of accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. They cannot always take into account road, weather or traffic conditions.

Information about sensors

Certain driving and driving safety systems use sensors 1 to monitor the area in front of, behind or next to the vehicle (depending on the vehicle's equipment). Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the radar sensors are integrated behind the bumpers and/or behind the radiator grille. Keep these parts free of dirt, ice and slush. Do not cover the sensors, for example, with bicycle racks, overhanging loads or stickers. After a collision, have the function of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop as the bumper or radiator grille may have sustained damage that cannot be seen by the naked eye.

Function of driving systems and driving safety system

In this section, you will find information about the following driving systems and driving safety systems:

  • ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) 
  • ASR (acceleration skid control)
  • BAS (Brake Assist System)
  • ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) 
  • EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribution)
  • Active Brake Assist
  • Cruise control 
  • Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC 
  • Hill start assist
  • HOLD function
  • Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
  • Rear view camera
  • Surround view camera
  • ATTENTION ASSIST
  • Blind Spot Assist 
  • Active Lane Keeping Assist 

Functions of ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Observe the important safety guidelines for the driving safety system. ABS controls the brake pressure in critical situations:

  • During braking, for instance, at maximum fullstop braking or if there is insufficient tire traction, the wheels are prevented from locking.
  • The steerability of the vehicle in terms of physical possibilities is ensured when braking.
  • ABS is active from speeds of approx. 3 mph (5 km/h). On a slippery road surface, ABS intervenes even if you only brake gently.

System limits

ABS may be impaired or may not function if a malfunction has occurred and the yellow  ABS warning lamp lights up continuously in the instrument cluster after the vehicle is started.

If ABS intervenes, you will feel pulsations in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal may be an indication of hazardous road conditions and functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving.

If ABS intervenes: keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until the braking situation has passed. To carry out maximum full-stop braking: depress the brake pedal with full force.

Function of BAS (Brake Assist System)

WARNING Risk of an accident caused by a malfunction in BAS (Brake Assist System)

If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased.

  • Depress the brake pedal with full force in emergency braking situations. ABS prevents the wheels from locking
 

BAS supports you with additional braking force in an emergency braking situation. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS is activated:

  • BAS automatically boosts the braking force of the brakes
  • BAS can shorten the braking distance
  • ABS prevents the wheels from locking

When you release the brake pedal, the brakes function as usual again. BAS is deactivated.

Functions of ASR (Acceleration Skid Control)

ASR can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics if the driver does not pay attention when pulling away or accelerating. ASR is only an aid. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. If you activate or deactivate the all-wheel drive in a vehicle with this option, ASR will be deactivated for the duration of the activation/deactivation process.

Vehicles without steering wheel buttons: if ASR is malfunctioning, the  indicator lamp lights up while the vehicle is running and the engine output may be reduced. ASR improves traction, i.e. the transfer of power from the tires to the road surface, for a sustained period and therefore also improves the driving stability of the vehicle. If the drive wheels start to spin, ASR brakes individual drive wheels and limits the engine torque. ASR thus significantly assists you when pulling away and accelerating, especially on wet or slippery roads. If traction on the road surface is not sufficient, even ASR will not allow you to pull away without difficulty. The type of tires and total weight of the vehicle as well as the gradient of the road also play a crucial role. If ASR intervenes, the  warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes.

Function of ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning

If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.

  • Drive on carefully.
  • Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
 

 

WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is deactivated

If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization.

  • ESP® should only be deactivated in the following situations.
 

If the surface requires, temporarily deactivate ESP® when pulling away. Do not operate the vehicle on a roller dynamometer (e.g. for a performance test). If you have to operate the vehicle on a roller dynamometer, consult a qualified specialist workshop beforehand. If you activate or deactivate the all-wheel drive in a vehicle with this option, ESP® will be automatically deactivated for the duration of the activation/ deactivation process. If ESP® is malfunctioning or automatically deactivated, the  warning lamp lights up yellow while the vehicle is running and the engine output may be reduced.

ESP® can, within physical limits, monitor and improve driving stability and traction in the following situations:

  • when pulling away on wet or slippery road surfaces
  • when braking
  • if you are driving faster than 50 mph (80 km/h) in strong crosswinds

If the vehicle is deviating from the direction desired by the driver, ESP® can stabilize the vehicle by performing the following actions:

  • one or more wheels are braked
  • the drive system performance is adapted depending on the situation

When ESP® is deactivated by the driver, the  warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up continuously:

  • vehicle stabilization may be delayed
  • Crosswind Assist is still active
  • the wheels may start to spin
  • ASR traction control is no longer active

If ESP® is deactivated by the driver, ESP® will continue to support you when braking. If the  warning lamp on the instrument cluster flashes, one or more tires have reached their tire traction limit:

  • adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions
  • do not deactivate ESP® under any circumstances

Activating/deactivating ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

Multimedia system:

ESP® can only be activated and deactivated via quick access when at least one other function is available in quick access. Otherwise, you can find ESP® in the Assistance menu.

  • Select ESP. A prompt appears.
  • Select On or  Off.

If the ESP® OFF warning lamp  lights up permanently on the instrument cluster, ESP® is deactivated. Observe the information on warning lamps and display messages that may appear on the instrument cluster.

Function of ESP® Crosswind Assist

Crosswind Assist does not react under the following conditions:

  • The vehicle is subjected to severe jolts and vibrations, e.g. as a result of uneven surfaces or potholes.
  • The vehicle loses traction, e.g. on snow or ice or when hydroplaning.
  • The driver is performing sudden and large steering movements.

Crosswind Assist is operational again as soon as the driving conditions return to normal. Crosswind Assist detects strong crosswind gusts that can impair the ability of your vehicle to drive straight ahead. Crosswind Assist intervenes depending on the direction and strength of the crosswind. A stabilizing brake application helps you to keep the vehicle on track. Information is shown on the instrument cluster in the event of a clearly perceptible intervention by Crosswind Assist. Crosswind Assist is active above a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) when driving straight or during slight cornering.

Function of ESP® trailer stabilization

WARNING Risk of accident in poor road and weather conditions

In poor road and weather conditions, the trailer stabilization cannot prevent lurching of the vehicle/trailer combination. Trailers with a high center of gravity may tip over before ESP® detects this.

  • Always adapt your driving style to suit the current road and weather conditions.
 

ESP® trailer stabilization counteracts critical driving situations in good time and thereby provides considerable assistance when driving with a trailer. Trailer stabilization is part of ESP®.

If the sensor system and evaluation logic detect trailer swinging movements, ESP® trailer stabilization initially brakes individual vehicle wheels in a targeted manner. It thus counteracts swinging movements. If the swinging movements do not stop, the vehicle is braked until the vehicle/trailer combination is stabilized. If necessary, the vehicle's engine output is limited. If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailer combination) starts to swerve, you are able to stabilize the vehicle/trailer combination only by braking. ESP® trailer stabilization helps you to stabilize the vehicle/trailer combination in this situation. ESP® trailer stabilization is active at speeds above approx. 40 mph (65 km/h). If ESP® is deactivated because of a malfunction, trailer stabilization will not function.

Function of EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribution)

EBD has the following characteristics:

  • monitoring and controlling the brake pressure on the rear wheels
  • improving driving stability when braking, especially on bends

Functions of Active Brake Assist

Active Brake Assist consists of the following functions:

  • Distance warning function
  • Autonomous braking function
  • Situation-dependent brake force boosting

Active Brake Assist can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with vehicles or pedestrians or to reduce the effects of such a collision. If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. If you do not react to the visual warning or warning tone, autonomous braking can be initiated in critical situations. If there are pedestrians and cyclists crossing: in especially critical situations, Active Brake Assist can initiate autonomous braking directly. In this case, the optical warning and warning tone occur simultaneously with the braking application. If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situation or depress the brake pedal during autonomous braking, situation-dependent brake force boosting occurs. The brake pressure increases up to maximum full-stop braking if necessary. Situationdependent brake force boosting only intervenes when the brakes are applied firmly; otherwise, it remains within the autonomous braking process.

WARNING Risk of accident in case of limited detection performance of Active Brake Assist

Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. Due to the system, unjustified interventions or non-interventions by Brake Assist may occur in complex driving situations. In these cases, as well as in the event of malfunctions of Active Brake Assist, the brake system continues to be available with full brake force boosting and BAS.

  • Always keep a close eye on the traffic situation and do not rely solely on Active Brake Assist. Active Brake Assist is only an aid. The driver of the vehicle is responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time.
  • Be ready to brake and take evasive action if necessary.
 

Also observe the system limits of Active Brake Assist.

The individual subfunctions are available in the following speed ranges: Distance warning function

The distance warning function warns you at speeds greater than approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), if your vehicle is critically close to a vehicle or pedestrian. An intermittent warning tone sounds and the  distance warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. Brake immediately or take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so and the traffic situation allows this.

The distance warning function can aid you in the following situations with an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp:

Vehicles traveling in front Stationary vehicles Crossing vehicles Crossing pedestrians/cyclists Stationary pedestrians
Up to approx. 155 mph (250 km/h) Up to approx. 124 mph (200 km/h) No reaction Up to approx. 37 mph (60 km/h) No reaction

Autonomous braking function

The autonomous braking function may intervene at speeds starting from approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) in the following situations:

Vehicles traveling in front Stationary vehicles Crossing vehicles Crossing pedestrians/cyclists Stationary pedestrians
Up to approx. 155 mph (250 km/h) Up to approx. 124 mph (200 km/h) No reaction Up to approx. 37 mph (60 km/h) No reaction

Situation-dependent brake force boosting

Situation-dependent brake force boosting may intervene at speeds starting from approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) in the following situations:

Vehicles traveling in front Stationary vehicles Crossing vehicles Crossing pedestrians/cyclists Stationary pedestrians
Up to approx. 155 mph (250 km/h) Up to approx. 50 mph (80 km/h) No reaction Up to approx. 37 mph (60 km/h) No reaction

Canceling a brake application of Active Brake Assist

You can cancel a brake application of Active Brake Assist at any time by:

  • Fully depressing the accelerator pedal or with kickdown.
  • Fully releasing the brake pedal (only during situation-dependent brake force boosting).

Active Brake Assist may cancel the brake application when one of the following conditions is fulfilled:

  • You maneuver to avoid the obstacle.
  • There is no longer a risk of collision.
  • An obstacle is no longer detected in front of your vehicle.

System limits 

The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

  • The sensors are affected by snow, rain, fog or heavy spray.
  • The sensors are dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered.
  • The sensors are affected by interference from other radar sources, e.g. strong radar reflections in parking garages.
  • If a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has been detected and displayed.
  • Full system performance is not yet available for a few seconds after starting the vehicle or after driving off.

The system may not react correctly in the following situations:

  • In complex traffic situations, objects may not always be clearly detected.
  • Pedestrians or vehicles move quickly into the detection range of the sensors.
  • Pedestrians are obscured by other objects.
  • Bends with a narrow radius can hamper the system's ability to react correctly.

Setting Active Brake Assist

Requirements:

  • The vehicle is switched on.

Multimedia system:

The following settings are available:

  • Early
  • Medium
  • Late
  • Off

The last active setting is selected automatically every time the vehicle is started. Exception: if the last setting was Off, the Medium setting will be automatically activated the next time the vehicle is started.

Deactivating Active Brake Assist

It is recommended that Active Brake Assist is always left activated.

  • Select Off. The distance warning function and autonomous braking function are deactivated.

When the vehicle is next started, the Medium setting is automatically activated.

  • If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the  symbol appears in the status bar of the instrument cluster.

Cruise control

Function of cruise control

To maintain a previously stored speed, cruise control accelerates and brakes the vehicle independently. If you accelerate to overtake, for example, the stored speed is not deleted. If you remove your foot from the accelerator pedal after overtaking, cruise control will resume speed regulation back to the stored speed. Cruise control is operated using the corresponding steering wheel buttons. You can store any speed above 15 mph (20 km/h).

If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise control can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Cruise control is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, braking in good time and for staying in your lane. The status of cruise control and the stored speed are shown in the instrument cluster.

Instrument cluster display (color display)

  • 1 Cruise control is selected.
  • 2 Set speed gray: speed is stored, cruise control is deactivated.
  • 3 Set speed green: speed is stored, cruise control is activated.

System limits

Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient levels out. On long and steep downhill gradients, you should change down to a lower gear in good time. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By doing so, you will make use of the engine's braking effect. This will take some of the strain off the brake system and prevent the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly.

Do not use cruise control in the following situations:

  • In case of frequent changes of speed, e.g. in heavy traffic or winding roads
  • On slippery roads. The drive wheels may lose grip during acceleration and the vehicle may skid.
  • When visibility is poor

Operating cruise control

WARNING Risk of accident due to stored speed

If you call up the stored speed and this is lower than your current speed, the vehicle decelerates.

  • Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the stored speed.
 

Requirements:

  • ESP® is activated, but may not intervene.
  • The driving speed is at least 15 mph (20 km/h).

  • To activate cruise control: push rocker switch 1 up.
  • Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The current speed is then saved and maintained by the vehicle.
  • Push rocker switch 1 up.
  • To increase/reduce speed: push rocker switch 2 up or down. The stored speed is increased or reduced by 1 mph (1 km/h).

Or

  • Press rocker switch 2 up or down and hold. The stored speed is increased or reduced in 1 mph (1 km/h) increments.

Or

  • Push rocker switch 2 beyond the pressure point. The stored speed is increased or reduced by 5 mph (10 km/h).

Or

  • Push rocker switch 2 beyond the pressure point and hold. The stored speed is increased or reduced in 5 mph (10 km/h) increments.

Or

  • Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.
  • Push rocker switch 2 up. If cruise control is activated and Traffic Sign Assist has detected a speed restriction sign with a maximum permissible speed and this appears in the instrument display:
    • To adopt the detected speed: push rocker switch 3 up. The maximum permissible speed shown by the traffic sign is stored and the vehicle maintains this speed.
    • To deactivate cruise control: push rocker switch 3 (CNCL) down.

If cruise control is deactivated, it can be reactivated as follows:

  • rocker switch 2 (SET+) or (SET-) stores the current speed and the vehicle maintains this speed
  • rocker switch 3 (RES) calls up the last speed stored and the vehicle maintains this speed
  • If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP® intervenes, cruise control is deactivated. When you switch off the vehicle, the last speed stored is cleared.

DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)

Notes on DSR

If you fail to adapt your driving style or you are inattentive, DSR can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. DSR cannot take road, weather and traffic conditions into account. DSR is only an aid. You are responsible especially for a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time.

DSR supports you when driving downhill. DSR maintains a set speed for you on downhill gradients by applying the brakes as required. Maintaining the speed is dependent on the road surface conditions and the downhill gradient and cannot therefore be guaranteed in all situations. You can set the speed depending on the gear range to between 2 mph (4 km/h) and 11 mph (18 km/h) using the brake and accelerator pedals or the rocker switch on the steering wheel.

DSR automatically controls in the following situations:

  • If the vehicle is stationary, or its speed is less than 2 mph (4 km/h), the speed is set to 2 mph (4 km/h) or it is set to the minimum speed for the respective gear range.
  • If you drive faster than 11 mph (18 km/h) offroad, DSR switches to standby mode. DSR remains activated, but does not brake automatically.
  • If you drive downhill slower than 11 mph (18 km/h), DSR sets the speed to the previously set speed.
  • If you drive faster than 28 mph (45 km/h), DSR switches off automatically.

Activating/deactivating DSR

Activating DSR

You can activate DSR when the vehicle is stationary or moving.

  • Press the upper section of switch 1.
  • Brake or accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed between 2 mph (4 km/h) and 11 mph (18 km/h).
  • Release the brake or accelerator pedal. The current speed is stored. When stationary, 2 mph (4 km/h) or the minimum possible speed for each gear range is stored. DSR maintains the stored speed on the downhill gradient and brakes automatically.

When DSR is activated and the vehicle pulls away, accelerates or brakes on an incline, the speed set corresponds to the speed at which the accelerator or brake pedal is released or the rocker switch is pressed during DSR regulation. This is only the case if you are not driving faster than 11 mph (18 km/h).

DSR status display in the on-board computer

  • DSR is activated: - DSR and the set speed appear in the status area of the on-board computer.
  • DSR is activated, but is not intervening: - You are driving between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 28 mph (45 km/h). - DSR and the speed 11 mph (18 km/h) appear in the status area of the on-board computer. DSR is in standby mode.
  • DSR is inactive: - You are exceeding a speed of 28 mph (45 km/h). - DSR appears in the status area of the onboard computer. In addition, the DSR Off message appears. - DSR - - - appears in the status area of the on-board computer.

Setting the speed while driving downhill

You can set the speed to between 2 mph (4 km/h) and, depending on the gear range, up to 11 mph (18 km/h) using the brake and accelerator pedals or the rocker switch on the steering wheel.

  • Brake or accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed on the downhill gradient.
  • Release the brake or accelerator pedal. The current speed is stored.

Or

  • Press rocker switch 1 up or down during a DSR regulation. The last saved speed is increased or reduced.
  • Release rocker switch 1. The current speed is stored.

Or

  • Press rocker switch 1 up or down until desired speed is reached.
  • Release rocker switch 1. The current speed is stored.
  • It may be a moment before the vehicle starts to brake to the set speed. Take this delay into account when setting the speed with rocker switch 1.

Deactivating DSR

  • Press the upper section of switch 1.

Or

  • Accelerate and drive faster than 28 mph (45 km/h). DSR deactivates automatically in the following situations:
  • You drive faster than 28 mph (45 km/h). R There is a malfunction in the ESP® or ABS system.

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC maintains the set speed on free-flowing roads. If vehicles ahead are detected, the set distance is maintained, if necessary until the vehicle comes to a halt. The vehicle accelerates or brakes, depending on the distance to the vehicle in front and the set speed. Speed and distance are set and stored on the steering wheel. The speed can be set in the range between 12 mph (20 km/h) and 99 mph (160 km/h) or between 12 mph (20 km/h) and the maximum design speed.

Other features of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC:

  • Depending on the preselected distance, DISTRONIC intervenes either dynamically (short distance) or to save fuel (long distance).
  • Depending on the vehicle mass detected, the dynamics of the DISTRONIC intervention are reduced.
  • Rapid acceleration to the stored speed is initiated if the turn signal indicator is switched on to change to the overtaking lane.

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is only an aid. The driver is responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time.

System limits

The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations, for example:

  • The radar sensors are disturbed by snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, glare, direct sunlight or highly variable light conditions.
  • The radar sensors may malfunction in parking garages or on roads with steep uphill or downhill gradients.
  • If the radar sensors are dirty or covered.
  • On slick or slippery roads, braking or accelerating can cause the wheels to lose grip and the vehicle to skid.
  • Standing objects are not detected if they were previously not detected as moving.
  • On bends, target vehicles may be lost or not detected correctly. In connection with this, the system does not regulate to a target vehicle and unintentional acceleration may occur.

Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC in these situations.

WARNING Risk of accident from acceleration or braking by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may accelerate or brake in the following cases, for example:

  • If the vehicle pulls away using Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC.
  • If the stored speed is called up and is considerably faster or slower than the currently driven speed.
  • If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no longer detects a vehicle in front or does not react to relevant objects.
  • Always carefully observe the traffic conditions and be ready to brake at all times.
  • Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the stored speed.
 

 

WARNING Risk of accident due to insufficient deceleration by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of the possible deceleration. If this deceleration is not sufficient, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and acoustic warning.

  • Adjust your speed and maintain a suitable distance from the vehicle in front.
  • Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take evasive action.
 

 

WARNING Risk of accident if detection function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is impaired

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not react or has a limited reaction:

  • when driving on a different lane or when changing lanes
  • to pedestrians, animals, bicycles or stationary vehicles, or unexpected obstacles
  • to complex traffic conditions
  • to oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic

As a result, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations.

  • Always observe the traffic conditions carefully and react accordingly.
 

 

WARNING Risk of accident due to Active Speed Limit Assist adapting the vehicle's speed

The speed adopted by Active Speed Limit Assist may be too high or incorrect in some individual cases, such as:

  • at speed limits below 12 mph (20 km/h)
  • in wet conditions or in fog
  • when towing a trailer
  • Ensure that the driven speed complies with traffic regulations.
  • Adjust the driving speed to suit current traffic and weather conditions.
 

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may not detect narrow vehicles traveling in front, e.g. motorcycles or vehicles not traveling in line with your vehicle.

Operating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Requirements:

  • The vehicle has been started.
  • The parking brake has been released.
  • ESP® is activated and is not intervening.
  • The transmission is in position D.
  • The driver's and front passenger door are closed.
  • The seat occupancy recognition on the driver's seat has detected that the driver has fastened the seat belt.
  • The check of the radar sensor system has been successfully completed.

Activating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

  • Press button 1.
  • To activate without a stored speed: push rocker switch 3 up  or down . The current speed is then saved and maintained by the vehicle.

Or

  • To activate with a stored speed: push rocker switch 4 up .
  • If rocker switch 4 is pressed up twice, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated with the speed restriction displayed on the instrument cluster.

Adopting the displayed limit speed when Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is active

  • Push rocker switch 4 up . The limit speed displayed on the instrument cluster is adopted as the stored speed. The vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the stored speed.

Pulling away again with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

  • Remove your foot from the brake pedal.
  • Push rocker switch 4 up . or
  • Depress the accelerator pedal briefly with force. The functions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC continue to be carried out.

Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

WARNING Risk of an accident due to Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC being active when you leave the driver's seat

If you leave the driver's seat while the vehicle is being braked by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC only, the vehicle can roll away.

  • Always deactivate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away before you leave the driver's seat.
 
  • Push rocker switch 4 down .
  • Depress the brake pedal.

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is automatically deactivated in the following circumstances:

  • The driver's seat belt buckle is open and the vehicle is traveling slower than 2 mph (3 km/h).
  • The driver's seat is not occupied.
  • The transmission is not in position D.
  • The parking brake is applied.
  • The driver's or front passenger door is open.
  • There is an internal error.

In addition to the deactivation of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, transmission position P is automatically engaged if one of these conditions is met or if the vehicle is traveling very slowly.

Increasing or reducing the speed

  • Push rocker switch 3 up  or down  to the pressure point. The stored speed is increased or reduced by 1 mph (1 km/h).

Or

  • Push rocker switch 3 up / down  to the pressure point and hold it there. The stored speed is increased or reduced in 1 mph (1 km/h)increments.

Or

  • Push rocker switch 3 beyond the pressure point. The stored speed is increased or reduced by 5 mph (10 km/h).

Or

  • Push rocker switch 3 beyond the pressure point and hold it there. The stored speed is increased or reduced in 5 mph (10 km/h)increments.

Increasing or reducing the specified distance from the vehicle in front

  • To increase the specified distance: push rocker switch 2 down ().
  • To reduce the specified distance: push rocker switch 2 up ().

Information on Hill Start Assist

Hill Start Assist holds the vehicle for a short time when pulling away on a hill under the following conditions:

  • Vehicles with automatic transmission: the transmission is in position D or R.
  • The parking brake has been released.

This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll.

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to the vehicle rolling away

After a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer holds the vehicle.

  • Swiftly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Do not leave the vehicle when it is being held by Hill Start Assist.
 

HOLD function

Notes on the HOLD function

Requirement: The seat occupancy recognition on the driver's seat has detected that the driver has fastened their seat belt.

Function: The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a standstill without requiring you to depress the brake pedal, e.g. when pulling away on steep slopes or when waiting in traffic. When you depress the accelerator pedal to pull away, the braking effect is canceled and the HOLD function is deactivated. The HOLD function is only an aid. The responsibility for the vehicle safely standing still remains with the driver.

System limits: The HOLD function is only intended to provide assistance when driving and is not a sufficient means of safeguarding the vehicle against rolling away when stationary. The incline cannot be greater than 30%.

Activating/deactivating the HOLD function

Requirements:

  • The vehicle is stationary.
  • The vehicle has been started or has been automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop function.
  • The driver is seated and belted.
  • The electric parking brake is released.
  • Vehicles with automatic transmission: the selector lever is in position D, R or N.

Activating the HOLD function

WARNING Risk of an accident due to the HOLD function being active when you leave the vehicle

If the vehicle is only braked with the HOLD function it could, in the following situations, roll away:

  • If there is a malfunction in the system or in the power supply.
  • If the HOLD function is deactivated by depressing the accelerator pedal or brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
  • Always secure the vehicle against rolling away before you leave it.
 
  • Make sure that the activation conditions are met.
  • Depress the brake pedal until the  display appears in the instrument cluster display. The HOLD function is activated. You can release the brake pedal.
  • If depressing the brake pedal the first time does not activate the HOLD function, wait briefly and then try again.

Deactivating the HOLD function

  • Vehicles with automatic transmission: depress the accelerator pedal when the automatic transmission is in position D or R.
  • Depress the brake pedal again with sufficient pressure until the  display in the instrument cluster display goes out.
  • Vehicles with automatic transmission: the automatic transmission of your vehicle shifts to P after some time. This relieves the load on the service brake.

When the HOLD function is activated, the automatic transmission automatically shifts to P in the following situations:

  • The driver leaves the driver's seat.
  • The driver's door is opened.
  • The vehicle is switched off without ECO start/ stop function.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking assistance system with ultrasound. It monitors the area around your vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper and six sensors in the rear bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC indicates visually and audibly the distance between your vehicle and an object. For vehicles with rear attachments or selected open vehicle model designations, there is special equipment without rear sensors. Here, the six sensors in the rear bumper are omitted. For the rear area and the side area, no distances to an obstacle are displayed and no optical warnings or warning tones are given. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking space. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc. in the maneuvering area while maneuvering and parking or exiting parking spaces. In the standard setting, an intermittent warning tone sounds from a distance of approximately 1.3 ft (0.4 m) to an obstacle. A continuous warning tone sounds from a distance of approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m). You can set the warning tone in the multimedia system so that it will sound earlier at a greater distance of approximately 3.3 ft (1 m).

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display in the multimedia system

If the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display is not active and an obstacle is detected in the path of the vehicle, a pop-up window for Parking Assist PARKTRONIC appears at speeds of up to approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).

System limits

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not necessarily take into account the following obstacles:

  • Obstacles below the detection range, e.g. persons, animals or objects
  • Obstacles above the detection range, e.g. overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of trucks

The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush. Otherwise, they may not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them.

Vehicles with trailer hitch: Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear zone when you establish an electrical connection between your vehicle and a trailer.

Deactivating/activating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Multimedia system:

  • Select PARKTRONIC On. The function is activated or deactivated depending on the previous setting.
  • Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when starting the vehicle.

Setting the warning tones of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Multimedia system:

Adjusting the volume of the warning tones

  • Select Warning Tone Volume.
  • Adjust the value.

Adjusting the pitch of the warning tones

  • Select Warning Tone Pitch. Adjust the value.

Specifying the starting point for the warning tones You can specify whether the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning tones should commence when the vehicle is further away from an obstacle.

  • Select Warn Early All Around.
  • Activate or deactivate the function.

Activating or deactivating audio fadeout: You can specify whether the volume of a media source in the multimedia system should be reduced during a Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning tone.

  • Select Audio Fadeout During Warning Tones.
  • Activate or deactivate the function.

Rear view camera

Function of the rear view camera

If you have activated the function in the multimedia system, the image from rear view camera 1 appears in the multimedia system when reverse gear is selected. Dynamic guide lines show the path the vehicle will take for the current steering movement. This helps you to orient yourself and to avoid obstacles when backing up. The image from rear view camera 1 appears in the multimedia system when the following conditions are fulfilled:

  • The vehicle is switched on.
  • Reverse gear has not been engaged.
  • The rear-end doors are opened.

In this way, the area behind the vehicle is monitored. When the rear-end doors are closed, the image from the rear view camera is switched off for approximately ten seconds. The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for you paying attention to the surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering and parking. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc. in the maneuvering area while maneuvering and parking in parking spaces. The rear view camera may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all. The rear view camera cannot show all objects which are very near to or under the rear bumper. It will not warn you of a collision, people or objects.

You can select from the following views:

  • Normal view
  • Wide-angle view
  • Trailer view

The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the inside rearview mirror.

System limits

The rear view camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situations:

  • If there is heavy rain, snow or fog
  • If the ambient light conditions are poor, e.g. at night
  • If the area is illuminated with fluorescent lighting (the display may flicker)
  • If the temperature changes very quickly, for example if you drive out of the cold into a heated garage in the winter
  • If the ambient temperature is very high
  • If the camera lens is covered, dirty or fogged up. Observe the notes on cleaning the rear view camera
  • The camera or rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this event, have the camera, its position and its setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

The field of vision and other functions of the rear view camera may be restricted due to additional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g. a loading tailgate).

  • The display contrast may be impaired due to incidental sunlight or other light sources. In this case, pay particular attention.
  • Have the display repaired or replaced if, for example, pixel errors considerably restrict its use.
  • Objects that are not at ground level appear further away than they actually are. This includes, for example:
    • The bumper of a vehicle parked behind
    • The drawbar of a trailer
    • The ball neck of a trailer hitch
    • The tail-end of a truck
    • Slanted posts

Only use the guidelines of the camera image for orientation. Do not travel further than the lowest horizontal guide line when approaching objects. You may otherwise damage your vehicle and/or the object.

Vehicles without Park Assist PARKTRONIC

The following camera views are available in the multimedia system:

Normal view

  • 1 Yellow path marking the course the tires will take at the current steering position (dynamic)
  • 2 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven surface) depending on the current steering angle (dynamic)
  • 3 Marking at a distance of approximately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) (the rear-end doors can still be opened completely)
  • 4 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) from the rear area
  • 5 Red guide lines at a distance of approximately 8 in (0.2 m) from the rear area, vehicle width including outside mirrors

Wide-angle view

View of trailer (if trailer hitch is installed)

  • 1 Yellow guide line, locating aid
  • 2 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) to the ball head of the trailer hitch
  • 3 Ball head of the trailer hitch

Vehicles with Park Assist PARKTRONIC

The following camera views are available in the multimedia system:

Normal view

  • 1 Yellow path marking the course the tires will take at the current steering position (dynamic)
  • 2 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven surface) depending on the current steering angle (dynamic)
  • 3 Marking at a distance of approximately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) (the rear-end doors can still be opened completely)
  • 4 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) from the rear area
  • 5 Red guide lines at a distance of approximately 8 in (0.2 m) from the rear area, vehicle width including outside mirrors
  • 6 Orange warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles are a medium distance away (between approximately 1.3 ft (0.4 m) and 2.0 ft (0.6 m))
  • 7 Yellow warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles at a distance between approx. 2.0 ft (0.6 m) and 3.3 ft (1.0 m)

If the distance to the obstacle is less than approx. 1.3 ft (0.4 m), the warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC will be red. If the entire system fails, the inner segments of the warning display are shown in red. If the system fails at the rear, the segment display changes in the following ways:

  • The rear segments are shown in red when backing up
  • The rear segments are hidden when driving forwards

If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated, the warning display fades out.

Wide-angle view

View of trailer (if trailer hitch is installed)

  • 1 Yellow guide line, locating aid
  • 2 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) to the ball head of the trailer hitch
  • 3 Ball head of the trailer hitch

Surround view camera

Function of the surround view camera

The surround view camera is a system that consists of four cameras. The cameras cover the immediate vehicle surroundings. The system assists you, for example, when parking or at exits with reduced visibility.

The surround view camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for you paying attention to the surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering and parking. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc. in the maneuvering area while maneuvering and parking in parking spaces. The system evaluates images from the following cameras:

  • Rear view camera
  • Front camera
  • Two side cameras in the outside mirrors

Views of the surround view camera

With the special equipment without rear sensors, only the front segments are shown in the left-hand image area, see example image "Top view, without rear sensors". Warnings are given only for the front area. You can select from different views:

Top view

Top view, with rear sensors

  • 1 Yellow path marking the course the tires will take at the current steering position (dynamic)
  • 2 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven surface) depending on the current steering angle (dynamic)
  • 3 Marking at a distance of approximately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) (the rear-end doors can still be opened completely)
  • 4 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) from the rear area
  • 5 Red guide lines at a distance of approximately 8 in (0.2 m) from the rear area, vehicle width including outside mirrors
  • 6 Red warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles at a distance of approximately 1.3 ft (0.4 m) or less

Top view, without rear sensors

  • 1 Yellow path marking the course the tires will take at the current steering position (dynamic)
  • 2 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven surface) depending on the current steering angle (dynamic)
  • 3 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) from the rear area
  • 4 Red guide lines at a distance of approximately 8 in (0.2 m) from the rear area, vehicle width including outside mirrors

When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational and no object is detected, the segments of the warning display are shown in gray.

If the entire system fails, the segments of the warning display are shown in red. If the system fails at the rear, the segment display changes in the following ways:

  • The rear segments are shown in red when backing up
  • The rear segments are hidden when driving forwards

If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated, the warning display fades out.

Guide lines

The guide lines in the multimedia system display show the distances to your vehicle. The distances only apply to road level. In trailer mode, the guide lines are shown at the level of the trailer hitch.

View of trailer (if trailer hitch is installed)

View of trailer (if trailer hitch is installed), with rear sensors

  • 1 Yellow guide line, locating aid
  • 2 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) to the ball head of the trailer hitch
  • 3 Ball head of the trailer hitch

Side view of the outside mirror cameras

Side view, with rear sensors

  • 1 Path indicating the route the vehicle will take with the steering wheel in its current position
  • 2 Yellow warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles at a distance of approximately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) or less
  • 3 Your vehicle from above
  • 4 Marker of the wheel contact points
  • 5 Guide line of external vehicle dimensions with outside mirrors folded out

If the distance to the object lessens, the color of warning display 2 changes.

System failure

If there is no operational readiness, the following display appears in the multimedia system:

System limits

The surround view camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situations:

  • If the front doors are open
  • If the outside mirrors are folded in
  • If there is heavy rain, snow or fog
  • If the ambient light conditions are poor, e.g. at night
  • If the area is illuminated with fluorescent lighting (the display may flicker)
  • If the temperature changes very quickly, for example if you drive out of the cold into a heated garage in the winter
  • If the ambient temperature is very high
  • If the camera lens is covered, dirty or fogged up.
  • If cameras, or vehicle components in which the cameras are installed, are damaged. In this event, have the cameras, their positions and their setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Do not use the surround view camera under such circumstances. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle. On vehicles with height-adjustable suspension, or if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load, leaving the standard height can result in inaccuracies in the guide lines and in the display of the generated images, depending on technical conditions. The field of vision and other functions of the camera system may be restricted due to additional attachments on the vehicle (e.g. loading tailgate).

The image from the surround view camera appears automatically in the multimedia system when the following conditions are fulfilled:

  • The vehicle is switched on.
  • The rear-end doors are opened.

In this way, the area behind the vehicle may be monitored. When the rear-end doors are closed, the image from the rear view camera is switched off for approximately ten seconds. See the notes on cleaning the surround view camera.

Selecting a view for the surround view camera

Requirements:

  • The Auto. Rear View Cam. is activated in the multimedia system .
  • Engage reverse gear.
  • Select the desired view in the multimedia system.

Activating/deactivating maneuvering assistance

Multimedia system:

  • Activate or deactivate Maneuvering Assistance.
  • If maneuvering assistance is switched on and rear sensors are present, the following functions are active:
    • Drive Away Assist
    • Rear Cross Traffic Alert
  • If the maneuvering assistant is activated and there are no rear sensors, Drive Away Assist is active but only works when driving forwards.

ATTENTION ASSIST

Function of ATTENTION ASSIST ATTENTION ASSIST: can assist you on long, monotonous journeys, e.g. on highways and trunk roads. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects indicators of fatigue or increased lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a break. ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannot always detect drowsiness or increased lapses in concentration in good time. The system is not a substitute for a well-rested and attentive driver. On long journeys, take regular and timely breaks that allow you to rest properly.

You can choose between two settings:

  • Standard: normal system sensitivity
  • Sensitive: higher system sensitivity.

The driver is warned earlier and the attention level detected by the system is adapted accordingly. If fatigue or increased lapses in concentration are detected, the Attention Assist: Take a Break!warning appears in the instrument cluster. You can acknowledge the message and take a break if necessary. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to detect increasing lapses in concentration, you will be warned again after a minimum of 15 minutes.

Instrument cluster with display (color)

You can have the following status information for ATTENTION ASSIST displayed in the Assistance menu of the on-board computer:

  • The journey length since the last break
  • The attention level determined by ATTENTION ASSIST:
    • The fuller the circle is, the higher the detected attention level is
    • The circle in the center of the display empties from the outside inwards as attentiveness decreases

Instrument cluster with display (black and white)

You can have the following status information for ATTENTION ASSIST displayed in the Assistance menu of the on-board computer:

  • The journey length since the last break
  • The attention level determined by ATTENTION ASSIST:
    • The fuller the bar is, the higher the detected attention level is
    • The bar empties as attentiveness decreases

If ATTENTION ASSIST cannot calculate the attention level and cannot issue a warning, the Attention Level message appears. If ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the symbol appears in the assistance graphic in the instrument cluster when the vehicle is running. ATTENTION ASSIST is activated automatically when the vehicle is restarted. The last selected sensitivity level remains stored.

System limits

ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 124 mph (200 km/h) speed range. The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is restricted, and warnings may be delayed or not occur at all, in the following situations:

  • The journey lasts less than approximately 30 minutes
  • The road condition is poor (uneven road surface or potholes)
  • The vehicle is subjected to a strong crosswind
  • You have a sporty driving style (high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration)
  • The time is set incorrectly
  • You change lanes and vary your speed frequently in active driving situations

The ATTENTION ASSIST drowsiness or alertness assessment is deleted and restarted when continuing the journey in the following situations:

  • You switch off the vehicle
  • You unfasten your seat belt and open the driver's door (e.g. to change drivers or take a break)

 

Setting ATTENTION ASSIST

Multimedia system:

Setting options

  • Select Standard, Sensitive or Off.

Blind Spot Assist

Function of Blind Spot Assist with exit warning: Blind Spot Assist uses two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors to monitor the area directly next to and at the side behind the vehicle.

  • USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter or use in any non-approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
WARNING Risk of accident despite Blind Spot Assist

Blind Spot Assist does not react to either stationary objects or vehicles approaching and overtaking you at a greatly different speed. Blind Spot Assist cannot warn drivers in these situations.

  • Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and maintain a safe distance at the side of the vehicle.
 

Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to detect some vehicles and is no substitute for attentive driving. Ensure that there is sufficient distance to the side from other road users and obstacles. If a vehicle is detected above speeds of approximately 7.5 mph (12 km/h) and this vehicle subsequently enters the detection range directly next to your vehicle, the warning lamp in the outside mirror lights up red.

  • When a trailer is connected, the radar sensor's field of vision may be impaired, thereby making limited monitoring possible. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and maintain a safe distance at the side of the vehicle.

If a vehicle is detected close to your vehicle in the lateral detection range and you switch on the turn signal indicator in the corresponding direction, a warning tone sounds. The red warning lamp in the outside mirror flashes. If the turn signal indicator remains switched on, all other detected vehicles are indicated only by the flashing of the red warning lamp. If you overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning is given.

Exit warning

The exit warning is an additional function of Blind Spot Assist and warns vehicle occupants when leaving the vehicle about any approaching vehicles.

WARNING Risk of accident despite exit warning

The exit warning neither reacts to stationary objects nor to persons or road users approaching you at a greatly differing speed. The exit warning cannot warn drivers in these situations.

  • Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation when opening the doors and make sure there is sufficient clearance.
 

 

Overview
When the vehicle is stationary, an object is detected from behind in the detection range. Red warning lamp in the outside mirror
When the vehicle is stationary, a door on the relevant side of the vehicle is opened. An object which is close to your vehicle is detected in the detection range Collision warning

The exit warning function is only an aid and is no substitute for the attentiveness of the vehicle occupants. Responsibility lies with the vehicle occupants when opening doors and leaving the vehicle.

System limits

Blind Spot Assist and the exit warning function may be limited in the following situations:

  • if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured
  • if there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain, snow or spray
  • if narrow vehicles are within the detection range, e.g. bicycles
  • if lanes are very wide
  • if lanes are very narrow
  • if vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane

Stationary or slow-moving objects are not displayed. Warnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders. Warnings may be interrupted when driving alongside long vehicles such as trucks for a prolonged time. Blind Spot Assist is not operational when reverse gear is engaged. The exit warning function may be limited in the following situations:

  • when the sensor is blocked by adjacent vehicles in narrow parking spaces
  • when people are approaching

Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist

Multimedia system:

  • Activate or deactivate Blind Spot Assist.

Drive Away Assist

Function of Drive Away Assist

  • Drive Away Assist is only available for vehicles with automatic transmission.
  • If no rear sensors are installed, Drive Away Assist only works in the direction of travel forwards.

Drive Away Assist can reduce the severity of an impact when pulling away. If an obstacle is detected in the direction of travel, the vehicle's speed is briefly reduced to approximately 1 mph (2 km/h). If a critical situation is detected, a symbol appears on the camera image of the multimedia system.

WARNING Risk of accident caused by limited detection performance of Drive Away Assist

Drive Away Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and traffic situations.

  • Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely on Drive Away Assist alone.
  • Be prepared to brake or swerve as necessary, provided the traffic situation permits and that it is safe to take evasive action.
 

Drive Away Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking space. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the path of your vehicle.

A risk of a collision may arise in the following situations, for example:

  • If the driver uses the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal.
  • If the wrong gear is selected.

The Drive Away Assist function is active under the following conditions:

  • If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated.
  • Every time the gear is changed to R or D when the vehicle is at a standstill.
  • If the detected obstacle is less than approximately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) away.
  • The maneuvering assistant function is activated in the audio system

System limits

Drive Away Assist is unavailable on inclines and when driving with a trailer. If no rear sensors are installed, Drive Away Assist only works in the direction of travel forwards.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert

Function of Rear Cross Traffic Alert

The system uses the radar sensors in the bumper. This way the area adjacent to the vehicle is continually monitored. If the radar sensors are obscured by vehicles or other objects, detection is not possible.

Vehicles with Blind Spot Assist: drivers can also be warned of any crossing traffic when backing out of a parking space. If a vehicle is detected, the warning lamp in the outside mirror on the corresponding side lights up red. If it detects a critical situation, a warning tone also sounds.

Vehicles with Blind Spot Assist and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: drivers can also be warned of any crossing traffic when backing out of a parking space. If a critical situation is detected, a warning symbol appears on the camera image of the audio system. If the driver does not respond to the warning, the vehicle's brakes can be applied automatically. In this case, a warning tone sounds.

The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function is active under the following conditions:

  • Blind Spot Assist is activated.
  • Reverse gear is engaged or the vehicle is backing up at walking pace.
  • The maneuvering assistance function is activated in the audio system.

The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function is unavailable when the vehicle is being driven with a trailer.

Lane Keeping Assist and Active Lane Keeping Assist

Function of Lane Keeping Assist

Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle with multifunction camera 1. It serves to protect you against unintentionally leaving your lane. You may also be warned by a noticeable vibration in the steering wheel or by a warning tone and by the status symbol flashing on the instrument cluster. The function is available in the speed range between approximately 40 mph (60 km/h) and 100 mph (160 km/h). The warning will be issued when the following conditions are met at the same time:

  • If Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings.
  • If a front wheel drives over lane markings.

You can activate and deactivate the Lane Keeping Assist warning. If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid and is not intended to keep the vehicle in the lane without the driver's cooperation. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, braking in good time and for staying in your lane.

System limits

The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

  • If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, if there are highly variable shade conditions or in rain, snow, fog or spray.
  • Glare from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections.
  • There is dirt on the windshield in the vicinity of the multifunction camera or the camera is fogged up, damaged or obscured.
  • No lane markings or several unclear lane markings are present for one lane, e.g. in a construction area.
  • If the lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up.
  • If the distance to the vehicle in front is too short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected.
  • The lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge.
  • The road is very narrow and winding.

Functions of Active Lane Keeping Assist

Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of multifunction camera 1. It serves to protect you against unintentionally leaving your lane. You may also be warned by a noticeable vibration in the steering wheel or by a warning tone and by the status symbol flashing in the instrument cluster. In addition, you may be guided back into your lane by a lanecorrecting brake application. A corresponding message appears in the instrument cluster. The warning is issued when the following conditions are met at the same time:

  • The driving system detects lane markings.
  • If a front wheel drives over lane markings.

A lane-correcting brake application occurs when the following conditions are met:

  • Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on both sides of the vehicle.
  • A front wheel drives over a solid lane marking.

A corresponding message appears in the instrument cluster. The brake application is available in the speed range between approximately 40 mph (60 km/h) and 100 mph (160 km/h). You can either deactivate the Active Lane Keeping Assist warning or switch off the system completely.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. The driving system is an aid for when you unintentionally leave or cross the lane and not a system for automatically keeping to the lane. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, braking in good time and for staying in your lane.

 

If a lane-correcting brake application from Active Lane Keeping Assist occurs, display 1 appears in the instrument cluster display.

System limits

No lane-correcting brake application from Active Lane Keeping Assist occurs in the following situations:

  • You clearly and actively steer, brake or accelerate.
  • You switch on the turn signal.
  • A driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP® or Active Brake Assist.
  • You have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration.
  • ESP® has been switched off.
  • When driving with a trailer, the electrical connection to the trailer has been correctly established.
  • If a loss of tire pressure or a malfunctioning tire has been detected and displayed.

The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

  • If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, if there are highly variable shade conditions or in rain, snow, fog or spray.
  • Glare from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections.
  • There is dirt on the windshield in the vicinity of the multifunction camera or the camera is fogged up, damaged or obscured.
  • No or several unclear lane markings are present for one lane, e.g. in a construction area.
  • If the lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up.
  • The distance to the vehicle in front is too short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected.
  • The lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge.
  • The roadway is very narrow and winding.

Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist

Multimedia system:

  • Select Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist.
  • Activate or deactivate the function.
  • Select Warning and activate or deactivate.

Work mode

ADR (working speed control)

When activated, ADR automatically increases the engine speed to a preset speed or a speed you have set.

  • After a cold start, the idle speed of the engine is increased automatically. If the preset working speed is lower than the increased idle speed, the working speed is only reached once the engine has completed the warm-up phase. It is only possible to activate ADR with the vehicle stationary and the parking brake applied. On vehicles with automatic transmission, the selector lever must be in position P.

Activating/deactivating ADR

  • To activate: press switch 1 while the vehicle is running. The message Working Speed Governor Active appears in the instrument cluster.
  • To deactivate: press switch 2 while the vehicle is running.

ADR will deactivate automatically in the following situations:

  • You release the parking brake.
  • You depress the brake pedal.
  • The vehicle moves.
  • The control unit detects a malfunction.

Adjusting ADR

  • Engage power take-off or activate ADR.
  • To increase: press switch 1.
  • To reduce: press switch 2.

Trailer operation

Notes on trailer operation

WARNING Risk of accident and injury if the tongue weight is exceeded

The carrier system may detach from the vehicle, thereby endangering other road users.

  • Always comply with the permissible tongue weight when using a carrier.
 

 

WARNING Risk of accident due to unsuitable ball neck

If you install an unsuitable ball neck, the trailer hitch and the rear axle may be overloaded. This can significantly impair the driving characteristics and the trailer may become loose. There is a risk of fatal injury.

  • Only install a ball neck that complies with the permissible dimensions and is designed for the requirements of trailer operation.
  • Do not modify the ball neck or the trailer hitch.
 

You can find specifications regarding the ball neck on the trailer's identification plate. You can find specifications regarding the trailer on the towing vehicle's identification plate and in the Technical Data.

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to incorrectly installed ball neck

If the ball neck is not correctly installed and secured, it may become loose during a journey and endanger other road users. There is a risk of fatal injuries.

  • Install and secure the ball neck as described in the ball neck manufacturer's installation instructions.
  • If a ball neck is installed, ensure sure that it is properly secured before every journey.
 

 

WARNING Risk of accident due to a ball neck that is not correctly installed or secured

If the ball neck is not correctly installed and secured, the trailer may come loose.

  • Install and secure the ball neck as described in the ball neck manufacturer's installation instructions.
  • If a ball neck is installed, ensure sure that it is properly secured before every journey.
 

Be sure to comply with the operating instructions of the manufacturer of the trailer coupling and the ball neck. Place your vehicle/trailer combination on surfaces that are as even as possible and secure it against rolling away. Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. When backing up the towing vehicle, ensure that there is no one between the vehicle and the trailer. If you do not couple the trailer to the towing vehicle correctly, the trailer may become detached. Once it has been coupled and is roadworthy, the trailer must be in a horizontal position behind the towing vehicle.

Note the following regarding the tongue weight:

  • Make full use of the maximum tongue weight, where possible.
  • Never fall below a legally prescribed minimum tongue weight; the tongue weight must always be positive.
  • Do not exceed or fall below the permissible tongue weights – this must be observed during loading and unloading of the trailer.

Do not exceed the following values:

  • Permitted braked or unbraked towing capacity The maximum permissible towing capacity for unbraked trailers is 1,653 lbs (750 kg).
  • Permissible rear axle load of the towing vehicle
  • Permissible gross weight of the towing vehicle
  • Permissible gross weight of the trailer
  • Permissible gross combination weight
  • Maximum permissible speed of the trailer

The relevant permitted values, which must not be exceeded, can be found in the following places:

  • In your vehicle documents
  • On the identification plate of the trailer hitch
  • On the trailer's identification plate
  • On the vehicle identification plate

If there are discrepancies between the values, the lowest one shall apply. Before driving off, ensure the following:

  • The tire pressure on the rear axle of the towing vehicle has been set for the maximum load.
  • The headlamps have been set correctly.

Values approved by the manufacturer can be found on the identification plates and in the section for the towing vehicle. Your vehicle will behave differently with a trailer than without:

  • The vehicle/trailer combination will be heavier.
  • The vehicle/trailer combination will be restricted in its acceleration and gradeability.
  • The vehicle/trailer combination will have an increased braking distance.
  • The vehicle/trailer combination will be more susceptible to crosswind gusts.
  • The vehicle/trailer combination will require more sensitive steering.
  • The vehicle/trailer combination will have a larger turning circle.

This may impair the vehicle's driving characteristics. When driving with a vehicle/trailer combination, always adapt your speed to the current road and weather conditions. Drive carefully. Keep a sufficient safe distance. Comply with the maximum permissible speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) or 62 mph (100 km/h), even in countries in which higher speeds are permitted for vehicle/trailer combinations.

Attach only an approved trailer hitch to your vehicle. Use only a ball neck that has been approved for your vehicle. Further information about availability and installation – including that of the trailer electrics – is available from a qualified specialist workshop. The trailer hitch is one of the most important vehicle parts for road safety. Comply with the instructions on operation, maintenance and servicing in the manufacturer's operating instructions. Do not attach any rented trailer hitches or any other detachable trailer hitches to the bumpers.

  • During trailer operation, remember that PARKTRONIC is available only to a limited extent, if at all.
  • The height of the ball head will change depending on the vehicle's load. In this case, use a trailer with a height-adjustable drawbar.

Driving instructions

The maximum permissible speed for vehicle/trailer combinations depends on the type of trailer. Before setting off, consult the trailer's vehicle documents to find out the maximum permissible speed. Your vehicle will behave differently with a trailer than without and will consume more fuel. On long and steep downhill gradients, you must select shift range 3, 2 or 1 in good time.

  • This also applies if cruise control is switched on.

You will therefore make use of the engine's braking effect and will not have to brake as often to control the speed. This will take some of the strain off the brake system and prevent the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If you need additional braking, depress the brake pedal intermittently rather than continuously. Observe the notes on ESP® trailer stabilization.

Driving tips

If the trailer starts to sway, remember the following points:

  • Do not accelerate under any circumstances.
  • Do not countersteer. 
  • If necessary, apply the brakes.
  • You can reduce the risk of the trailer swaying and rocking by retrofitting stabilizer bars or trailer stability programs. Further information is available from any authorized MercedesBenz Center.

When you are driving with a trailer, observe the following points:

  • Maintain a greater distance from the vehicle in front than when driving without a trailer.
  • Avoid braking abruptly. If possible, brake gently first of all so that the trailer closes up behind your vehicle. Then, increase the brake force rapidly.
  • The values given for start-off gradeability refer to sea level. When driving in mountainous areas, note that engine output – and thus start-off gradeability – will decrease with increasing elevation.

Coupling/uncoupling a trailer

Coupling a trailer

  • Shift the selector lever to position P.
  • Apply the vehicle's parking brake.
  • Close all the doors.
  • Position the trailer on a level surface behind the vehicle.
  • The height of the ball head will change depending on the vehicle's load. In this case, use a trailer with a height-adjustable drawbar.
  • Couple up the trailer.
  • Establish all electrical and other connections to the trailer.
  • Remove objects or devices that are preventing the trailer from rolling, e.g. chocks.
  • Release the trailer's parking brake.  
  • The vehicle subharness has a cable connection to the brake light indicator lamp.

Observe the maximum permissible trailer dimensions (width and length). Most US states and all Canadian provinces prescribe the following points, and you are urgently recommended to comply with these:

  • Safety chains between the towing vehicle and the trailer. The chains should be routed in a criss-cross pattern under the drawbar. They must be connected to the trailer hitch and not to the bumper or to the vehicle's axle. Leave sufficient slack in the chains. This also allows for sharp cornering.
  • A separate brake system is required for certain trailers.
  • A safety feature is required for braked trailers. Determine the specific requirements according to the relevant laws.

If the trailer becomes detached from the towing vehicle, the safety feature triggers the trailer brakes and can thus reduce the danger.

Uncoupling a trailer

WARNING Risk of being crushed and becoming trapped when uncoupling a trailer

When uncoupling a trailer with an engaged inertia-activated brake, your hand may become trapped between the vehicle and the trailer drawbar.

  • Do not uncouple trailers with an engaged overrun brake.
 

Do not uncouple a trailer with an inertia-activated brake in a state of overrun. Otherwise, the rebound of the inertia-activated brake can damage your vehicle.

  • Shift the selector lever to position P.
  • Apply the vehicle's parking brake.
  • Close all the doors.
  • Apply the trailer's parking brake.
  • Further secure the trailer against rolling away with a wheel chock or similar object.
  • Remove the trailer cables and safety chains.
  • Uncouple the trailer.

Information about towing a trailer

Operating a trailer is subject to many statutory regulations such as speed restrictions. Many states also require an auxiliary separate functional braking system when towing a weight that exceeds a certain limit. For your safety, it is recommended to use a separate functional braking system on any towed vehicle. Make sure that your trailer combination meets local regulations. This not only applies to your place of residence, but also to your destination. Information on this can be obtained from the police and local authorities.

Comply with the following when driving with a trailer:

  • Practice cornering, stopping and backing up in a traffic-free location. In this way, you will gain driving experience and become accustomed to the new handling characteristics.
  • R Before driving, check the following:
    • that the trailer tow hitch and ball coupling are secure
    • that the safety switch for braked trailers is functioning correctly
    • that the safety chains are secure and undamaged
    • that the electrical connections are secure
    • that the lights are functioning correctly
    • the wheels for damage and correct tire pressure 
  • Adjust the outside mirrors so that you have a clear view of the rear section of the trailer.
  • If the trailer is equipped with an individual braking system, check before each journey whether the brakes are functioning correctly.
  • If the trailer has electronically controlled brakes, pull away carefully with the vehicle/ trailer combination. Brake manually using the brake controller and check whether the brakes are functioning correctly.
  • Secure the load on the trailer in line with the requirements and rules for load-securing methods.
  • When driving with a trailer, check at regular intervals that the load is secure and that the lights and brakes are functioning correctly.
  • Bear in mind that the handling characteristics are more unstable when towing a trailer than when driving without a trailer. Avoid sudden steering movements.
  • The vehicle/trailer combination is heavier, accelerates more slowly, has a reduced climbing ability and an increased braking distance. It is more susceptible to side winds and requires careful steering.
  • If possible, do not brake suddenly, but rather moderately at first so that the trailer can activate its brakes. Then increase the pressure on the brake pedal.
  • If the automatic transmission shifts between gears on uphill or downhill gradients, restrict the shift range. Select shift range 4, 3, 2 or 1. A lower gear and reduced speed decrease the risk of engine damage.
  • When driving on a downhill gradient, shift to a lower gear to use the engine's braking effect. Avoid constant braking, as this could cause the vehicle brakes and possibly also the trailer brakes to overheat.
  • If the coolant temperature increases significantly when the air-conditioning system is switched on, switch the air-conditioning system off. Coolant heat can also be dissipated by switching the airflow and the temperature of the heater or air conditioning to the maximum level. Open the windows if necessary.
  • When overtaking, pay particular attention to the increased overtaking distance of your vehicle/trailer combination. Due to the length of your vehicle/trailer combination you will require a longer stretch of road before switching back to the original lane.

Permissible trailer loads and tongue weights

Weight information

WARNING Risk of accident due to an unbraked trailer with an excessive gross weight

If you pull an unbraked trailer with a gross trailer weight (GTW) of more than 1,653 lbs (750 kg), the vehicle's brake system may overheat. This increases the braking distance and may even cause the brake system to fail.

  • Always use a trailer with a separate braking system if you are pulling a gross trailer weight (GTW) of more than 1,653 lbs (750 kg).
 

In vehicles with a permissible gross vehicle weight of 11030 lbs (5003 kg), the permissible gross combination weight is less than the sum of the permissible gross vehicle weight plus the permissible trailer load. If either the vehicle or the trailer is fully laden, the permitted gross vehicle weight or the permitted trailer load values will be reduced accordingly. In this case, you may only partially load the trailer or the vehicle. The gross trailer weight (GTW) is calculated on the basis of the weight of the trailer plus the weight of its load and equipment. If the trailer is equipped with a separate braking system, then the maximum gross trailer weight is 5000 lbs (2268 kg) or 7500 lbs (3402 kg).

The maximum permissible drawbar tongue weight on the ball head is 500 lbs (227 kg) or 750 lbs (340 kg). However, the actual tongue weight must not exceed the value given on the trailer hitch or trailer identification plates. Where the values differ, the lowest shall always apply. The gross combined weight rating (GCWR) is calculated on the basis of the gross trailer weight plus the gross vehicle weight, including a driver's weight of approximately 150 lbs (68 kg). The maximum permissible gross combination weight is vehicle-specific and equipment-dependent. When driving with a trailer, you should not exceed the maximum permissible gross combination weight rating (GCWR). The permissible values, which must not be exceeded, can be found in your vehicle documents and on the identification plates of the trailer hitch, the trailer and the vehicle. The values approved by the manufacturer can also be found in the "Technical data" section. Where the values differ, the lowest shall always apply.

Loading the trailer

Use a tongue weight that is as close as possible to the maximum permissible tongue weight. Do not allow the weight to fall below the minimum permissible tongue weight. Otherwise, the trailer may become detached.

  • Distribute the load over the vehicle and the trailer so as not to exceed either the maximum permissible values for the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) and gross trailer weight (GTW), the gross combination weight rating (GCWR), or the maximum permissible gross axle weight rating (GAWR) and tongue weight (TWR) of your vehicle.
  • Add the drawbar tongue weight (TWR) on the ball head to the rear axle load. This will ensure that you do not exceed the permissible gross axle weight rating (GAWR).
  • Add the vehicle load to the drawbar tongue weight (TWR) on the ball head. This will ensure that you do not exceed the permissible gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR).

Checking vehicle and trailer weight

  • Make sure that the weights of the towing vehicle and the trailer comply with the maximum permissible values. Have the vehicle/trailer combination weighed on a calibrated weighing machine. The vehicle/trailer combination comprises the towing vehicle including driver, passengers and load as well as the laden trailer.
  • Check the maximum permissible gross axle weight rating of the front and rear axles (GAWR), the gross trailer weight (GTW), the gross combination weight rating (GCWR) and the drawbar tongue weight (TWR).

Trailer power supply

Incorrect cabling of the connector plug may interfere with other electronic systems in the vehicle. Mercedes-Benz therefore recommends that you have the cabling of the connector plug carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. You can connect accessories up to a maximum of 240 W to the permanent power supply. Do not charge a trailer battery using the power supply. Your vehicle may be equipped with a range of electrical equipment for trailer operation. Depending on your trailer, you may need an adapter for the electrical connection between the trailer and your vehicle. The trailer socket of your vehicle is equipped with a permanent power supply at the factory.

The permanent power supply is supplied via trailer socket pin 4. Note that the trailer's permanent power supply is not switched off when the vehicle's on-board electrical system voltage is low. This could completely discharge your vehicle's starter battery. Further information on the electrical equipment currently installed on your vehicle and on installing the trailer electrics can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Instrument Cluster

WARNING Risk of accident if the instrument display fails

If the instrument display has failed or is malfunctioning, function restrictions in systems relevant to safety cannot be detected. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired.

  • Drive on carefully.
  • Have the vehicle checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
 

If you are uncertain regarding the operational safety of your vehicle, park the vehicle safely as soon as possible. Inform a qualified specialist workshop.

Instrument cluster

Instrument cluster with display (color)

  • 1 Speedometer
  • 2 Display (color)
  • 3 Tachometer
  • 4 Coolant temperature display
  • 5 Fuel level and fuel filler flap location indicator

During normal driving, the coolant temperature display 4 is permitted to rise to the red marking.

Instrument cluster with display (black and white)

  • 1 Speedometer
  • 2 Indicator lamps display
  • 3 Tachometer
  • 4 Display (black and white)

When the red marking on tachometer 3 is reached (overspeed range), the fuel supply will be interrupted in order to protect the engine.

WARNING Risk of burns when opening the hood

If you open the hood in the event of an overheated engine or fire in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur:

  • You may come into contact with hot gases.
  • You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating fluids.
  • Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down.
  • In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service.
 

Overview of the buttons on the steering wheel

Variant 1

  • 1  Back button, left (on-board computer)
  • 2 Touch Control, left (on-board computer)
  • 3 Button group for cruise control or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
  • 4 Button group:
    •  Voice-operated control
    • Displays favorites (multimedia system)
    • VOL: using the  control, increases/ reduces the volume or switches off the sound
    •  Makes/accepts a call
    •  Rejects/ends a call
  • 5  Main menu button (multimedia system)
  • 6 Touch Control, right (multimedia system)
  • 7  Back button, right (multimedia system)

Variant 2

  • 1  Back button, left (on-board computer)
  • 2 Touch Control, left (on-board computer)
  • 3 Main menu button (on-board computer)
  • 4 Button group for cruise control or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
  • 5 Button group:
    •  Voice-operated control
    •  Displays favorites (multimedia system)
    • VOL: using the  control, increases/ reduces the volume or switches off the sound
    •  Makes/accepts a call
    •  Rejects/ends a call
  • 6 Main menu button (multimedia system)
  • 7 Touch Control, right (multimedia system)
  • 8  Back button, right (multimedia system)

Operating the on-board computer

WARNING Risk of distraction from information systems and communications equipment

If you operate information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

  • Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.
  • If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.
 

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer.

Operating the on-board computer (vehicles with steering wheel buttons)

  • The displays of the on-board computer appear on the instrument cluster display .

When the function is switched on, different signal tones will provide feedback while the on-board computer is being operated. These include a signal tone when the end of a list is reached or when a list is being scrolled through.

Variant 1

The on-board computer is operated via left-hand Touch Control 2 and back button on the left 1.

Variant 2 The on-board computer is operated using the following buttons:

  • Back button on the left 1
  • Left-hand Touch Control 2
  • Main menu button on the left 3

Overview of the instrument cluster display

Overview of the instrument cluster (color)

  • 1 Outside temperature
  • 2 Transmission position
  • 3 Time
  • 4 Alternating display

Instrument cluster display (black and white)

  • 1 Outside temperature
  • 2 Alternating display
  • 3 Time
  • 4 Transmission position

Adjusting the instrument lighting

  • Turn brightness control 1 upwards or downwards. The lighting of the instrument cluster and the controls in the vehicle interior will be adjusted.
  • In vehicles without brightness control 1, the instrument lighting can be adjusted via the onboard computer.

Menus and submenus

Calling up functions on the service menu

On-board computer:

The following functions are available on the service menu:

  • Announcements: message memory
  • DEF: display the DEF fill level
  • Tires:
    • Check the tire pressure with the tire pressure monitoring system
    • Restart the tire pressure monitoring system
  • ASSYST PLUS: call up the service due date
  • Engine Oil Level: measure the engine oil level

Calling up the assistant display

On-board computer:

Instrument cluster display (color)

The following displays are available on the assistant display:

  • Assistance graphic
  • Attention level  
  • Switch between the displays and confirm the selected display.

The following status displays are available on the assistant display:

  •  ATTENTION ASSIST switched off
  • Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC specified distance

Instrument cluster display (black and white)

The following status displays are available on the assistant display:

  • Lane markings solid and thick: Lane Keeping Assist on and ready to issue warnings
  • Lane markings solid and thin: Lane Keeping Assist on and not ready to issue warnings
  • Lane markings dotted: Lane Keeping Assist off
  •  ATTENTION ASSIST off
  •  Blind Spot Assist on and ready to issue warnings (lines of the radio waves solid)
  •  Blind Spot Assist on and not ready to issue warnings (lines of the radio waves broken)
  •  Blind Spot Assist off

Calling up displays on the trip menu

On-board computer:

The following displays are available on the trip menu:

  • Standard display
  • Range and current fuel consumption: With certain engines, a recuperation display is also shown. If only a small amount of fuel is left in the fuel tank, a vehicle being refueled will appear instead of the approximate range.
  • ECO display
  • Trip computer:
    • From Start
    • From Reset
  • Digital speedometer

Instrument cluster display (color)

Standard display (example)

  • 1 Trip distance
  • 2 Total distance

Instrument cluster display (black and white)

Standard display (example)

  • 1 Trip distance
  • 2 Total distance

Instrument cluster display (color)

Trip computer (example)

  • 1 Distance covered (from start/from reset)
  • 2 Driving time (from start/from reset)
  • 3 Average speed (from start/from reset)
  • 4 Average fuel consumption (from start/from reset)

Instrument cluster display (black and white)

Trip computer (example)

  • 1 Distance covered (from start/from reset)
  • 2 Driving time (from start/from reset)
  • 3 Average speed (from start/from reset)
  • 4 Average fuel consumption (from start/from reset)

Resetting values in the trip menu of the on-board computer

On-board computer:

You can reset the values of the following functions:

  • Trip Odometer:
    • Reset Trip Odometer
  • Trip computer:
    • From Start
    • From Reset
  • ECO display

Select the function for which the value is to be reset and confirm this selection.

  • Confirm the Reset Values? prompt with Yes.

Selecting a radio station

On-board computer:

  • 1 Frequency range
  • 2 Station
  • 3 Name of the track
  • 4 Artist's name

The following displays are available:

  • Frequency range
  • Station list

When you select a station in the station memory, the storage location appears beside the station name. When you select a saved station in the frequency range, a star appears beside the station name.

Operating media playback with the on-board computer

On-board computer:

  • 1 Media source
  • 2 Current track and track number
  • 3 Artist's name
  • 4 Name of the album

The following displays are available on the media menu:

  • Media source selection list
  • Current playback

Dialing a telephone number using the on-board computer

WARNING Risk of distraction from information systems and communications equipment

If you operate information and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

  • Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.
  • If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.
 

When using the phone, you must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving.

Requirements:

  • The mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system.

On-board computer:

Select one of the following options:

  • Previous calls
  • Phone book
  • Call status

Vehicles with MBUX multimedia system: the most recent telephone calls (dialed numbers, accepted and missed calls) are displayed on the Phone menu.

  • Select and confirm a telephone number. If only one telephone number has been saved for the entry: the telephone number is dialed.
  • If several telephone numbers have been saved for the entry: select and confirm a telephone number. The telephone number is dialed.

Instead of the selected telephone numbers, the following displays may appear:

  • Please Wait: The application is currently starting. If no Bluetooth® connection to the mobile phone is established, the menu for authorizing and connecting a mobile phone will be displayed in the multimedia system.
  • Updating Data: The call list is being updated.
  • Importing Contacts: The mobile phone's contacts, or a memory medium's contacts are being imported.

Accepting/rejecting a call

When you are called, the Incoming Call message appears on the display. 

  • Press  to accept the call or  to reject it.

Calling up settings on the on-board computer

On-board computer:

The following entries can be set in the Settings menu:

  • Light
    • Instr. Clust. Light. Setting
  • Vehicle
    • Rain Sensor Switching on/off
  • Heating Setting
  • Display and Operation
    • Switching permanent Display Additive (DEF) on and off

Mercedes Me

Mercedes me calls

Making a call via the overhead control panel

  • 1 Breakdown assistance call button 
  • 2 Cover for  button (SOS button)
  • 3  button (SOS button)

Making a breakdown assistance call

  • Press button 1.

Making an emergency call

  • Briefly press the cover on  button 2 to open it.
  • Press and hold  button 3 for at least one second.

An emergency call can still be triggered when a breakdown assistance call is active. This has priority over all other active calls.

Information about the Mercedes me call using the breakdown call button

A call has been made to the Mercedes-Benz customer center via the overhead control panel or the multimedia system using the breakdown call button.

You can reach the desired service via the voice dialog system:

  • Accident and Breakdown Management
  • Mercedes-Benz customer center for general information about the vehicle

You can find information on the following topics:

  • Activation of Mercedes me connect
  • Operating the vehicle
  • Nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
  • Other products and services from MercedesBenz

Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center using the multimedia system

Requirements:

  • Access to a mobile phone network is available.
  • The contract partner's mobile network coverage is available in the respective region.
  • The vehicle must be switched on so that vehicle data can be transferred automatically.

Multimedia system:

  • Call Mercedes me connect. With your consent, the multimedia system sends the required vehicle data. The data transfer is shown in the media display.

Then, you can select a service and be connected to a contact at the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center.

Calling the Mercedes-Benz customer center after automatic accident or breakdown detection

Requirements:

  • The vehicle has detected an accident or breakdown situation.
  • The vehicle is stationary.
  • The hazard warning light is switched on.

The vehicle can detect accident or breakdown situations under limited conditions. If an accident or breakdown is detected, the emergency guide shows safety instructions in the multimedia system display. After quitting the emergency guide display on the multimedia system, a prompt appears asking whether you wish to get support from the Mercedes-Benz customer center.

  • Select Call.
    • After your agreement, or if the Mercedes me connect service "Accident and Breakdown Management" is active, the vehicle data is transferred automatically
    • The Mercedes-Benz customer center will take your call and organize breakdown and accident assistance.

Arranging a service appointment via Mercedes me call

If you have activated the maintenance management service, relevant vehicle data is transferred automatically to the Mercedes-Benz customer center. You will then receive individual recommendations regarding the maintenance of your vehicle. You will receive an offer for the upcoming maintenance scopes from the service partner stored in Mercedes me. Regardless of whether you have consented to the maintenance management service, the multimedia system reminds you after a certain amount of time that a service is due. A prompt appears asking if you would like to make an appointment.

  • To arrange a service appointment: select Call. After your confirmation, the vehicle data is sent and the Mercedes-Benz customer center deals with your appointment. The information is then sent to your desired service outlet. They will contact you to confirm the appointment and, if necessary, to discuss the details.

Consenting to data transfer for a Mercedes me call

Requirements:

  • There is an active Mercedes me call via the multimedia system or the buttons in the overhead control panel.

Transferred data during a Mercedes me call

When you make a service call via Mercedes me, data is transmitted. This enables targeted advice and smooth service. The following requirements must be met for the data transfer:

  • The vehicle is switched on.
  • The necessary data transmission technology is supported by the mobile phone network provider.
  • A sufficient mobile phone connection quality is provided.

Multi-stage transmission depends on the following factors:

  • Reason for the initiation of the call
  • Available mobile radio transmission technology
  • Activated Mercedes me connect services
  • Selected service in the voice dialog system

Data transmission when Mercedes me connect services are not activated

If no Mercedes me connect services are activated and the data protection query has been confirmed, the following data will be transferred:

  • Vehicle identification number
  • Time of the call
  • Reason for the initiation of the call
  • Confirmation of the data protection prompt
  • Vehicle country code
  • Set language for the multimedia system
  • Call number of the communication platform installed in the vehicle

If a call is made for a service appointment via the service reminder, the following data is also transmitted:

  • Current mileage and maintenance data

If a call was made via the multimedia system after automatic accident or breakdown detection, the following data is also transmitted:

  • Current mileage and maintenance data
  • Current vehicle location

If the Accident and Breakdown Management selection has been made via the voice dialog system and no service has been activated, but the data protection query has been confirmed, the following data can be additionally requested from the vehicle by the Mercedes-Benz customer center:

  • Current vehicle location

If the data protection request has been declined, the following data will be transferred to enable targeted advice and a smooth service:

  • Reason for the initiation of the call
  • Rejection of the data protection prompt
  • Vehicle country code
  • Set language for the multimedia system
  • Call number of the communication platform installed in the vehicle

Data transmission when Mercedes me connect services are activated

Only in the second step, only for the respective activated services, further case-specific data is transmitted in order to enable an optimal service. An overview of the data transmitted can be found in the respective terms of use for Mercedes me connect services. These can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https:// me.secure.mercedes-benz.com

Data processing

The data transmitted as part of the call will be deleted from the transmitting systems once the call has been completed, provided they are not used for other activated Mercedes me connect services. The case-related data will be processed and stored in the Mercedes-Benz customer center and, if necessary for case processing, forwarded to the service partners commissioned by the MercedesBenz customer center. Please refer to the data protection information on the Mercedes me website at https://www.mercedes.me or in the recorded message immediately after the call to the Mercedes-Benz customer center has been set up.

Mercedes me connect

Information about Mercedes me connect

Mercedes me connect comprises a number of services. Using the multimedia system or the overhead control panel, you can use the following services, for example:

  • Accident and Breakdown Management (Breakdown call button or the situation-dependent display in the multimedia system)
  • Emergency Call System (automatic emergency call and SOS button)

Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management and the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center are available to you around the clock.

You will find the breakdown call button and the SOS button in the vehicle's overhead control panel. You can also call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center using the multimedia system. Please note that Mercedes me connect is a Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, call the national emergency services first using the standard national emergency service phone numbers. In emergencies, you can also use the Emergency Call System.

Information on Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management

The Accident and Breakdown Management can, amongst others, include the following functions:

  • Supplement to the Emergency Call System: If necessary, the contact person at the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center forwards the call to Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management. However, call forwarding is not possible in all countries.
  • Breakdown assistance on location by a technician and/or towing away of the vehicle to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. You may be charged for these services.
  • Supplement to the emergency guide after automatic accident or breakdown detection. In the event of a breakdown or accident, extended vehicle data is sent, enabling optimum support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center and the appointed service partner or breakdown mechanic.
  • If available: addition to the Mercedes me connect Telediagnostics service. With the Telediagnostics function, the service provider records certain wear and failure messages, insofar as these can be clearly interpreted and are available by monitoring diagnosable components. If your vehicle detects a breakdown or impending breakdown, you may be prompted via the multimedia system to contact the MercedesBenz Customer Center for further assistance. This prompt in the multimedia system only appears when the vehicle is stationary.

Data transferred during Mercedes me connect call services

The data transferred during the Mercedes me connect call depends on:

  • The reason for the initiation of the call
  • The service selected in the voice dialog system
  • The activated Mercedes me connect services

Mercedes me and apps

Information about Mercedes me

Requirements:

  • To use the services, registration in the Mercedes me Portal must have been carried out.
  • The terms of use for Mercedes me connect services have been agreed to.
  • The vehicle and user account are linked to one another.

When you log in with a user account to the Mercedes me Portal, then services and offers from Mercedes-Benz will be available to you.

Calling up a Mercedes me user account

Multimedia system:

Vehicle is linked to user account

  • Select Mercedes me. Information about the linked user account appears.

Your vehicle is not linked to the user account

  • Select Mercedes me.
  • Follow the instructions on the media display to link the user account with the vehicle.

Calling up Mercedes me services

Requirements:

  • The vehicle is connected with the user account.

Multimedia system:

  • Select Services. You will be shown the Mercedes me services that you have already purchased and those that you can also still purchase within the various categories. To activate or deactivate the services, log in to the Mercedes me Portal with your user account.

Removing the link between the user account and the vehicle

Requirements:

  • The user profile of the user account that was first linked to the vehicle is selected.
  • The profile is synchronized.
  • A PIN has been saved.

Multimedia system:

  • Select Delete Vehicle Assignment.
  • Enter the PIN of the linked user account.

MBUC Multimedia System

Overview and operation

Overview of the MBUX multimedia system

  • 1 Touch Control and multimedia system control panel
  • 2 Media display with touch functionality. Opens/closes the center console stowage compartment above the display
  • 3 Operating strip, calls up applications

In the center console stowage compartment you can find the following ports and interfaces:

  • Two USB ports or one USB port The USB port with the  symbol facilitates the connection of the mobile phone with the multimedia system using a suitable cable. This will enable you to use the functions of the mobile phone via Apple CarPlay® or Android Auto.
  • Stowage space with charging interface and NFC interface (if available)

Notes on the media display

Observe the notes on caring for the interior.

Automatic temperature-controlled switch-off feature: if the temperature is too high, the brightness is initially reduced automatically. The media display may then switch off completely for a while.

Anti-theft protection

This device is equipped with technical provisions to protect it against theft. Further information on protection against theft can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Home screen overview

  • 1 On the home screen: displays the first three applications In other displays: calls up the home screen
  • 2 Displays, e.g. network display, battery status of the mobile phone connected, signal strength of the mobile phone network, time  Quickly switches driving systems on or off
  • 3 Number of applications and currently selected display area
  • 4 Calls up FAVORITES
  • 5 Quick-access (in the example: shows calls lists and searches for a contact)
  • 6 Name of the application, beneath the current selection or current display
  • 7 Calls up an application using the symbol

Touch Control

Operating Touch Control (multimedia system)

  • 1  button Calls up the home screen
  • 2 Touch Control
  • 3 Back button Returns to the previous display
  • 4 Control panel for multimedia system
    • Press the  rocker switch down: shows favorites
    • Turn the controller: adjusts the volume
    • Press the controller: switches sound off
    • Press the  rocker switch up: makes or accepts a call
    • Press the  rocker switch down: ends or declines a call
  • To call up the home screen: press button 1. or
  • Press and hold button 3.
  • To open a menu or list: press Touch Control 2.
  • To close a menu or list: press button 3.
  • To select a menu item: swipe up, down, left or right on Touch Control 2.
  • Press Touch Control 2.

Setting the sensitivity for the Touch Control

Multimedia system:

  • Select Fast, Medium or Slow.

Switching acoustic operating feedback for the Touch Control on or off

Multimedia system:

The function is supported by selection in a list.

  • Select Acoustic Operating Feedback.
  • Set Normal, Loud or Off. If the function is activated you will hear a clicking sound when scrolling in a list. When the beginning or end of the list is reached you will hear another clicking sound.

Touchscreen

Operating the touchscreen

Requirements:

  • For the map functions: an iPhone® is connected with the multimedia system via Apple CarPlay® or a mobile phone is connected with the multimedia system via Android Auto.
  • A navigation application is available on the mobile phone.

Tapping

  • To select a menu item or entry: tap on a symbol or an entry.
  • To increase the map scale: tap twice quickly with one finger.
  • To reduce the map scale: tap with two fingers.
  • To enter characters with the keyboard: tap on a button.

Single-finger swipe

  • To navigate in menus: swipe up, down, left or right.

Touching, holding and moving

  • To set the volume on a scale: touch the touchscreen and move the finger to the left or right.

Touching and holding

  • To call up a global menu in the applications: touch the touchscreen and hold until the OPTIONS menu appears.

Setting acoustic operation feedback for the touchscreen

Multimedia system:

The function is supported by the selection in a list.

  • Select Acoustic Operating Feedback.
  • Set Normal, Loud or Off. If the function is activated you will hear a clicking sound when scrolling in a list. When the beginning or end of the list is reached you will hear another clicking sound.

Applications

Calling up applications

  • Using buttons on the operating strip

  • 1  button Calls up the telephone
  • 2 Volume rocker switch Adjusts the volume
  • 3 button Press briefly: returns to the previous display Press and hold: calls up the home screen
  • 4 button Press briefly: switches sound off Press and hold: activates or deactivates the multimedia system
  • 5 Quick-access button for media Calls up the control menu of the last active media source
  • 6 Vehicle button Sets vehicle functions
  • 7  button Pressing repeatedly calls up the desired audio source
  • 8  button. Calls up navigation. Requirement: the mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system via the USB port  using a suitable cable. Via Apple CarPlay® or Android Auto the navigation application of the mobile phone can be used.
  • To access stations and music tracks quickly: press button 5. The control menu appears for the audio source that was last selected.
  • Swipe to the left or right. Radio: the previous or next station is set. Media source: the previous or the next music track is selected.
  • To hide the control menu: press button 5.

Using the home screen

The home screen is shown in the media display when you start the vehicle.

  • Select the application by swiping and tapping. or
  • In any display: press the  button on the Touch Control. or
  • Tap on the  symbol on the touchscreen. The applications are displayed.
  • Select the application by swiping and tapping.

Changing the arrangement of applications on the home screen

  • Call up the home screen
  • Touch and hold an application on the touchscreen until symbols appear.
  • Tap on  or  and move the application in the menu.
  • Tap on .

Switching sound on or off

On the multifunction steering wheel

  • To mute: press volume control 1. The  symbol appears in the status line of the multimedia system display. You will also hear traffic announcements and navigation announcements even when the sound is muted.
  • To switch on: turn volume control 1 or change the media source.

On the multimedia system

  • To switch off: briefly press button 1. The 8 symbol appears in the status line of the multimedia system display. You will also hear traffic announcements and navigation announcements even when the sound is muted.
  • To switch on: briefly press button 1 or change the media source.

Adjusting the volume

On the multifunction steering wheel

  • Turn volume control 1. The volume of the current radio or media source is set. The volume of other audio sources can be adjusted separately.

Adjust the volume in the following situations:

  • During a traffic announcement
  • During a navigation announcement: The volume of the current media source changes in accordance with the volume of the navigation announcement. The function is possible in the following cases:
    • An iPhone® is connected via Apple CarPlay™ or a mobile phone is connected via Android Auto with the multimedia system.
    • A navigation application is available on the mobile phone.
  • During a telephone call

On the multimedia system

  • To increase/reduce the volume in steps: briefly press rocker switch 1 up or down.
  • To increase/reduce the volume continuously: press rocker switch 1 up or down until the desired volume is set.

Favorites

Overview of favorites

Favorites offer you quick access to frequently used applications. It is possible to create 20 favorites in total. You can select favorites from categories or you add favorites directly from an application.

Calling up favorites

  • Tap . The home screen is shown.
  • Swipe up until FAVORITES is shown.

Adding favorites

Selecting favorites from categories

  • Tap on  in the media display. The home screen is shown.
  • Swipe up until FAVORITES is shown.
  • Select  Create Favorite. The categories are displayed.
  • Select the category. The favorites are displayed.
  • Select a favorite. The favorite is stored at the next available position.

All positions are occupied

  • Press the OK button to confirm the message shown. A list shows all the favorites.
  • Select a favorites which should be overwritten.

Saving a contact as a global favorite

  • Select a contact. The details are displayed.
  • Press on a phone number until the OPTIONS menu is shown.
  • Select Save as Favorite. The contact is added as a favorites. Add more favorites from an application: 
    • Store a radio station.
    • Add a media source.

Saving a radio station as a global favorites

  • Select a radio station.
  • Press on the radio station until the OPTIONS menu is shown.
  • Select Save as Favorite. The radio station is added as a favorite.

Renaming favorites

  • Tap on  in the media display. The home screen is shown.
  • Swipe up until FAVORITES is shown.
  • Press on a favorite until the OPTIONS menu is shown.
  • Select Rename.
  • Enter the name.
  • Select OK.

Moving favorites

Moving favorites in the favorites menu

  • Tap on  in the media display. The home screen is shown.
  • Swipe up until FAVORITES is shown. 
  • Press on a favorite until the OPTIONS menu is shown.
  • Select Move.
  • Move the favorite to the new position.
  • Tap on .

Deleting favorites

  • Tap on  in the media display. The home screen is shown.
  • Swipe up until FAVORITES is shown.
  • Press on a favorite until the OPTIONS menu is shown.
  • Select Delete.
  • Select Yes.

Entering characters

Using the character input function

WARNING Risk of distraction from information systems and communications equipment

If you operate information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

  • Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.
  • If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.
 

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. Character entry can be carried out with these control elements:

  • Touch Control
  • Touchscreen (media display)

Character entry takes place by cursor control when using the Touch Control. Character input can be started with a control element and resumed with another.

  • When the keyboard is shown, enter the characters on the control element by swiping and pressing or by tapping (touchscreen). or
  • Write the character on the touchscreen.

Examples of character entry:

  • Renaming a favorite
  • Entering a telephone number

Entering characters on the touchscreen

Using the keyboard

  • 1 Input line
  • 2 Shows suggestions during entry (if available)
  • 3 Deletes an entry
  • 4 Deletes Pressing briefly deletes the last character entered. Pressing and holding deletes the entry.
  • 5 Accepts an entry
  • 6 Enters a space
  • 7 Changes the keyboard language
  • 8 Switches to digits and special characters (level 2) ABC switches to letters (level 1)
  • 9 Pressing briefly switches between upper-case and lower-case letters. Pressing and holding switches to upper-case letters permanently. In level 2 with #+= switches to additional special characters (level 3)

Instructions

  • To call up the character entry: to rename a favorite, for example. The keyboard is shown.
  • Press briefly on a character key. The character is entered in input line 1. Suggestions are shown in 2.
  • To select a suggestion: select one of the entries.
  • If available, display additional suggestions with .
  • Resume character input.
  • To enter an alternative character: press and hold a character.
  • Select the character.
  • To end character input: press the  button.

Setting the keyboard for character entry

Multimedia system:

  • Confirm Select Keyboards.
  • Select the keyboard language in the list.

System settings

Display

Configuring display settings

Multimedia system:

Display Display brightness

  • Select Display Brightness.
  • Select a brightness value.

Switching the display off/on

  • Off: select Display Off.
  • On: press a button, , for example.

Time and date

Setting the time and date automatically

Multimedia system:

  • Deactivate Manual Time Adjustment. The time and date are set automatically for the selected time zone.
  • The correct time is required for the following functions:
    • Route guidance with time-dependent traffic guidance.
    • Calculation of expected time of arrival.

Setting the time zone

Multimedia system:

Setting the time zone manually

  • Select Time Zone

The list of countries is displayed.

  • If there are several time zones available in a country, these will be shown after the country is selected.
  • Select a country and, if required, a time zone. The time zone set is displayed after Time Zone

Setting the time zone automatically

  • Activate Automatic Time Zone.

Setting summer time

Multimedia system:

Automatically

  • Switch Automatic summer time on or off.

Manually

  • Switch off Automatic summer time.
  • Select Summer time.
  • The Automatic summer time and Summer time options are not available in all countries.

Setting the time and date format

Multimedia system:

Setting the time and date manually

Requirements:

  • The Manual Time Adjustment function is switched on.
  • For setting the date manually: no GPS is installed in the vehicle.

Multimedia system:

Setting the time (without time zone)

  • Select Set Time.
  • Set a time.

Setting the time (with time zone)

  • Select Set Time.

If a time zone is set the time is set automatically using the time zone. The time can be adjusted by a maximum of plus or minus 60 minutes.

  • Adjust the time using the slide control.

Setting the date

  • Select Set Date.
  • Set the date.

Bluetooth®

Information about Bluetooth®

Bluetooth® technology is a standard for shortrange wireless data transfer up to approximately 32.8 ft (10 m). You can use Bluetooth® to connect your mobile phone to the multimedia system and use the following functions, for example:

  • Hands-free system with access to the following options: - Call lists 
  • Internet connection
  • Transferring business cards (vCards) into the vehicle

Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth Special Interest Group (SIG) Inc.

Activating/deactivating Bluetooth®

Multimedia system:

  • Activate or deactivate Bluetooth.

Wi-Fi

Wi-Fi connection overview

The Wi-Fi network in your vehicle serves only for the use of Apple® CarPlay. You can only connect with the network using this application. Further information about Apple® CarPlay.

Activating/deactivating Wi-Fi

Multimedia system:

  • Activate or deactivate Wi-Fi. If Wi-Fi is deactivated, communication via Wi-Fi to all devices is interrupted.

Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot

Requirements:

  • To set up the Wi-Fi connection of the multimedia system with external hotspots: there is no communication module installed.
  • The device to be connected supports at least one of the types of connection described.

Multimedia system:

Activating/deactivating Wi-Fi

  • Select Wi-Fi.

Connecting the multimedia system to an external hotspot via Wi-Fi

The connection procedure may differ depending on the device. Follow the instructions that are shown in the display. Further information can be found in the manufacturer's operating instructions.

  • Select Internet Settings.
  • Select Connect via Wi-Fi.
  • Select Add Hotspot.
  • Select the type of connection to be established on the multimedia system and on the device to be connected.

Connecting using a security key

  • Select the options  of the desired Wi-Fi network.
  • Select Connect Using Security Key.
  • Have the security key displayed on the device to be connected (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
  • Enter this security key on the multimedia system.
  • Confirm the entry with .

Activating automatic connection

  • Select Connect via Wi-Fi.
  • Select the options  of the desired Wi-Fi network.
  • Activate Permanent Internet Connection.

Connecting with a known Wi-Fi network

  • Select Connect via Wi-Fi.
  • Select a Wi-Fi network. The connection is established again.

Configuring the multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hotspot for external devices

The type of connection established depends on the device to be connected. The function must be supported by the multimedia system and by the device to be connected.

  • Select Vehicle Hotspot.
  • Select Connect Device to Vehicle Hotspot.
  • Select the type of connection to be established on the multimedia system and on the device to be connected.

Connecting using a security key

  • Select Connect Device to Vehicle Hotspot. A security key is displayed.
  • Select the vehicle from the device to be connected. The vehicle is displayed with the DIRECT-MBUX XXXXX network name.
  • Enter the security key which is shown in the media display on the device to be connected.
  • Confirm the entry.

Connecting using NFC

  • Select Connect via NFC.
  • Activate NFC on the mobile device (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
  • Hold the device to be connected at the vehicle's NFC interface.
  • Select Finished. The mobile device is now connected to the multimedia system hotspot via NFC.

Generating a new security key

  • Select Vehicle Hotspot.
  • Select Generate Security Key.
  • Select New security key. A connection will be established with the newly created security key.
  • To save a security key: select Save. When a new security key is saved, all existing Wi-Fi connections are then disconnected. If the Wi-Fi connections are being re-established, the new security key must be entered.

System language

Notes on the system language: This function allows you to determine the language for the menu displays. The selected language affects the characters available for entry.

Setting the system language

Multimedia system:

  • Set the language.

Setting the distance unit

Multimedia system:

  • Select km or mi.
  • For a display of the units of measurement in the display section of the instrument display, switch on Additional Speedometer.

Resetting the multimedia system (reset function)

WARNING Risk of accidents due to failure of multimedia display functions

While the multimedia system is being reset, its functions such as the rear view camera are not available.

  • Only reset the multimedia system when the vehicle is stationary.
 

Multimedia system:

Personal data is deleted, for example:

  • Station presets
  • Connected mobile phones

A query appears again asking if the system should really be reset.

  • Select Yes.

If PIN protection is activated, a prompt appears asking if you also wish to restore this to the factory settings during a reset.

  • Variant 1: select Yes.
  • Enter the current PIN. The PIN is reset.
  • Variant 2: select No. The current PIN stays the same after resetting.

A prompt appears again asking whether you really wish to reset.

  • Select Yes. The multimedia system is reset to the factory settings.

Resetting using a button

  • Press both the  and  buttons at the same time until the multimedia system restarts (at least 15 seconds). The multimedia system is restarted. No data is deleted during this process.

Vehicle information

Displaying vehicle data

Multimedia system:

  • Select Vehicle. The vehicle data is displayed.

Displaying engine data

Multimedia system:

  • Select Engine. The engine data is displayed.
  • The values for engine output and engine torque may deviate from the nominal values. Items that can influence this are, for example:
    • Engine speed
    • Sea level
    • Fuel grade
    • Outside temperature

Calling up the fuel consumption indicator

Multimedia system:

  • Select Consumption. A display with current and average consumption figures is displayed.

Telephone

Telephone menu overview

  • 1 Battery status of the connected mobile phone
  • 2 Bluetooth® device name of the connected mobile phone
  • 3 Signal strength of the mobile phone network
  • 4 Options
  • 5 Device manager
  • 6 Numerical pad
  • 7 Call list
  • 8 Contact search

Bluetooth® profile of the mobile phone: with the PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) profile, contacts are shown automatically in the multimedia system.

Notes on telephony

WARNING Risk of distraction from operating integrated communication equipment while the vehicle is in motion

If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

  • Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.
  • If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary
 

 

WARNING Risk of accident from operating mobile communication equipment while the vehicle is in motion

Mobile communication devices distract the driver from the traffic situation. This can also cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

  • As a driver, only operate mobile communication devices when the vehicle is stationary.
  • As a vehicle occupant, use mobile communication devices only in the designated area, e.g. in the rear passenger compartment.
 

 

Information on telephony

The following situations can lead to the call being disconnected while the vehicle is in motion: 

  • there is insufficient network coverage in the area
  • you move from one transmission/reception station to another and no communication channels are free
  • the SIM card used is not compatible with the network available
  • a mobile phone with "Twincard" is logged into the network with the second SIM card at the same time

The multimedia system supports calls in HD Voice® for improved speech quality. A requirement for this is that the mobile phone and the mobile phone network provider of the person you are calling support HD Voice®. Depending on the quality of the connection, the voice quality may fluctuate.

Connecting a mobile phone

Requirements:

  • Bluetooth® is activated on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
  • Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia system.

Multimedia system:

Searching for a mobile phone

  • Select .
  • Select Connect New Device.

Connecting a mobile phone (authorization using Secure Simple Pairing)

  • Select a mobile phone.
  • A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone.
  • If the codes match: confirm the code on the mobile phone.

Replacing a mobile phone

Multimedia system:

  • Select .
  • No authorized mobile phone available: select Connect New Device.
  • Select a mobile phone.
  • Newly authorized mobile phone: confirm the number code on the mobile phone.

Switching mobile phones

  • Select an authorized mobile phone. The selected mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system.
  • For iPhone®: you can switch between the Apple CarPlay® and Bluetooth® equipment connection variants.

De-authorizing a mobile phone

Multimedia system:

  • Select .
  • Select  in the line of the mobile phone.
  • Select Deauthorize.

Information on Near Field Communication (NFC):

NFC enables short-range wireless data transfer or (re)connection of a mobile phone with the multimedia system. Further information can be found at: https:// www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/

Using the mobile phone with Near Field Communication (NFC) Requirements:

  • NFC is activated on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions)
  • The mobile phone's screen is switched on and unlocked (see the manufacturer's operating instructions)

Connecting a mobile phone

  • Open the flap of stowage compartment 1 above the media display.
  • Hold the NFC interface of the mobile phone (see manufacturer's operating instructions) on mat 2 or place the mobile phone on it .
  • Follow the additional prompts on the media system display to connect the mobile phone

Replacing a mobile phone

  • Hold the NFC interface of the mobile phone (see manufacturer's operating instructions) on mat 2 or place the mobile phone on it .
  • Follow the additional prompts on the media system display to replace the mobile phone.
  • If required, confirm the prompts on your mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).

If you want to charge a mobile phone without connecting it to the multimedia system, lay it on the mat without beforehand unblocking the screen.

Setting the reception and transmission volume

Requirements:

  • A mobile phone is connected

Multimedia system:

This function ensures optimal language quality.

  • Select .
  • Select  in the line of the mobile phone.
  • Select Reception Volume and Transmission Volume.
  • Set the volume.

Starting/stopping mobile phone voice recognition

Requirements:

  • The mobile phone in the foreground is connected with the multimedia system

Starting mobile phone voice recognition

  • Press and hold the  button on the multifunction steering wheel for more than one second. You can use mobile phone voice recognition.

Stopping mobile phone voice recognition

  • Briefly press the  button on the multifunction steering wheel.

Calls

Telephone operation

Multimedia system:

Making a call by entering the numbers

  • Select .
  • Enter a number.
  • Select . The call is made.

Accepting a call

  • Select  Accept.

Rejecting a call

  • Select  Reject.

Ending a call

  • Select .

Activating functions during a call

The following functions are available during a call:

  •  End Call
  •  Microphone Off
  •  Numeric Keypad (show to send DTMF tones)
  •  Transfer to Phone (an active call in handsfree mode is transferred over to the telephone)
  • Select a function.

Putting an active call on hold

  • Tap on the contact or the call. The call will be put on hold.
  • The call on hold can be ended any time or reactivated by tapping again.

Conducting calls with several participants

Requirements:

  • There is an active call (/ page 196).
  • Another call is being made.

Switching between calls

  • Select the contact. The selected call is active. The other call is on hold.

Activating a call on hold

  • Select the contact of the call on hold.

Ending an active call

  • Select  End Call.

Accepting/rejecting a waiting call

Requirements:

  • There is an active call

If you receive a call while already in a call, a message is displayed. Depending on the mobile phone and mobile phone network provider you will hear a call-waiting sound.

  • Select  Accept. The incoming call is active. The previous call is on hold.
  • Select  Reject.

Contacts

Information about the contacts menu:

The contacts menu contains all contacts from existing data sources, e.g. mobile phone. You can store up to 3000 contacts. From the contacts menu you can use telephone functions such as call a contact, for example. If a mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system and automatic calling up is activated, the mobile phone's contacts are displayed in the address book.

Downloading mobile phone contacts

Multimedia system:

  • Select Contacts & Recent Calls.

Automatically

  • Activate Synchronize Contacts Automatically .

Manually

  • Deactivate  Synchronize Contacts Automatically.
  • Select Synchronize Contacts.

Calling up contacts

Multimedia system:

The following options can be used to search for contacts: 

  • Searching by initials
  • Searching by name
  • Searching by phone number
  • Enter characters into the search field.
  • Select the contact. Details for the contact are shown.

Editing the format of a contact's name

Multimedia system:

  • Select Name Format.

The following options are available:

  • Last Name, First Name
  • Last Name First Name
  • First Name Last Name

Calling a contact

Multimedia system:

  • Select  Search for Contacts.
  • Enter characters into the search field.
  • Select the contact.
  • Select the telephone number. The number is dialed.

Deleting contacts

Requirements:

  • The Synchronize Contacts Automatically function is switched off.

Multimedia system:

Deleting all contacts

  • Select .
  • Select Delete Contacts.

Call list

Overview of the call list

Depending on whether your mobile phone supports the PBAP Bluetooth® profile or not, this can have different effects on the presentation and functions of the call list. If the PBAP Bluetooth® profile is supported, the effects are as follows:

  • The call lists from the mobile phone are displayed in the multimedia system.
  • When connecting the mobile phone, you may have to confirm the connection for the PBAP Bluetooth® profile.

If the PBAP Bluetooth® profile is not supported, the effects are as follows:

  • The multimedia system generates a call list independently as soon as calls are made in the vehicle.
  • The call list is not synchronized with the call lists in the mobile phone.

Making a call from the call list

Multimedia system:

  • Select  Recent Calls.
  • Select an entry. The call is made.

Calling up additional options in the call list

Multimedia system:

  • Select  Recent Calls.
  • For previously stored contacts: select  in the line of an entry. The search results are displayed.

Apple CarPlay®

Overview of Apple CarPlay®

WARNING Risk of distraction from information systems and communications equipment

If you operate information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

  • Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.
  • If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.
 

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. iPhone® functions can be used via the multimedia system using Apple CarPlay®. They are operated using the touchscreen, Touch Control or Siri® voice control. You can activate voice control by pressing and holding the  button on the multifunction steering wheel.

Only one mobile phone at a time can be connected via Apple CarPlay ® to the multimedia system. The availability of Apple CarPlay® may vary according to the country. The service provider is responsible for this application and the services and content connected to it. Apple CarPlay® is a registered trademark of Apple Inc.

Information on Apple CarPlay®

When Apple CarPlay® is being used, the iPod® media source is not available for the respective iPhone®.

Connecting an iPhone® via Apple CarPlay® (with cable)

Requirements:

  • The multimedia system is equipped with the function. 
  • The current version of your device's operating system is being used (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
  • The full range of functions for Apple CarPlay® is only available with an Internet connection.

Accepting/rejecting the data protection provisions

A message with the data protection provisions appears. 

  • Select Accept & Start.

Exiting Apple CarPlay®

  • Press the  button.

Calling up Apple CarPlay ® sound settings

Multimedia system:

  • Select sound settings.

Ending Apple CarPlay ®

  • To end the connection of Apple CarPlay® (cable): disconnect the connection via the connecting cable between the iPhone® and multimedia system.
  • To end the connection of Apple CarPlay® (wireless): de-authorize the iPhone® in the  device list under the application.

Android Auto

Android Auto overview

WARNING Risk of distraction from information systems and communications equipment

If you operate information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

  • Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.
  • If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.
 

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. Mobile phone functions can be used with Android Auto using the Android operating system on the multimedia system. It is operated using the touchscreen or voice control. You can activate the voice control by pressing and holding the  button on the multifunction steering wheel. Only one mobile phone at a time can be connected via Android Auto to the multimedia system.

The availability of Android Auto and Android Auto apps may vary according to the country. The service provider is responsible for this application and the services and content connected to it.

Information on Android Auto

While using Android Auto, various functions of the multimedia system, for example the media source Bluetooth® audio, are not available.

Connecting a mobile phone via Android Auto (wired)

Requirements:

  • The multimedia system is equipped with the function.
  • The current version of your device's operating system is being used (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
  • There is an Internet connection for the full range of functions for Android Auto.

Multimedia system:

  • Connect the mobile phone to the USB port on the multimedia system using a suitable cable (/ page 202).
  • If no other device is connected with the system via Bluetooth® or Apple CarPlay® (wireless): confirm the data protection provisions.
  • If another device is connected via Bluetooth®, Android Auto (wireless) or Apple CarPlay® (wireless) with the system: tap on the Tap here to start Android Auto for: message. or
  • Select the device in the  device list under the application. All existing device connections via USB, Bluetooth®, Android Auto (wireless) or Apple CarPlay® (wireless) are disconnected. The device newly connected via cable is active.
  • If an Android Auto application is active, you can call up this active application using the  or  application buttons.

Accepting/rejecting the data protection provisions

For the initial start of the application: a message with the data protection provisions appears.

  • Select Accept & Start.

Returning to the main menu

  • Press the  button.
  • If you use both the wired as well as wireless Android Auto function, observe that a wireless connection may be established when the device is next connected using Bluetooth® or after starting the multimedia system. If Android Auto was not displayed in the foreground before disconnecting, the application starts in the background when reconnected. You can call up Android Auto in the main menu.

Calling up the Android Auto sound settings

Multimedia system:

  • Select sound settings.

Ending Android Auto

  • Disconnect the connecting cable between the mobile phone and multimedia system. Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting the connecting cable only when the vehicle is stationary.

Transferred vehicle data with Android Auto and Apple CarPlay ®

Overview of transferred vehicle data:

When using Android Auto or Apple CarPlay®, certain vehicle data is transferred to the mobile phone. This enables you to get the best out of selected mobile phone services. Vehicle data is not directly accessible. The following system information is transmitted:

  • Software release of the multimedia system
  • System ID (anonymized)

The transfer of this data is used to optimize communication between the vehicle and the mobile phone. To do this, and to assign several vehicles to the mobile phone, a vehicle ID is randomly generated. This has no connection to the vehicle identification number (VIN) and is deleted when the multimedia system is reset.

The following vehicle data is transmitted:

  • The gear engaged
  • The distinction between parked, standstill, rolling and driving
  • The day/night mode of the instrument cluster

The transfer of this data is used to alter how content is displayed to correspond to the driving situation. The following position data is transmitted:

  • Coordinates
  • Speed
  • Compass direction
  • Acceleration direction

This data is only transferred while the navigation system is active, in order to improve it (e.g. so it can continue functioning when in a tunnel).

Media

Information about media mode

Information about supported formats and data storage media

WARNING Risk of distraction when handling data storage me

If you handle a data storage medium while driving, your attention is diverted from the traffic conditions. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

  • Only handle a data storage medium when the vehicle is stationary.
 

The multimedia system supports the following formats and data media:

Permissible file systems FAT32, exFAT, NTFS
Permissible data carriers USB devices, iPod®/iPhone®, MTP devices, Bluetooth® audio equipment
Supported formats: Audio: MP3, WMA, AAC, WAV
  • The multimedia system supports a total of up to 50,000 files.
  • Data storage media up to 2 TB are supported (32‑bit address space).

Observe the following notes:

  • Due to the wide range of USB devices available on the market, playback cannot be guaranteed for all USB devices.
  • MP3 players must support Media Transfer Protocol (MTP).

Information on copyright protection and trademarks

Audio files that you create or reproduce yourself for playback are generally subject to copyright protection. In many countries, reproductions, even for private use, are not permitted without the prior consent of the copyright holder. Make sure that you know about the applicable copyright regulations and that you comply with these.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Audio and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Gracenote, the Gracenote logo and logotype, "Powered by Gracenote", MusicID and Playlist Plus are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Gracenote, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.

For DTS Patents, see https://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks, and DTS TruVolume is a trademark of DTS, Inc.© DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Overview of the media menu

  • 1 Previous track or fast rewind
  • 2 Next track or fast forward
  • 3 Album cover
  • 4 Active media source
  • 5 Track and artist
  • 6 Current track number/track in playback list and active data storage medium
  • 7 Repeat
  • 8 Settings
  • 9 Device manager
  • 10 Controls playback
  • 11 Timeline
  • 12 Categories
  • 13 Random playback

Connecting the data storage media to the multimedia system

Connecting USB devices

The multimedia connection unit is located at the top center of the stowage compartment and has two type C USB ports.

  • Connect the USB device to the USB port.
  • USB hubs are not supported by the multimedia system.
  • When connecting several Apple® devices at the same time, pay attention to the connection sequence. The multimedia system only connects with the device that is connected first. Additional Apple® devices that are connected at the same time are only supplied with power.

Searching for and authorizing a Bluetooth® audio device

Requirements:

  • Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia system and audio equipment.
  • The audio equipment supports the Bluetooth® audio profiles A2DP and AVRCP.
  • The audio equipment is "visible" for other devices.

Multimedia system:

Authorizing a new Bluetooth® audio device

  • Select Connect New Device. Detected equipment is displayed in the device list.
  • Select an audio device. Authorization starts. A code is displayed on the multimedia system and on the mobile phone.
  • If the codes are identical, confirm on the audio equipment.
  • Select Only as Bluetooth Audio Device. The Bluetooth® audio equipment is connected with the multimedia system.

Connecting previously authorized Bluetooth® audio equipment

  • Select a Bluetooth® audio device from the list. The connection is established.

Starting media playback

A data storage medium is connected to the multimedia system.

Multimedia system:

  • Select USB or Bluetooth as the media source.

Controlling media playback

Multimedia system:

  • To pause playback: select .
  • To continue playback: select .
  • To repeat a track: select . For the repeat function there are the following settings:
    • Select once: the active playlist is repeated.
    • Select twice: the current track is repeated.
    • Select three times: the repeat function is deactivated.
  • To play back tracks in random order: select
  • To wind a track forwards or backwards: tap on the desired point on the timeline.
  • To select the next track: select .
  • To select the previous track: select .
  • To scroll through tracks quickly: press and hold or .
  • To show the current track list: select the track image shown.

Additional options for setting media playback

Multimedia system:

Calling up additional options

  • Select . The additional options are shown.

The following options are available:

  • Surprise Mix: A playlist with randomly selected tracks is created.
  • Add to Favorite Songs: The current track is added to the favorite songs.
  • Remove from Favorite Songs: The current track is removed from the favorite songs.
  • Select an option.

Media search

Information about the search function in categories

Under  you can search through all available media files. There are several categories available for selection. The categories shown depend on the connected device and data format. Available categories with Bluetooth® audio equipment:

  • Current Tracklist: The folders and categories of the connected device are shown.

Available categories with audio files:

  • Current Tracklist
  • Playlists
  • Folder
  • Albums
  • Artists
  • Tracks
  • Often Played
  • Most Recently Added
  • Music Genres
  • Year
  • Composers
  • Podcasts (Apple® devices)
  • Audiobooks (Apple® devices)

Starting a search in categories

Multimedia system:

  • Select a category. The media files are shown corresponding to the selected category, e.g. all albums will be shown for the Albums category.

Sorting results shown or playing back all media found

  • Select .
  • To play back all results found in the category: select Play All. If, for example, the album category is active, all albums found by the desired artist will be played back.
  • To sort results alphabetically: select Sort from A-Z.
  • To sort results in reverse alphabetical order: select Sort from Z-A.

Using the keyword search

Multimedia system:

In the categories under 5 you can use the keyword search with free text input to look for content.

  • Select a category.
  • Select Search. A keyboard for character entry appears.
  • Enter the term searched for.
  • The search begins with the first character entered. The more characters entered the more concrete the search results become.
  • Select the desired entry from the result list. If the selected result is an album, song or a playback list then playback is started. If the selected result is a new category then this is opened in the search.

Radio

Switching on the radio

Multimedia system:

  • Alternatively: press the  button. The radio display appears. You will hear the last station played on the last frequency band selected.

Radio overview

  • 1 Active frequency band
  • 2 Station logo
  • 3 Station name or set frequency
  • 4 Artist, title, album and radio text
  • 5 HD radio logo
  • 6 Options
  • 7 Switches the HD Radio function on or off
  • 8 Mute function
  • 9 Calls up the station list
  • 10 Search

Switching the HD radio function on/off

Multimedia system:

  • Switch HD on or off.

HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. For patents see DTS website. HD Radio and the HD, HD Radio, and "ARC" logos are registered trademarks or trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Setting the frequency band

Multimedia system:

  • Select a frequency band.

Selecting a radio station

Multimedia system:

  • Swipe to the left or right on the control element.

Calling up the radio station list

Multimedia system:

  • Select . The station list appears.
  • Select a station.

Searching for radio stations using station names or direct frequency entry

Multimedia system:

  • Select .
  • Select .
  • Enter a station name or frequency.
  • Select a station.

Storing radio stations

Multimedia system:

  • Select a radio station.

Memory slots are available in station presets

  • Select W. or
  • Press and hold on the radio station.

Replacing an entry in the station presets

  • Press and hold on an entry in the station presets.
  • Select Yes.

Editing station presets

Multimedia system:

Moving stations:

  • Press and hold a stored station.
  • Select Move.
  • Move the station to the new position.

Deleting stations:

  • Press and hold a station.
  • Select Delete.

Replacing a station:

  • Press and hold a station.
  • Select Replace Radio Station.

Displaying emergency messages

Multimedia system:

  • Activate or deactivate Display Emergency Warnings.

Sound

Information about the sound system

The sound system is available for all functions in the radio and media modes. The settings, for example for the equalizer, effect the playback of all media sources.

Calling up the sound menu

Multimedia system:

The following functions are available:

  • Equalizer
  • Balance and Fader
  • Auto. Volume Adjustment

Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass settings

Multimedia system:

  • Set TREBLE, MID or BASS.

Activating/deactivating automatic volume adjustment

Multimedia system:

Automatic volume adjustment compensates for differing volumes when changing between audio sources.

  • Activate or deactivate Auto. Volume Adjustment.

Adjusting the balance/fader

The availability of this function depends on the vehicle equipment.

Multimedia system:

  • Adjust the balance and fader.

Transporting

Overview of cargo tie-down point

Cargo tie-down points (example: cargo van without loading rails)

  • 1 Cargo tie-down rings

Secure loose loads with an approved lashing net or a tarp. Always fasten the lashing net or tarp to all available cargo tie-down points. Make sure that the fastening hooks are secured against accidental opening. If your vehicle is equipped with loading rails in the cargo floor, you can place lashing rods directly in front of and behind the load. The lashing rods directly absorb the potential shifting forces. Securing loads on the cargo floor by lashing them down is recommended only for lightweight loads. Lay anti-slip mats under the load to assist in securing it.

Installing and removing cargo tie-down rings

  • To install: slide the cargo tie-down ring through a recess in the loading rail close to the load until the locking mechanism engages in the recess.
  • Check the cargo tie-down ring for firm seating.
  • To remove: pull the locking mechanism up and pull the cargo tie-down ring towards the locking mechanism and out of the loading rail through a recess.

Carrier systems

Information on the roof luggage rack

WARNING Risk of injury if maximum roof load is exceeded

The vehicle center of gravity and the usual driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics will change. If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driving characteristics, as well as the steering and braking characteristics, will be greatly impaired.

  • Always comply with the maximum roof load and adjust your driving style.

  • 1 Mounting rails

Information about the maximum roof load can be found in the "Technical data" section.

Observe the following points for installing roof luggage racks:

  • Tighten the screws of the roof luggage rack to a torque of 6.0 lb-ft (8 Nm) – 7.4 lb-ft (10 Nm) in the designated sliding blocks.
  • The tightened screws should not touch the rails.
  • Ensure that the sliding blocks are not located in the areas around the plastic caps.
  • The sliding blocks must have the right crosssection.
  • The insides of the mounting rails must be free of dirt.
  • Re-tighten the screws uniformly after around 300 miles (500 km).

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use only roof luggage racks that have been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. These help to prevent vehicle damage. Have mounting rails retrofitted only at a qualified specialist workshop. Otherwise, you could damage the vehicle. If your vehicle is equipped with mounting rails on the roof, you can install a roof luggage rack on the roof. Special fasteners (sliding blocks) are available as accessories for this purpose. These fasteners are available from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Placing a load on the wheel arch

Comply with the important safety notes under "Notes on loading"

  • Place the objects on wheel arch 2 and lash them using tie-down eyes 1

Maintenance and Care

ASSYST PLUS service interval display

Function of the ASSYST PLUS service interval display

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display on the instrument cluster provides information on the remaining time or distance before the next service due date. You can hide this service message by using the back button on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. You can obtain further information concerning the servicing of your vehicle from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Displaying the service due date

On-board computer:

The next service due date is displayed.

  • To exit the display: press the back button on the left-hand side of the steering wheel.

Bear in mind the following related topic:

  • Operating the on-board computer

Special service requirements

The prescribed service interval is based on normal vehicle use. Perform maintenance work more often than prescribed if the vehicle is operated under arduous operating conditions or increased loads.

Examples of arduous operating conditions:

  • Regular city driving with frequent intermediate stops
  • Mainly short-distance driving
  • Frequent operation in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces
  • When the engine is often left idling for long periods
  • Operation in particularly dusty conditions and/or if air-recirculation mode is frequently used

In these or similar operating conditions, have the interior air filter, air filter, engine oil and oil filter, for example, changed more frequently. If the vehicle is subjected to increased loads, check the tires more frequently. You can obtain further information at a qualified specialist workshop.

Non-operational times with the battery disconnected

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display can calculate the service due date only when the battery is connected.

  • Display and note down the service due date on the instrument cluster before disconnecting the battery.

Engine compartment

Opening and closing the hood

  • Park the vehicle safely and on a surface that is as level as possible.
  • Switch off the vehicle.
  • Secure the vehicle against rolling away.
  • To open: pull handle 1 to release the hood.
  • Reach into the gap and push the hood catch handle upwards.
  • Open the hood and hold it up

  • Take support 1 from the holder on the hood and pull it downwards.
  • Insert the support into bracket below 2.
  • To close: lift the hood slightly.
  • Move support 1 to the holder on the hood and apply light pressure to engage it.
  • Lower the hood and let it drop from a height of approximately 0.5 ft (15 cm).
  • If it is still possible to lift the hood a little, open the hood again and let it drop from a height of approximately 0.7 ft (20 cm) until it engages correctly.

Engine oil

Checking the engine oil level with the on-board computer

Requirements:

  • The vehicle is level during the measuring process.
  • The hood is closed.
  • Depending on the driving profile, the oil level can be displayed only after a driving time of up to 30 minutes and only when the vehicle is switched on.

On-board computer:

One of the following messages appears on the instrument cluster:

  • Measuring Engine Oil Level...: measurement of the oil level is not yet possible. Repeat the query after driving for a maximum of 30 minutes.
  • Engine Oil Level OK and the bar indicating the oil level on the instrument cluster is green and is between "min" and "max": the oil level is correct.
  • Engine Oil Level Drive until the engine is warm.: warm up the engine to operating temperature.
  • Engine Oil Level Correct Measurement Only if Vehicle Is on Level Ground: park the vehicle on a level surface.
  • Engine Oil Level Refill 1,0 liq.gal. and the bar indicating the oil level on the instrument cluster is orange and lies below "MIN": add 1.0 US qt (1 l) of engine oil.
  • Reduce Engine Oil Level and the bar indicating the oil level on the instrument cluster is orange and lies above "MAX": drain off excess engine oil. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
  • For Engine Oil Level Switch Ignition On: switch on the vehicle.
  • Engine Oil Level System Inoperative: the sensor is defective or not connected. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
  • Engine Oil Level System Currently Unavailable: close the hood.

Checking the engine oil level with an oil dipstick

WARNING Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compartment

Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.

  • Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following.

Requirements:

  • The vehicle is on a level surface.
  • The engine is turned off and the ignition key is kept out of range.
  • The engine is at operating temperature.
  • Wait 5 minutes after a short drive for the engine oil to drip off.

Oil dipstick (example, if purchased) 

  • Remove dipstick 1 and wipe it off.
  • Slowly insert dipstick 1 into the dipstick guide tube as far as it will go and pull it out after three seconds.
    • Oil level OK: the oil level is between the MIN and the MAX mark.
    • Oil level too low: the oil level is at the MIN mark or below.
  • If the oil level is too low, add approx. 1.0 US qt (1 liter) engine oil.
  • If the oil level is too high, drain off excess engine oil.
  • Contact a qualified specialist workshop if you have any questions.

Adding engine oil

WARNING Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compartment

Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.

  • Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following.

If you have to carry out any work in the engine compartment, touch only the following component parts:

  • Hood
  • Engine oil filler opening cap
  • Washer fluid reservoir cap
  • Coolant expansion reservoir cap

Engine OM651

Engine OM642

Engine OM654 rear-wheel drive and all-wheel drive

Engine M274

  • Turn cap 1 counter-clockwise and remove it.
  • Add engine oil.
  • Replace cap 1 and turn it clockwise until it engages.
  • Check the oil level again. Check using the onboard computer, check with the oil dipstick.
  • In the case of vehicles with engines that do not have an oil dipstick, check the oil level with the on-board computer after the next journey.

It is necessary to run the engine for an extended period after each oil top-up to correctly detect the oil level. Fill level changes during oil top-ups may not be immediately visible. Depending on the driving profile, the new oil level can only be displayed after a driving time of up to 60 minutes. To avoid damage due to overfilling, do not add more than 0.26 gal (1 liter). Check the oil level again after a longer period.

Checking the coolant level

If you have to carry out any work in the engine compartment, touch only the following components:

  • Hood
  • Engine oil filler opening cap
  • Washer fluid reservoir cap
  • Coolant expansion reservoir cap

Allow the engine and the engine cooling system to cool down before checking the coolant level or refilling coolant.

Coolant expansion reservoir (example)

  • Park the vehicle on a level surface.
  • Open the hood.
  • Slowly turn the coolant expansion tank cap 1 half a turn counter-clockwise and allow overpressure to escape.
  • Turn coolant expansion tank cap 1 further and remove it.
  • Check the coolant level. There is enough coolant in coolant expansion reservoir if the coolant reaches the MAX mark.

Add Coolant

  • Refill the coolant to the MAX mark on the coolant expansion reservoir.
  • Replace coolant expansion reservoir cap 1 and tighten in a clockwise direction.
  • Start the vehicle.
  • After about five minutes, switch off the vehicle again and allow it to cool down.
  • Check the coolant level again and add coolant if necessary.

Filling up the windshield washer system

If you have to carry out any work in the engine compartment, touch only the following components:

  • Hood
  • Engine oil filler opening cap
  • Washer fluid reservoir cap
  • Coolant expansion reservoir cap

Adding washer fluid

Washer fluid reservoir (example)

  • Pre-mix the washer fluid in the correct mixing ratio in a container.
  • Park the vehicle on a level surface and secure it against rolling away.
  • Open the hood.
  • Pull the cap of the washer fluid container 1 upwards by the tab.
  • Pour in the pre-mixed washer fluid.
  • Press cap 1 onto the filler opening until it audibly engages.
  • Close the hood

Cleaning the water drain valve of the air intake box

If you have to carry out any work in the engine compartment, touch only the following components:

  • Hood
  • Engine oil filler opening cap
  • Washer fluid reservoir cap
  • Coolant expansion reservoir cap

  • Open the hood.
  • Remove dirt from water drain valve 2 of air intake box 1.

Draining the fuel filter

Engine OM642

Engine OM651 rear wheel drive

Engine OM654 rear-wheel drive and all-wheel drive

  • Park the vehicle in a safe location and secure it against rolling away.
  • Switch off the auxiliary heating.
  • Switch off the vehicle.
  • Open the hood (/ page 212).
  • Place a suitable collecting pan beneath drain hose 2.
  • Switch on the vehicle.
  • Open drain screw 1 until the water/fuel mixture emerges from drain hose 2.
  • Close drain screw 1 as soon as around 0.2 qt (0.2 liters) of the water/fuel mixture has been collected. After 30 seconds, the electrical fuel pump automatically stops the discharge of the water/fuel mixture.
  • Switch the vehicle off after draining.
  • Dispose of the collected water/fuel mixture in an environmentally responsible manner, e.g. at a qualified specialist workshop.
  • Check that drain screw 1 has been closed. If the vehicle is running while drain screw 1 is open, you will lose fuel through drain hose 2.
  • Close the hood (/ page 212).  
  • The indicator lamp does not go out after draining: drain the fuel filter again.
  • The indicator lamp does not go out after the second draining: consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Cleaning and Care

Notes on washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash

Make sure that the automatic car wash is suitable for the size of the vehicle. Before washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash, fold in the outside mirrors and remove any additional antennas. Otherwise, the outside mirrors, antennas or the vehicle itself could be damaged. Make sure any additional antennas are re-installed and that the outside mirrors are fully folded out again when you leave the automatic car wash. To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the following before using an automatic car wash:

  • the side windows and the sliding window are completely closed.
  • the blower for ventilation and heating is switched off.
  • the windshield wiper switch is in position .

If the vehicle is very dirty, wash off excess dirt before cleaning the vehicle in an automatic car wash.

Notes on use of a power washer

Never use a power washer in the vehicle interior. The pressurized water created by the power washer and the associated spray could cause considerable damage to the vehicle. To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the following when using a power washer:

  • maintain a minimum distance of 11.8 in (30 cm) to the vehicle when using 25° flatspray nozzles and concentrated-power jets or 27.6 in (70 cm) when using round-spray nozzles and observe the information in the equipment manufacturer's operating instructions.
  • Do not direct the nozzle of the power washer directly at sensitive parts such as tires, gaps, electrical components, batteries, light sources and ventilation slits.
  • maintain a minimum distance of 19.7 in (50 cm) for a reversing camera.

Washing the vehicle by hand

Observe the legal requirements, e.g. in a number of countries, washing by hand is only permitted in specially designated wash bays. In this case, make sure that a specially designated wash bay is used for washing by hand.

  • Use a mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo.
  • Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water and a soft car sponge. When doing so, do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight.
  • Carefully spray the vehicle with water and dry off with a leather cloth. Be careful not to point the water jet directly towards the air inlet grilles. The blower should be switched off while doing so.
  • Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paintwork.

At the onset of winter, remove all traces of road salt deposits carefully and as soon as possible.

Notes on paintwork care

Observe the notes on cleaning and care to avoid paintwork damage.

Paint

  • Insect remains: Soak with insect remover and then wash off.
  • Bird droppings: Soak with water and then wash off.
  • Tree resin, oils, fuels and greases: remove by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid.
  • Coolant and brake fluid: Remove with a moist cloth and clean water.
  • Tar stains: Use tar remover.
  • Wax: Use silicone remover.
  • Do not affix stickers, films or similar.
  • Remove dirt as soon as possible.

Matte finish

  • Use only care products approved for Mercedes-Benz.
  • Do not polish the vehicle or alloy wheels.
  • Use only automatic car washes that meet current technological standards.
  • Do not use a wash program that ends with a hot wax treatment in automatic car washes.
  • Do not use paint cleaners, buffing or polishing products, or gloss preservers, e.g. wax.
  • Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Notes on the Care and Cleaning of Vehicle Parts

Notes on cleaning and care Preventing damage to the vehicle
Wheels/rims
  • Use water and acid-free wheel cleaner.
  • Do not use acidic alloy wheel cleaners to remove brake dust. Otherwise, wheel bolts and brake components may be damaged.
  • To avoid corrosion of brake discs and brakepads, drive for a few minutes after cleaning and before parking the vehicle. The brake discs and brakepads will warm up and dry out.
Windows
  • Clean windows inside and outside with a damp cloth and with a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
Do not use dry cloths or abrasive or solvent-based cleaning agents to clean the inside of windows.
Wiper blades
  • Carefully clean the folded-away wiper blades with a damp cloth.
Do not clean the wiper blades too often.
Exterior lighting
  • Clean the lenses with a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo.
Use only cleaning agents or cloths suitable for plastic lenses
Sensors
  • Clean the sensors in the front and rear bumper and in the radiator grille with a soft cloth and car shampoo.
When using a power washer, keep a minimum distance of 11.8 in (30 cm).
Reversing camera and 360° Camera
  • Use clean water and a soft cloth to clean the camera lens.
Do not use a power washer.
Trailer hitch
  • Remove traces of rust on the ball, e.g. with a wire brush.
  • Remove dirt with a lint-free cloth.
  • After cleaning, lightly oil or grease the ball head.
  • Observe the notes on care in the trailer hitch manufacturer's operator's manual.
Do not clean the ball neck with a power washer or solvent.
Sliding door
  • Remove foreign objects from the vicinity of the contact plates and contact pins of the sliding door.
  • Clean the contact plates and contact pins with a mild cleaning agent and a soft cloth.
Do not oil or grease the contact plates or the contact pins.
Steps
  • Clean the electrically operated steps and their housing with a power washer.
  • After cleaning, spray the lateral guides with silicone spray.
  • Clean the steps in the bumper with a power washer.
Do not use oil or grease as a lubricant.
Aluminum side panels
  • Brush down the aluminum side panels with water and a neutral or mild alkaline cleaning agent.
Do not use abrasive cleaning agents to clean the dropsides.

 

Notes on the Care and Cleaning of the Interior

Notes on cleaning and care Preventing damage to the vehicle
Seat belts Clean with lukewarm soapy water.
  • Do not use chemical cleaning agents.
  • Do not dry the seat belt by heating above 176°F (80°C) or in direct sunlight.
Instrument cluster surfaces Clean the surfaces carefully with a microfiber cloth and acrylic glass care product.
  • Do not use any other agents.
Display Clean the surface carefully with a microfiber cloth and LC/TFT display care product.
  • Switch off the display and let it cool down.
  • Do not use any other agents.
Digital inside rearview mirror
  • Clean the mirror glass with a cloth moistened with glass cleaner.
  • Clean the light sensors of the inside rearview mirror with a dry cotton cloth.
  • Do not spray the glass cleaner on the mirror glass.
  • Do not use any other agents.
Plastic trim
  • Clean with a damp microfiber cloth.
  • For heavy soiling: Use care product recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
  • Do not affix stickers, films or similar.
  • Do not allow to come into contact with cosmetics, insect repellent and sun creams.
Real wood and trim elements
  • Clean with a microfiber cloth.
  • Black piano-lacquer look: Clean with a damp cloth and soapy water.
  • For heavy soiling: Use care product recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
  • Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents, polishes or waxes.
Roof lining Clean with a soft brush or dry shampoo.  
Cloth seat covers Vacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and then use a damp microfiber cloth and a 1% soapsuds solution to clean the entire seat cover. Use cleaning and care products recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
  • Do not use any oil-based cleaning and care products.
  • Do not spot-clean.
Imitation leather seat covers Vacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and then use a damp cotton cloth and a 1% soapsuds solution to clean the entire seat cover. Use cleaning and care products recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
  • Do not use a microfiber cloth.
  • Do not use any oil-based cleaning and care products.
  • Do not spot-clean.
Steering wheel and gear or selector lever Clean with a damp cloth.  
Pedals and floor mats Clean with a damp cloth.
  • Do not use any cleaning and care products.
Vehicle interior Clean with a damp cloth.
  • Do not use a power washer.
  • Allow the vehicle interior to dry completely after cleaning.
  • Do not allow liquids to penetrate into gaps or cavities.
Curtains The curtains may be dry cleaned only.
  • Do not wash the curtains.

 

Breakdown Assistance

Emergency

Removing the safety vest

  • Remove the safety vest from the storage compartment in the driver's door.
  • Safety vests can also be stored in the storage compartments of the rear doors and the codriver door.

  • 1 Maximum number of washes
  • 2 Maximum wash temperature
  • 3 Do not bleach
  • 4 Do not iron
  • 5 Do not tumble dry
  • 6 Do not dry-clean
  • 7 This is a class 2 vest

The safety vest only fulfills the legally required standards if it is the correct size and is completely closed. Replace the safety vest if:

  • Damaged or if the reflex strips are dirty
  • The maximum permitted number of washes is exceeded
  • The safety vest's fluorescence has faded

Removing the first-aid kit (soft sided)

The first-aid kit (soft sided) is located in the stowage compartment in the front passenger door.

  • Remove first-aid (soft sided) kit from the stowage compartment.

Removing the warning lamp

The warning lamp is located in the stowage compartment in the front-passenger door.

  • Remove the warning lamp from the stowage compartment.

Emergency Call System

Information on the emergency call system

USA only: Your vehicle is equipped with the Emergency Call System ("eCall"). This feature can help save lives in the event of an accident. eCall in no way replaces assistance provided from dialing 911. eCall only functions in areas where mobile phone coverage is available from the wireless service providers. Insufficient network coverage from the wireless service providers may result in an emergency call not being transmitted. eCall is a standard feature in your Mercedes-Benz vehicle. In order to function as intended, the system relies on the transmission of data detailed in the Transmitted Data section that follows. To disable eCall, a customer must visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Service department to deactivate the vehicle's communication module.

Deactivation of this module prevents the activation of any and all Mercedes me connect services. After the deactivation of eCall, automatic emergency call and manual emergency call will not be available. The ignition must be switched on before an automatic emergency call can be made.

Overview of the emergency call system

eCall can help to reduce the time between an accident and the arrival of emergency services at the site of the accident. It helps locate an accident site in places that are difficult to access. However, even if a vehicle is equipped with eCall, this does not mean the system is ON. As such, eCall does not replace dialing 911 in the event of an accident. An emergency call can be made automatically or manually. Only make emergency calls if you or others are in need of rescue. Do not make an emergency call in the event of a breakdown or a similar situation.

Message in the media display: SOS NOT READY: the vehicle is not switched on or eCall is not available. During an active emergency call,  appears in the display.

Triggering an automatic emergency call

Requirements:

  • The ignition is switched on.
  • The starter battery is sufficiently charged.

If restraint systems such as airbags or Emergency Tensioning Devices have been activated after an accident, eCall may automatically initiate an emergency call. When the emergency call is made:

  • A voice connection is made to the MercedesBenz emergency call center.
  • A message with accident data is transmitted to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center.

The SOS button in the overhead control panel flashes until the emergency call is finished. It is not possible to immediately end an automatic emergency call. If no connection can be made to the emergency services:

  • Dial the local emergency number on your mobile phone.

If an emergency call has been initiated:

  • Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emergency call center operator.
  • Based on the call, the operator decides whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site.
  • If no vehicle occupant answers, an ambulance is sent to the vehicle immediately.

Triggering a manual emergency call

  • To use the SOS button in the overhead control panel: press the SOS button at least one second long.

When the emergency call is made:

  • A voice connection is made to the MercedesBenz emergency call center.
  • A message with accident data is transmitted to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center. The Mercedes-Benz emergency call center can transmit the vehicle position data to one of the emergency call center.
  • Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emergency call center operator.

If no connection can be made to the emergency services:

  • Dial the local emergency number on your mobile phone.

Ending an unintentional emergency call

  • Select  on the multifunction steering wheel. Depress the button for several seconds.

Transmitted data with the emergency call system

Data transmitted by the eCall includes but is not limited to:

  • Vehicle's GPS position data R GPS position data on the route (a few hundred meters before the incident)
  • Direction of travel
  • Vehicle identification number
  • Vehicle drive type
  • Estimated number of people in the vehicle
  • Whether the emergency call was initiated manually or automatically
  • Time of the accident
  • Language setting on the multimedia system

Data transmitted is vehicle information. For any questions about the collection, use and sharing of the eCall system data, please contact MBUSA's Customer Assistance Center at 800-FOR-MERC. For Canada, please contact MBC’s Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-387-0100. Customer requests for covered information should be submitted via the same channels.

For accident clarification purposes, the following measures can be taken up to an hour after the emergency call has been initiated:

  • The current vehicle position can be determined
  • A voice connection to the vehicle occupants can be established

Flat tire

Notes on flat tires

WARNING Risk of accident due to a flat tire

A flat tire strongly impairs the vehicle's driving characteristics, as well as its steering and braking characteristics.

  • Do not drive with a flat tire.
  • Replace the flat tire with the spare wheel. Alternatively, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

In the event of a flat tire, the following options are available depending on your vehicle's equipment:

  • You can make a breakdown assistance call using the breakdown assistance call button in the overhead control panel .
  • Change the wheel

Battery

Notes on the starter battery

WARNING Risk of an accident due to work carried out incorrectly on the battery

Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can, for example, lead to a short circuit. This can restrict functions relevant for safety systems and impair the operating safety of your vehicle. You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular:

  • When braking
  • In the event of abrupt steering maneuvers and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions
  • In the event of a short circuit or a similar incident, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
  • Do not drive on.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the starter battery replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. If you want to replace the battery yourself, observe the following information:

  • Only replace a faulty battery with a battery which fulfills the vehicle's specific requirements.
  • Carry over detachable parts such as the vent hose or terminal cover from the battery which is to be replaced.
  • Make sure that the vent hose is always connected to its original opening on the battery side. Install the existing or newly supplied stop plugs. Otherwise, gases or battery acid could escape.
  • Make sure that the detachable parts are connected in the same way as before.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries that have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide increased impact protection to prevent vehicle occupants from suffering acid burns should the battery be damaged in an accident.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop to connect the battery.

Starting assistance and charging the starter battery

  • Always use the jump-start connection in the engine compartment for starting assistance and when charging the battery.

If the warning/indicator lamps do not light up in the instrument cluster at temperatures around or below freezing, it is highly probable that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case, observe the following points:

  • Do not give the vehicle starting assistance or charge the battery.
  • The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be reduced drastically.
  • The starting behavior may deteriorate, particularly at low temperatures.
  • It is recommended that you have a thawed battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

When jump-starting and charging the batteries, observe the following points:

  • Only use undamaged jumper cables/charging cables with a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps
  • Non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps must not come into contact with other metal parts while the jumper cables/charging cables are connected to the battery/jump-start connection point
  • The jumper cables/charging cables must not come into contact with any parts which may move when the engine is running
  • Make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged
  • Avoid fire and open flames
  • Do not lean over a battery
  • When charging: only use a battery charger that has been tested and approved by MercedesBenz and read the operating instructions for your charger before charging the batteries

Observe the additional following points during starting assistance:

  • Starting assistance may only be provided using batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V. 
  • The vehicles must not touch each other
  • Vehicles with a gasoline engine: only perform starting assistance when the engine and exhaust system are cold

  • Remove the cover from the POSITIVE terminal of the donor battery.
  • First connect a red POSITIVE terminal clamp 1 of the starting assistance/charging cable to the POSITIVE terminal of the donor battery.
  • With second red POSITIVE terminal clamp 2 of the starting assistance/charging cable, slide the red protective cap on jump-start connection 3 back with a clockwise turn.
  • Attach second red POSITIVE terminal clamp 2 to the POSITIVE terminal of jump-start connection 3.
  • During starting assistance: start the engine of the donor vehicle and let it run at idle speed.
  • First, connect a black NEGATIVE terminal clamp 4 of the starting assistance/charging cable to the NEGATIVE terminal of the donor battery.
  • Connect the second black NEGATIVE terminal clamp 5 of the starting assistance/charging cable to ground point 6 on your own vehicle (bare metal part in the engine compartment).
  • During starting assistance: start the vehicle.
  • When charging: start the charging process.
  • During starting assistance: let the engine run for a few minutes.
  • During starting assistance: before disconnecting the jumper cable, switch on an electrical consumer on your own vehicle, e.g. the rear window heater or lighting.

When the starting assistance/charging process is complete:

  • Remove the terminal clamps of the starting assistance/charging cable in reverse order. First remove second black NEGATIVE terminal clamp 5 from ground point 6 in the engine compartment. Then remove black NEGATIVE terminal clamp 4 from the donor battery. Then remove second red POSITIVE terminal clamp 2 from the POSITIVE terminal of jumpstart connection 3. Then remove red POSITIVE terminal clamp 1 from the donor battery. The red protective cap springs back to its initial position when second red POSITIVE terminal clamp 2 is disconnected from jump-start connection 3.

Installing and removing the floor covering

WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell

Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle.

  • Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that they do not get into the driver's footwell.
  • When using floor mats or carpets, make sure that they are properly secured so that they do not slip or obstruct the pedals.
  • Do not lay multiple floor mats or carpets on top of one another.

Requirement

  • All electrical consumers are switched off.

Removing

  • Unscrew screws 3 and remove trim 2.
  • Remove floor covering 1.

Installing

  • Insert floor covering 1 and align with the driver's seat base and the doorway.
  • Put trim 2 in place and screw screws 3 back in.

Disconnecting the starter battery

  • Vehicles with a battery main switch: remove the main switch of the battery.
  • Vehicles without a battery main switch: switch off all electrical consumers.
  • Switch off the vehicle.
  • Remove the floor covering.
  • Remove screws 1 and slide battery cover 2 in the direction of the arrow. The screws must protrude over the larger recesses.
  • Remove battery cover 2 upwards.

  • First loosen and remove the NEGATIVE terminal clamp on the battery so that the clamp is no longer in contact with the terminal.
  • Remove the clamp cover of the POSITIVE terminal.
  • Loosen the POSITIVE terminal clamp and fold it up to the side, together with the prefuse box.

Removing/installing the starter battery

Vehicles with rear wheel drive: removing the starter battery

  • Disconnect the starter battery.
  • Remove breather hose 1 with the connector bracket from the connection on the degassing cover.

  • Pull out and remove screws 2 of bracket 3 upwards.
  • Slide the starter battery from its anchorage in the direction of travel.
  • Fold the bars of the starter battery upwards and remove the starter battery from the battery box.

Vehicles with rear wheel drive: installing the starter battery

  • When reconnecting the starter battery, observe the safety measures and protection notes

  • Insert the starter battery into the battery box.
  • Fold down the bars of the starter battery.
  • Slide the starter battery into its anchorage in the opposite direction to the direction of travel.
  • Insert bracket 3.
  • Tighten screws 2 on bracket 3 which holds the battery in place.

  • Attach breather hose 1 with the connector bracket to the connection of the degassing cover.
  • Reconnect the starter battery

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the starter battery replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. If you want to replace the starter battery yourself, observe the following notes:

  • Replace a defective starter battery with a starter battery which meets the specific requirements of the vehicle.
  • Use detachable parts such as vent hoses, elbow fittings or terminal covers from the starter battery to be replaced.
  • Make sure that the vent hose is always connected to its original opening on the battery side. Install the existing or newly supplied stop plugs. Otherwise, gases or battery acid could escape.
  • Make sure that the detachable parts are connected in the same way as before 

Disconnecting the auxiliary battery in the engine compartment

  • Observe the safety measures and protection notices when disconnecting the auxiliary battery.
  • Switch off all electrical consumers.
  • Switch off the vehicle.
  • Open the hood.
  • First loosen and remove the negative terminal clamp on the auxiliary battery so that the clamp is no longer in contact with the terminal.
  • Remove the positive terminal clamp cover.
  • Loosen and remove the positive terminal clamp.

Towing or tow-starting

Overview of permissible towing methods

In the event of a breakdown, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle transported instead of towed.

Permissible towing methods
 

Both axles on the ground

Front axle raised

Rear axle raised

Vehicles with automatic transmission and rear wheel drive Yes, no further than 31 miles (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h) Yes, no further than 31 miles (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h) Yes, if the steering wheel is fixed in the center position with a steering wheel lock
Vehicles with all-wheel drive Yes, no further than 31 miles (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h) No No

 

Towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground

  • Observe the notes on permissible towing methods.
  • Make sure that the battery is connected and charged.

When the battery is discharged, the following situations occur:

  • The vehicle does not start.
  • It is not possible to release or apply the electric parking brake.
  • Vehicles with automatic transmission: The automatic transmission cannot be shifted to position N or P.

If a vehicle is towed or tow-started, its weight should not be greater than the permissible gross mass of the towing vehicle.

  • Information on the vehicle's permissible gross mass can be found on the vehicle identification plate.
  • Vehicles with automatic transmission: do not open the driver's or co-driver door. Otherwise, the automatic transmission automatically shifts to position P.
  • Install the towing eye.
  • Secure the towing device.
  • Deactivate automatic locking.
  • Do not activate the HOLD function.
  • Deactivate tow-away alarm.
  • Deactivate Active Brake Assist.
  • Vehicles with automatic transmission: Shift the automatic transmission to N.
  • Release the parking brake.

Towing a vehicle with the front or rear axle raised

Vehicles with automatic transmission and rearwheel drive: if there is a malfunction, the automatic transmission may be locked in position P. If the automatic transmission cannot be shifted to position N, transport the vehicle. A towing vehicle with lifting equipment is required for vehicle transport.

  • Observe the notes on permissible towing methods.
  • The propeller shafts to the drive axles must be removed if the maximum permissible towing distance is exceeded.
  • Only have the propeller shafts installed or removed by qualified, trained personnel.
  • Vehicles with automatic transmission: Shift the automatic transmission to N.
  • Release the parking brake.
  • Switch off the vehicle.

Loading the vehicle for transport

  • Observe the notes on permissible towing methods.
  • Connect the tow bar to the towing eye to load the vehicle.
  • Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the automatic transmission to position N.
  • Vehicles with automatic transmission: in the event of damage to the electrics, the automatic transmission may be locked in position P. To shift to position N, provide the onboard electrical system with power.
  • Load the vehicle onto the transporter.
  • Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the automatic transmission to position P.
  • Use the parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away.
  • Only secure the vehicle by the wheels.

Vehicles with all-wheel drive/vehicles with automatic transmission

  • Make sure that the front and rear axles come to rest on the same transportation vehicle.

Installing/removing the towing eye

Installing the front towing eye

  • Press the top of the cover and remove the cover.
  • Screw in towing eye 1 clockwise to the stop and tighten.

Removing the front towing eye

  • Unscrew towing eye 1 counter-clockwise.
  • Insert the cover with the tabs at the top and push in at the bottom until the cover engages.

Rear towing eye (vehicles with passenger vehicle approval)

Electrical fuses

Notes on electrical fuses

The electrical fuses in your vehicle isolate defective circuits. If a fuse blows, all the components on the circuit and their functions will cease to operate. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of an equivalent specification, which you can determine by the color and fuse rating. The fuse allocation chart and further information on the electric fuses and relays can be found in the "Fuse allocation chart" supplement.

If the new fuse which has been inserted also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop. Make sure of the following before replacing a fuse:

  • The vehicle is secured such that it does not roll away
  • All electrical consumers are switched off
  • The vehicle is switched off

The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:

  • Fuse box in the co-driver's footwell (/ page 239)
  • Fuse box in the seat base of the driver's seat

Opening the fuse box in the seat base of the driver's seat

  • To open: press down and unclip fasteners 1 on the cover.
  • Remove the cover.
  • To close: press the cover firmly into the seat base until fasteners 1 clip in.

Opening and closing the fuse box in the co-driver's footwell

Opening the fuse box

  • Unlocking and removing the stowage compartment cover in the co-driver's footwell.

Example: vehicle tool kit insert

  • Lift the insert at marked positions 1.
  • Pull the insert out of clips 2.

Closing the fuse box

  • Slide the insert into clips 2.
  • Close the insert by pressing on marked positions 1.
  • Put on the stowage compartment cover in the co-driver's footwell and lock it.

Vehicle tool kit

Information on the vehicle tool kit

The vehicle tool kit is located in the stowage compartment in the footwell on the front passenger side. The vehicle tool kit contains:

  • a towing eye
  • a screwdriver with Torx®, Phillips and slotted heads

The vehicle tool kit may also contain the following, for example:

  • an open-end wrench
  • a wheel wrench
  • a release tool for the park pawl
  • an insert bit
  • a socket wrench
  • a tool for unlocking the lockable DEF filler cap

Unlocking and removing the storage compartment cover

  • Remove the rubber mat from the co-driver's footwell.
  • To unlock: turn quick-release fastener 1 counter-clockwise to position 1.
  • Slightly raise and pull out the cover.

Inserting and locking the cover

  • Slide in the cover and press it downwards.
  • Press down quick-release fastener 1 until it engages.
  • To lock: turn quick-release fastener 1 clockwise to position 2.

Removing the vehicle tool kit

Example: vehicle tool kit insert

  • Raise the insert at marked points 1.
  • Pull the insert out of clips 2.

Storing the vehicle tool kit

  • Slide the insert into clips 2.
  • Close the insert by pressing on marked points 1.

Hydraulic jack

Information on the hydraulic jack

  • The hydraulic jack is located in side compartment 1 above the co-driver door step.

Vehicles with more than 18 seats

Hydraulic jack 1 is located behind the last bench seat on the right. The jack has a maximum weight of 16.5 lbs (7.5 kg) depending on the vehicle's equipment. You will find the maximum load capacity of the jack stated on the adhesive label attached to the jack. If there is a malfunction, please contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Jack maintenance:

  • Clean and grease all moving parts after use.
  • Extend and retract the pistons fully every six months.

Removing the pump lever rod and the jack

Requirements:

  • The co-driver door is open.

  • To open: press down and unclip fasteners 1 on the cover.
  • Remove the cover.
  • Pull out the holder completely and place it on the step.

  • Remove jack 2 and the pump lever rod.
  • To close: press the cover firmly so that fasteners 1 engage.

Vehicles with more than 18 seats Requirement:

  • The right-hand rear-end door is open.

  • Open clasps 2 on jack 1, loosen the straps and remove the jack.
  • Open clasp 2 on pump lever rod 3, loosen the straps and remove the pump lever rod.
  • To store: collapse pump lever rod 3 and place it along with jack 1 in the loosened straps, and tighten clasps 2 to close.

Wheels and Tires

Information on noise or unusual driving characteristics

While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises and unusual driving characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate damage to the wheels or tires. If you suspect that a tire is defective, reduce your speed. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to check if wheels and tires have been damaged or are no longer functioning properly. Hidden tire damage could also be causing the unusual driving characteristics. If no signs of damage can be detected, have the tires and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tires

Check the wheels and tires of your vehicle for damage regularly, i.e. at least every two weeks, as well as after driving off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tire pressure. Look out for the following types of damage, for example:

  • cuts in the tires
  • punctures in the tires
  • tears in the tires
  • bulges on tires
  • deformation or severe corrosion on wheels

Conduct the following checks regularly on all wheels, at least once a month or as required, e.g. before a long journey or when driving off-road:

  • check the tire pressure (/ page 244)
  • check the valve caps. Valves must be protected from moisture and dirt with valve caps specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.
  • visually inspect the tread depth and the tire contact surface across the whole tire width The minimum tread depth for summer use is 1/8 in (3 mm) and for winter use 1/6 in (4 mm).

Markings 1 show in which places the bar indicators (arrow) are integrated into the tire tread. They are visible as soon as the tread depth is approximately á in (1.6 mm).

Information on driving with summer tires

At temperatures below 50 °F (10 °C) summer tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and braking power. Change the tires on your vehicle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at very cold temperatures could cause tears to form, thereby damaging the tires permanently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility for this type of damage. Always observe the maximum permissible speed specified for the summer tires you have installed. Once you have installed the summer tires:

  • Check the tire pressure   
  • Restart the tire pressure monitor

Information on M+S tires

At temperatures below 50 °F (10 °C) use winter tires or all-season tires that are marked with M+S. Only winter tires bearing the  snowflake symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions.

Only these tires allow driving safety systems such as ABS and ESP® to also function optimally in winter. These tires have been developed specifically for driving in snow. Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on all wheels to maintain safe handling characteristics. Observe the maximum permissible speed specified for the M+S tires you have installed. If you install M+S tires that have a lower maximum permissible speed than the maximum design speed of the vehicle, affix an appropriate warning sign in the driver's field of vision. You can obtain this at a qualified specialist workshop. Once you have installed the M+S tires, take the following measures:

  • check the tire pressure  
  • restart the tire pressure monitoring system

Notes on snow chains

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use snow chains that have been checked and approved. You can obtain information about snow chains from any qualified specialist workshop.

Observe the following notes when using snow chains:

  • Snow chains are only permissible for certain wheel/tire combinations. You can obtain information on this at a qualified specialist workshop.
  • For safety reasons, only use snow chains that have been specifically approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains with the same quality standard.
  • The snow chains must be retightened after driving approximately 0.6 miles (1 km). This is the only way to ensure the snow chains are optimally seated with clearance to adjacent components.
  • Vehicles with all-wheel drive: install snow chains on the wheels on the rear axle. On vehicles with twin tires, install the snow chains on the outer wheels. Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions.
  • Use snow chains only when the road surface is completely snow-covered. Remove the snow chains as soon as possible when you come to a road that is not snow-covered.
  • Local regulations may restrict the use of snow chains. Observe the applicable regulations before installing snow chains.
  • Activate all-wheel drive before driving off with snow chains.
  • If snow chains are installed, the maximum permissible speed is 30 mph (50 km/h).
  • Vehicles with Parking Assist: do not use Parking Assist PARKTRONIC if snow chains are installed.

Tire pressure

Notes on tire pressure

Driving with tire pressure that is too high or too low can:

  • shorten the service life of the tires
  • cause increased tire damage
  • adversely affect handling characteristics and thus driving safety, for example, due to hydroplaning

Tire pressure which is too low can cause:

  • Tire defects as a result of overheating
  • Impaired handling characteristics
  • Irregular wear
  • Increased fuel consumption

Excessively high tire pressure can result in:

  • Increased braking distance
  • Impaired handling characteristics
  • Irregular wear
  • Impaired driving comfort
  • Susceptibility to damage

You can find information on recommended tire pressures for the vehicle's factory-installed tires on the following labels:

  • Tire and Loading Information placard on the B‑pillar of your vehicle.
  • Tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap .

Observe the maximum tire pressure. Use a suitable pressure gage to check the tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire pressure.

Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system:

You can also check the tire pressure using the onboard computer.

Only check tire pressures when the tires are cold. Conditions for cold tires:

  • The vehicle has been parked with the tires out of direct sunlight for at least three hours.
  • The vehicle has traveled less than 1 mile (1.6 km).

A rise in the tire temperature of 18 °F (10 °C) increases the tire pressure by approx. 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this into account when checking the tire pressure of warm tires. The tire pressures recommended for increased load/speed in the tire pressure table may affect the ride comfort.

Notes on trailer operation

Always inflate the tires on the rear axle to the recommended tire pressure on the tire pressure table for a full load.

Overview of the tire pressure table

The tire pressure table can be found on the seat base or on the B-pillar on the driver's side.

The tire pressure table shows the recommended tire pressure for the tires installed at the factory on this vehicle. The recommended tire pressures are valid for cold tires and different vehicle load conditions. If one or more tire sizes precede a tire pressure, the tire pressure information following is only valid for those tire sizes. If the preceding tire sizes are supplemented by the  symbol, the tire pressure information following shows alternative tire pressures. The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table for varying weights. Some tire pressure tables only show the rim diameter instead of the complete tire size, e.g. R16. The rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be found on the side wall of the tire.

Front axle tire pressures on vehicles with all-wheel/rear wheel drive and Single tires Max. front axle load 4101 lbs (1860 kg)
Tires/disc wheel Vehicle load Max. front axle load 4101 lbs (1860 kg)
LT245/75R16 120/116Q Fully laden 320 kPa (3.2 bar/46 psi)

 

Front axle tire pressures on vehicles with rear wheel drive and Single tires Max. front axle load 4409 lbs (2000 kg)
Tires/disc wheel Vehicle load Max. front axle load 4409 lbs (2000 kg)
LT245/75R16 120/116Q Fully laden 360 kPa (3.6 bar/52 psi)

 

Rear axle tire pressures on vehicles with all-wheel/rear wheel drive and Single tires Max. rear axle load 5357 lbs (2430 kg)
Tires/disc wheel Vehicle load Max. rear axle load 5357 lbs (2430 kg)
LT245/75R16 120/116Q Fully laden 480 kPa (4.8 bar/70 psi)
LT245/75R16 120/116Q Partially laden 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi)

 

Front axle tire pressures for vehicles with all-wheel/rear wheel drive and twin tires Max. front axle load 4079 lbs (1850 kg)
Tires/disc wheel Vehicle load Max. front axle load 4079 lbs (1850 kg)
LT215/85R16 115/112Q Fully laden 380 kPa (3.8 bar/55 psi)

 

Max. front axle load 4409 lbs (2000 kg)
Tires/disc wheel Vehicle load Max. front axle load 4409 lbs (2000 kg)
LT215/85R16 115/112Q Fully laden 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi)

 

Max. front axle load 4630 lbs (2100 kg)
Tires/disc wheel Vehicle load Max. front axle load 4630 lbs (2100 kg)
LT215/85R16 115/112Q Fully laden 450 kPa (4.5 bar/65 psi)

 

Rear axle tire pressures for vehicles with all-wheel/rear wheel drive and twin tires Max. rear axle load 7055 lbs (3200 kg)
Tires/disc wheel Vehicle load Max. rear axle load up to 7055 lbs (3200 kg)
LT215/85R16 115/112Q Fully laden 370 kPa (3.7 bar/54 psi)

 

Max. rear axle load 7716 lbs (3500 kg)
Tires/disc wheel Vehicle load Max. rear axle load 7716 lbs (3500 kg)
LT215/85R16 115/112Q Fully laden 400 kPa (4.0 bar/58 psi)

 

Max. rear axle load 7937 lbs (3600 kg)
Tires/disc wheel Vehicle load Max. rear axle load 7937 lbs (3600 kg)
LT215/85R16 115/112Q Fully laden 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi)

 

Front axle tire pressures on vehicles with Super Single tires Max. front axle load 4079 lbs (1850 kg)
Tires/disc wheel Vehicle load Max. front axle load 4079 lbs (1850 kg)
225/75R16C 121/120R (122L) Fully laden 340 kPa (3.4 bar/49 psi)

 

Max. front axle load 4409 lbs (2000 kg)
Tires/disc wheel Vehicle load Max. front axle load 4409 lbs (2000 kg)
225/75R16C 121/120R (122L) Fully laden 370 kPa (3.7 bar/54 psi)

 

Rear axle tire pressures on vehicles with rear wheel drive and Super Single tires Max. rear axle load 7055 lbs (3200 kg)
Tires/disc wheel Vehicle load Max. rear axle load 7055 lbs (3200 kg)
285/65R16C 131R Fully laden 460 kPa (4.6 bar/67 psi)

 

Max. rear axle load 7716 lbs (3500 kg)
Tires/disc wheel Vehicle load Max. rear axle load 7716 lbs (3500 kg)
285/65R16C 131R Fully laden 520 kPa (5.2 bar/75 psi)

 

Overview of the tire pressure for emergency spare wheels

Tire/emergency spare wheel Air pressure In combination with vehicle tires
225/75 R16C 121/120R (122L) 370 kPa (3.7 bar/54 psi) 225/75 R16C 121/120R (122L)
225/75 R16C 121/120R (122L) 690 kPa (6.9 bar/100 psi) 285/65 R16C 131R

 

Tire pressure monitoring system

Function of the tire pressure monitoring system with single tires

The system checks the pressure and temperature of the tires mounted on the vehicle with the aid of a tire pressure sensor. New tire pressure sensors, e.g. in winter tires, are automatically taught-in during the first journey on which they are used. The tire pressure and the tire temperature are shown on the instrument cluster display. If there is a significant loss of tire pressure, a warning is issued:

  • via display messages
  • via the h warning lamp on the instrument cluster

It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure suitable for the operating situation. Set the tire pressure when the tires are cold using a tire pressure gauge. Note that the correct tire pressure for the current operating situation must first be taught-in to the tire pressure monitoring system. In most cases, the tire pressure monitoring system will automatically update the reference values after you have changed the tire pressure. You can, however, also update the reference values manually by restarting the tire pressure monitoring system.

System limits

The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

  • if the tire pressure has been set incorrectly
  • if there is a sudden pressure loss caused, for example, by a foreign object penetrating the tire
  • if there is a malfunction caused by another radio signal source
  • if there is a change of tire size

Bear in mind the following related topic:

  • Notes on tire pressure

Checking the tire pressure with the tire pressure monitoring system

Requirements:

  • The vehicle is switched on.

On-board computer:

One of the following displays appears:

  • The current tire pressure and tire temperature of the individual wheels.

Instrument cluster display (color)

  • The current tire pressure for each wheel.

Instrument cluster display (black and white)

  • Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a few minutes.: the teach-in process of the system is not yet complete. The tire pressures are already being monitored.

 

Restarting the tire pressure monitoring system

Requirements: 

  • The recommended tire pressure is correctly set for the respective operating condition on each of the wheels.
  • Restart the tire pressure monitoring system in the following situations:
    • The tire pressure has changed.
    • The wheels or tires have been changed or newly installed.

On-board computer:

  • Scroll down in the menu. The Use current pressures as new reference values? message appears in the instrument cluster display.
  • Confirm the message to initiate a restart. The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted message appears in the instrument cluster display. Current warning messages are deleted and the  yellow warning lamp goes out. After you have driven for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tire pressures are within the specified range. The current tire pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored.

Loading the vehicle

Tire and Loading Information placard

Only vehicles with a gross vehicle weight of less than 10,000 lbs (4,536 kg) have a Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side.

  • 1 Tire and Loading Information placard

The Tire and Loading Information placard shows:

  • The maximum number of seats indicates the maximum number of occupants permitted to travel in the vehicle.
  • The maximum permissible load equals the gross weight of all vehicle occupants, the luggage and cargo.
  • The recommended tire pressures for cold tires. The recommended tire pressures apply to the maximum permissible load and up to the maximum permissible speed of the vehicle.

Also observe the following information:

  • The information about permissible weights on the vehicle identification plate.
  • The information about tire pressure on the tire pressure table .

Additional related subjects:

  • Determining the maximum load.
  • Notes on tire pressure

Steps to determining the correct critical load

The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 in accordance with the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966."

  • Step 1: Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
  • Step 2: Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
  • Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
  • Step 4: The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
  • Step 5: Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
  • Step 6: If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

In your Operating Instructions or Operator's Manual you will find the vehicle's placard under "Tire and Loading Information placard" and a calculation example for determining the maximum load.

  • Not all vehicles are permitted to tow a trailer. Towing a trailer is only permitted if a trailer hitch is installed. Please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealer if you have any questions about towing a trailer with your vehicle.

Even if you have calculated the total load carefully, you should still make sure that the maximum permissible gross weight and the maximum gross axle weight rating of your vehicle are not exceeded. Details can be found on the vehicle identification plate. Have you loaded vehicle – including driver, occupants and load – weighed on a vehicle weighbridge. The measured values may not exceed the maximum permissible values stated on the vehicle identification plate.

Step 1
  Example 1 Example 2
Combined maximum weight of occupants and load (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)

 

Step 2
  Example 1 Example 2
Number of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants) 5 1
Distribution of the occupants

Front: 2

Rear: 3

Front: 1

 

Weight of occupants

Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg)

Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg)

Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg)

Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg)

Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg)

Occupant 1: 200 lbs (91 kg)

 

Total weight of all occupants 750 lbs (340 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg)

 

Step 3
  Example 1 Example 2
Permissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Information placard minus the gross weight of all occupants) 1500 lbs (680 kg) - 750 lbs (340 kg) = 750 lbs (340 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) - 200 lbs (91 kg) = 1300 lbs (589 kg)

 

Tire labeling

  • 1 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
  • 2 DOT (Department of Transportation), (TIN) Tire Identification Number
  • 3 Maximum tire load
  • 4 Maximum tire pressure
  • 5 Manufacturer
  • 6 Characteristics of the tire
  • 7 Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity and speed rating
  • 8 Tire name

Information on tire quality grades

According to the requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation's "Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards" tire manufacturers must grade their tires using the following three performance factors:

  • 1 Tread wear grade
  • 2 Traction grade
  • 3 Temperature grade

Tread wear grade

The tread wear grade is a comparative grading based on tread wear grade tests conducted under controlled conditions on a specified U.S. Department of Transportation test track. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government test track as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate conditions.

Traction grade

The traction grades – from highest to lowest – are AA, A, B and C. These grades relate to the tire's ability to come to a standstill on a wet pavement under controlled conditions on a specified U.S. government test surface made from asphalt and concrete.

Temperature grade

The temperature grades are A (highest grade), B and C. These relate to a tire's resistance to heat and its ability to release heat on a specified test wheel in laboratory tests under controlled conditions. Sustained high temperatures can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life. In addition, excessively high temperatures can lead to sudden tire failure. Grade C refers to a performance which all passenger vehicle tires must exhibit, according to the U.S. Department of Transportation's requirements.

Information on DOT and TIN (Tire Identification Number)

U.S. tire regulations indicate that every tire manufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on the sidewall of each tire produced.

The TIN is a unique identification number for tires and consists of the following components:

  • DOT (Department of Transportation): tire symbol 1 indicates that the tire complies with the requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation.
  • Manufacturer identification code: manufacturer identification code 2 provides information about the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code with four symbols. For further information about retreaded tires, see.
  • Tire size: identifier 3 describes the tire size.
  • Tire type code: tire type code 4 can be used by the manufacturer as a code to describe specific characteristics of the tire.
  • Date of manufacture: date of manufacture 5 provides information about the age of a tire. The 1st and 2nd numbers indicate the calendar week and the 3rd and 4th numbers indicate the year of manufacture (e.g. "3208" refers to the 32nd week of the year 2008).

Information on maximum tire load

Maximum tire load 1 is the maximum permissible weight for which the tire is approved. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the maximum permissible load. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side.

Information on maximum tire pressure

Maximum permitted tire pressure 1, which is permitted for the tires must not be exceeded. Exception: when using the 225/75 R16C 121/120R (122L) tires as a spare wheel on the rear axle of Super Single vehicles with a distance limit of 62 mi (100 km) and speed limit of 34 mph (55 km/h).

Information on tire characteristics

This information describes the type of tire cord and the number of layers in sidewall 1 and under tire tread 2.

Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity and speed rating

  • 1 First letter(s)
  • 2 Nominal tire width in millimeters
  • 3 Aspect ratio in %
  • 4 Tire code
  • 5 Rim diameter
  • 6 Load-bearing index, Single tires
  • 7 Load-bearing index, twin tires
  • 8 Speed rating

First letter(s) 1:

  • "LT": light truck tires according to US manufacturing standards
  • "C": tires for commercial usage in accordance with European manufacturer standards

Aspect ratio (in percent) 3:

  • The size ratio between the tire height and tire width and is shown in percent (tire height divided by tire width).

Tire code 4 (tire type):

  • "R": radial tire

Rim diameter 5:

  • The diameter of the bead seat (not the diameter of the rim flange). The rim diameter is specified in inches (in).

Load-bearing index 6 and 7:

  • Numerical code which specifies the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire ("91" equals, e.g. 1,356 lb (615 kg)).
  • The tire load-bearing capacity must be at least half the permissible axle load of the vehicle. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the maximum permissible load of the tires.

Speed rating 8:

  • Specifies the approved maximum design speed of the tire.
  • An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h).
  • Ensure that your tires have the required speed rating. You can obtain information on the required speed rating at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Summer Tires

Index Speed Rating
L Up to 75 mph (120 km/h)
M Up to 81 mph (130 km/h)
N Up to 87 mph (140 km/h)
P Up to 93 mph (150 km/h)
Q Up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
R Up to 106 mph (170 km/h)

Summer, All-Season and winter tires

Index Speed Rating
L M+S Up to 75 mph (120 km/h)
N M+S Up to 81 mph (130 km/h)
N M+S Up to 87 mph (140 km/h)
P M+S Up to 93 mph (150 km/h)
Q M+S Up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
R M+S Up to 118 mph (170 km/h)

 

Changing a wheel

Accessories that are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or are not being used correctly, can impair operating safety. Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and inquire about:

  • suitability
  • legal stipulations
  • factory recommendations

Observe the following points when selecting, installing and replacing tires:

  • Use only tires and wheels of the same type, design (winter tires, all-season tires) and make.
  • Only install wheels of the same size and tread design on one axle (left and right). It is only permissible to install a different wheel size to this in the event of a flat tire in order to drive to the specialist workshop.
  • Only install tires of the correct size onto the wheels.
  • Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: all installed wheels must be equipped with functioning sensors for the tire pressure monitoring system.
  • At temperatures below 50 °F (10 °C) use winter tires or all-season tires with the M+S marking on all wheel.
  • Only use tires with the same tread.
  • Observe the maximum permissible speed for the installed tires. If this is below the vehicle's maximum permissible speed, this must be indicated in an appropriate label in the driver's field of vision.
  • Break in new tires at moderate speeds for the first 60 miles (100 km).
  • Replace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear.

Notes on changing wheels

On vehicles that have the same size front and rear wheels, rotate the wheels according to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty book in your vehicle documents. If this is not available, rotate the tires every 3,000 (5,000) to 6,000 miles (10,000 km), depending on the degree of wear. Ensure that the direction of rotation is maintained. It is imperative to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" when doing so.

Size categories of wheels

The determined vehicle speed is displayed in the instrument cluster and is important for controlling the driving safety systems and driving systems. The display accuracy of the speedometer and the odometer is legally prescribed. Determining the speed is dependent on the tire size or the rolling circumference of the tires. The rim diameter is always specified in inches. For this reason, the vehicle control units can be coded for the following wheel size categories: Wheel size category 3

  • 205/75 R16C FA
  • 225/75 R16C FA
  • 285/65 R16C RA
  • LT245/75 R16
  • LT215/85 R16

If you change the wheel size of your vehicle, for instance when changing wheels for winter operation, check it is assigned to the correct wheel size category. If the wheel size category changes, you must have your vehicle's control units recoded at a qualified specialist workshop. Otherwise, the display accuracy of the speedometer and the odometer will be outside the legally prescribed tolerance. It may also be lower, i.e. the current road speed is then higher than the speed shown on the speedometer. If a deviation is outside the range of tolerance, driving safety systems and driving systems may be operationally impaired or may detect a malfunction and switch themselves off.

Information on the direction of the tires' rotation

Tires with a specified direction of rotation have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydroplaning. You will only gain these benefits if the correct direction of rotation is observed. An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates its correct direction of rotation. You may also install a spare wheel against the direction of rotation. Observe the time restriction on use as well as the speed limitation specified on the spare wheel.

Notes on storing wheels

Observe the following when storing wheels:

  • Wheels that have been removed should be stored in a cool, dry and, if possible, dark place. R
  • Protect the tires from oil, grease and fuel.

Overview of tire-change tool kit

Required tire-changing tools may include, for example:

  • Jack
  • Wheel wrench

Vehicles with rear wheel drive

The tire-change tool kit is located in stowage compartment 1 above the step of the front passenger door and in the stowage compartment in the footwell on the front passenger side.

Preparing the vehicle for a wheel change

Requirements:

  • The tire-change tool kit is available.
  • The vehicle is not on a slope.
  • The vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level ground.

Instructions 

  • Apply the parking brake.
  • Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead position.
  • Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position P.
  • Switch off the vehicle.
  • Make sure that the vehicle cannot be switched on. 
  • Take the vehicle tool kit from the footwell on the co-driver side

Vehicles with rear wheel drive

  • Take the jack and the tire-change tool kit out of the stowage compartment.
  • If necessary, remove the wheel trim.
  • Assemble the lug wrench extension using the middle rod and the rod with the largest diameter from the three-piece jack pump lever.
  • Starting with the middle rod, slide the lug wrench extension as far as it will go onto the lug wrench.
  • Using the lug wrench, loosen the wheel nuts or bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the wheel nuts or bolts completely.
  • Raise the vehicle

Raising the vehicle when changing a wheel

Requirements:

  • There are no persons in the vehicle.
  • The vehicle is prepared for changing a wheel.

Only position the jack on the jack support points intended for this purpose. You could otherwise damage the vehicle. Important notes on using the jack:

  • Only use the vehicle-specific jack that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz to raise the vehicle. If the jack is used incorrectly, it could tip over while the vehicle is raised.
  • The jack is designed only to raise the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed and is not suitable for carrying out maintenance work under the vehicle.
  • Avoid changing a wheel on uphill and downhill slopes.
  • The jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. If necessary, use a large, flat, load bearing and non-slip underlay.
  • The foot of the jack must be positioned vertically under the jack support point.

Safety instructions while the vehicle is raised:

  • Do not put your hands or feet under the vehicle.
  • Do not lie underneath the vehicle. 
  • Do not start the vehicle and do not release the parking brake.
  • Do not open or close any doors.

Vehicles with rear wheel drive

Jack support points

Only use the middle rod and the pump lever rod with the largest diameter for the jack as a lug wrench extension. Only insert the middle rod on the lug wrench, and always as far as it will go. Otherwise, the rods could bend and deform so much that they can no longer be used as pump levers for the jack.

  • To prepare the hydraulic jack: insert the third rod of pump lever 1 for the jack into the lug wrench extension.
  • Close pressure release screw 3.
  • To do this, use the flattened section on pump lever 1 to turn pressure release screw 3 clockwise to the stop.
  • Do not turn pressure release screw 3 more than one or two full turns. Hydraulic fluid could otherwise escape.
  • Insert pump lever 1 with the largest rod into the recess on the jack and secure by turning it clockwise.
  • Place the jack vertically beneath the jack support points described below

Jack support point, front axle

Jack support point, rear axle (example: chassis up to 3.5 t)

Jack support point, rear axle (example: panel van and crewbus up to 4.0 t)

Jack support point, rear axle (vehicles 5.0 t)

  • Place the jack beneath the jack support point.
  • Vehicles with all-wheel drive: turn jack spindle 2 counter-clockwise as far as it will go.
  • Raise the vehicle until the tire is raised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) off the ground.
  • Loosen and remove the wheel (/ page 263).

Removing a wheel

Requirements:

  • The vehicle is raised

When changing a wheel, avoid applying any force to the brake discs since this could impair the level of comfort when braking.

  • Unscrew the wheel bolts or nuts with the wheel nut wrench.
  • On front wheels with wheel nuts, remove the wheel nut cover.
  • Remove the wheel.

Installing a new wheel

Requirements:

  • The wheel is removed

When you install the steel spare wheel, it is essential you use short wheel bolts for a steel wheel. Using other wheel bolts when installing the steel spare wheel may damage the brake system.

1 Wheel bolt for alloy wheel

2 Wheel bolt for steel wheel

  • Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact surfaces.
  • Vehicles with ultrawide-base tires: first install the adapter for the more narrow spare wheel on the wheel hub.
  • Slide the wheel which is to be re-install onto the wheel hub or the adapter for the spare wheel and push it on.

Vehicles with steel wheels

  • Use the short wheel bolts intended for the steel spare wheel, which are found in the vehicle tool kit.
  • Screw in the wheel bolts until they are fingertight.

Vehicles with light alloy wheels

  • Use the long wheel bolts intended for the lightalloy spare wheel, which are found in the vehicle tool kit.
  • Screw in the wheel bolts until they are fingertight.

Wheels with wheel nuts

  • Front wheels with wheel nut cover: press the wheel nut cover onto the wheel nuts.
  • Screw in three wheel nuts over the fixing discs of the wheel nut cover.
  • Turn the wheel so that the wheel bolts are in the middle of the holes.
  • Screw in the remaining wheel nuts.
  • Slightly tighten all the wheel nuts.

Lowering the vehicle after a wheel change

Requirements:

  • The new wheel has been installed

Vehicles with rear wheel drive

Only use the middle rod and the pump lever rod with the largest diameter for the jack as a lug wrench extension. Only insert the middle rod on the lug wrench, and always as far as it will go. Otherwise, the rods could bend and deform so much that they can no longer be used as pump levers for the jack.

Vehicles with Super Single tires: if you mount the spare wheel on the rear axle, do not exceed the maximum speed of 34 mph (55 km/h) and the maximum distance of 62 miles (100 km). Otherwise, the rear axle differential could be damaged due to the different wheel speeds.

  • Using the pump lever, slowly turn the drain screw on the jack approximately one revolution and carefully lower the vehicle.
  • Place the jack to one side.
  • Pull the rod with the smallest diameter off the pump lever. The shortened pump lever serves as a lug wrench extension.
  • Starting with the middle rod, slide the lug wrench extension as far as it will go onto the lug wrench.

  • Tighten the wheel bolts or nuts evenly in the sequence indicated (1 to 6).
  • Specified tightening torque:
    • Steel wheel bolts: 177 lb-ft (240 Nm)
    • Wheel nuts: 133 lb-ft (180 Nm)
    • Alloy wheel bolts: 133 lb-ft (180 Nm)
  • Push the piston on the hydraulic jack in again and close the pressure release screw.
  • Vehicles with all-wheel drive: turn the jack spindle clockwise as far as it will go.
  • Wheel with wheel trim: position the opening in the wheel trim for the tire valve over the tire valve.
  • Push the edge of the hub cap onto the wheel rim with both hands until it engages into place. Make sure the hub cap retaining catches engage on the steel wheel.
  • Wheel with central hub cap: position the retaining lugs of the central hub cap over the wheel bolts.
  • Hit the middle of the hub cap to engage it on the wheel.
  • Secure the faulty wheel in the spare wheel holder.
  • Vehicles with Super Single tires: transport the malfunctioning rear wheel in the load area. The rear wheel is too large for the spare wheel holder.
  • Check the tire pressure of the newly installed wheel and adjust it if necessary.
  • Retighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts to the specified tightening torque after the vehicle has been driven 31 miles (50 km).
  • When using a wheel or spare wheel with a new or newly painted wheel rim, have the wheel bolts or wheel nuts retightened after approximately 620 miles (1,000 km) to 3,100 miles (5,000 km).

Spare wheel

Notes on the emergency spare wheel and spare wheel

Emergency spare wheel: wheel and/or tire dimensions as well as the type of tire are different from the wheel to be replaced.

Spare wheel: wheel and tire dimensions as well as the type of tire correspond to the other installed wheels. An installed emergency spare wheel or spare wheel changes the driving characteristics and bears risks.

  • When using an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel (different from the wheel to be replaced), you must not exceed a permissible top speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
  • Have the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel replaced by a qualified specialist workshop.
  • The tire pressure of the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel must be checked before starting a journey and, if necessary, adjusted.

The following should be checked regularly, particularly prior to long journeys:

  • that the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel are firmly secured
  • the tire pressure of the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel (adjust the tire pressure if necessary)
  • the fastenings of the emergency spare wheel holder or spare wheel holder Replace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. This also applies to the spare wheel.

Installing and removing the spare wheel

Vehicles with rear wheel drive: removing the spare wheel (Cargo Van or Passenger Van)

Bolt covers for the safety hooks (example: Cargo Van)

  • Open the rear-end doors.
  • Place a screwdriver into recesses 2 and then pry off covers 1.
  • Using the lug wrench from the vehicle tool kit, unscrew the now visible bolts counter-clockwise by approximately 20 turns.
  • Slightly raise spare wheel carrier 4 and unhook left-hand retaining hook 3.
  • Assemble the pump lever for the jack and slide it into sleeve 5 on the right-hand side of spare wheel carrier 4.
  • Raise spare wheel carrier 4 with the pump lever and unhook right-hand retaining hook 3.
  • Slowly lower spare wheel carrier 4 to the ground.
  • Lift spare wheel carrier 4 slightly and pull the pump lever out of the sleeve.
  • Use the pump lever to lift the spare wheel beyond the rear edge of spare wheel carrier 4.
  • Carefully remove the spare wheel from spare wheel carrier 4. The spare wheel is heavy. When the spare wheel is removed, the center of gravity changes due to the heavy weight of the wheel. The spare wheel may slip down or tip over.

Vehicles with rear wheel drive: installing the spare wheel (Cargo Van or Passenger Van)

  • Carefully place the spare wheel onto spare wheel carrier 4. The spare wheel is heavy. When you place the spare wheel onto spare wheel carrier 4, the center of gravity changes due to the weight of the wheel. The spare wheel may slip down or tip over.
  • Slide the pump lever for the jack into sleeve 5 on spare wheel carrier 4.
  • Raise spare wheel carrier 4 with the pump lever and attach right-hand retaining hook 3.
  • Slightly raise spare wheel carrier 4 and attach left-hand retaining hook 3.
  • Pull the pump lever out of sleeve 5.
  • Using the lug wrench, tighten safety hook bolts 3 by turning them clockwise.
  • Replace and engage covers 1. 
  • Close the rear-end doors.

Vehicles with rear wheel drive: removing the spare wheel (vehicle with lowered chassis)

Bolt covers for the safety hooks (example: Cargo Van)

  • Open the rear-end doors.
  • Place a screwdriver into recesses 2 and then pry off covers 1.
  • Using the lug wrench from the vehicle tool kit, unscrew the now visible bolts counter-clockwise by approximately 20 turns.
  • Slightly raise spare wheel carrier 4 and unhook left-hand retaining hook 3.
  • Assemble the pump lever for the jack and slide it into sleeve 5 on the right-hand side of spare wheel carrier 4.
  • Raise the spare wheel carrier with the pump lever and unhook right-hand retaining hook 3.
  • Prepare the jack.
  • Place the jack beneath the corresponding jack support point.
  • Move the pump lever up and down until the tire is raised a maximum of 1.18 in (3 cm) off the ground.
  • Carefully remove the spare wheel from spare wheel carrier 4. The spare wheel is heavy. When the spare wheel is removed, the center of gravity changes due to the heavy weight of the wheel. The spare wheel may slip down or tip over.
  • Install the spare wheel on the vehicle.
  • Lower the vehicle.

Vehicles with rear wheel drive: installing the spare wheel (vehicle with lowered chassis)

  • Carefully place the spare wheel onto spare wheel carrier 4. The spare wheel is heavy. When you place the spare wheel onto spare wheel carrier 4, the center of gravity changes due to the weight of the wheel. The spare wheel may slip down or tip over.
  • Slide the pump lever for the jack into sleeve 5 on spare wheel carrier 4.
  • Raise spare wheel carrier 4 with the pump lever and attach right-hand retaining hook 3.
  • Slightly raise spare wheel carrier 4 and attach left-hand retaining hook 3.
  • Pull the pump lever out of sleeve 5.
  • Using the lug wrench, tighten safety hook bolts 3 by turning them clockwise.
  • Replace and engage covers 1.
  • Close the rear-end doors.

Vehicles with rear wheel drive: removing the spare wheel (chassis)

  • Loosen wing nuts 3 manually and then remove them.
  • Loosen nuts 2 as far as the thread end.
  • Slightly raise spare wheel carrier 4 and unhook left-hand retaining hook 1.
  • Assemble the pump lever for the jack and slide it into sleeve on the right-hand side of spare wheel carrier 4.
  • Raise spare wheel carrier 4 with the pump lever and unhook right-hand retaining hook 1.
  • Slowly lower spare wheel carrier 4 to the ground.
  • Lift spare wheel carrier 4 slightly and pull the pump lever out of the sleeve.
  • Use the pump lever to lift the spare wheel beyond the rear edge of the spare wheel carrier.
  • Carefully remove the spare wheel from the spare wheel carrier. The spare wheel is heavy. When the spare wheel is removed, the center of gravity changes due to the heavy weight of the wheel. The spare wheel may slip down or tip over.

Vehicles with rear wheel drive: installing the spare wheel (chassis)

  • Carefully place the spare wheel onto spare wheel carrier 4. The spare wheel is heavy. When you place the spare wheel onto the spare wheel carrier, the center of gravity changes due to the weight of the wheel. The spare wheel may slip down or tip over.
  • Slide the pump lever for the jack into the sleeve on spare wheel carrier 4 .
  • Raise spare wheel carrier 4 with the pump lever and attach right-hand retaining hook 1 .
  • Slightly raise the spare wheel carrier and attach left-hand retaining hook 1 .
  • Pull the pump lever out of the sleeve.
  • Tighten nuts 2.
  • Put wing nuts 3 in place and tighten them.

Technical Data

Vehicle identification plate, vehicle identification number (VIN) and engine number

Vehicle identification plate

Depending on the vehicle model, the vehicle identification plate is located on the seat base of the driver's seat or on the B-pillar.

Vehicle identification plate (example: USA, complete vehicles)

  • 1 Vehicle manufacturer
  • 2 VIN (vehicle identification number)
  • 3 Permissible gross mass
  • 4 Gross combination mass rating
  • 5 Permissible front axle load
  • 6 Permissible rear axle load
  • 7 Date of manufacture
  • 8 Paint code

Vehicle identification plate (example: USA, incomplete vehicles)

  • 1 Vehicle manufacturer
  • 2 VIN (vehicle identification number)
  • 3 Permissible gross mass
  • 4 Gross combination mass rating
  • 5 Permissible front axle load
  • 6 Permissible rear axle load
  • 7 Date of manufacture
  • 8 Paint code

Vehicle identification plate (example: Canada, complete vehicles)

  • 1 Vehicle manufacturer
  • 2 VIN (vehicle identification number)
  • 3 Permissible gross mass
  • 4 Gross combination mass rating
  • 5 Permissible front axle load
  • 6 Permissible rear axle load
  • 7 Date of manufacture
  • 8 Paint code

Vehicle identification plate (example: Canada, incomplete vehicles)

  • 1 Vehicle manufacturer
  • 2 VIN (vehicle identification number)
  • 3 Permissible gross mass
  • 4 Gross combination mass rating
  • 5 Permissible front axle load
  • 6 Permissible rear axle load
  • 7 Date of manufacture
  • 8 Paint code

The maximum permissible gross vehicle mass is made up of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the fuel and the load. The maximum gross axle weight rating is the maximum weight that can be carried by one axle (front‑ or rear axle). Do not exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle mass or the maximum gross axle weight rating for the front or‑ rear axle.

The vehicle identification plate may also contain the following data:

  • Payload
  • Empty weight
  • Number of passenger seats

VIN engraved underneath the hood

Engraved VIN 1 is located underneath the hood.

VIN below the windshield

The VIN is also attached as label on the lower section of the windshield 2.

Emission Control Information label

Example: Emission Control Information label

Engine number

The engine number is stamped onto the crankcase. You can obtain further information from a qualified specialist workshop.

Operating fluids and capacities

Notes on operating fluids

Operating fluids include the following:

  • Fuels
  • Exhaust gas aftertreatment additives, e.g. DEF
  • Lubricants
  • Coolant
  • Brake fluid
  • Windshield cleaning agent
  • Climate control system refrigerants

Only use products which have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Damage to the vehicle caused by the use of products that have not been approved is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz guarantee or goodwill gestures. You can identify operating fluids approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscriptions on the container:

  • MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
  • MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)

Fuel

Notes on additives in gasoline

In some countries, the available fuel may not contain sufficient amounts of additives. Deposits could build up in the fuel injection system as a result. In this case, in consultation with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, the fuel should be mixed with the cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz. You must observe the notes and mixing ratios indicated on the container.

Notes on fuel quality for vehicles with diesel engines

Usually you will find information about the fuel quality on the fuel dispenser. If there is no identification on the fuel dispenser, consult a gas station attendant. The fuel quality recommended for your vehicle is found on the information label in the fuel filler flap.

Notes on low outside temperatures

Refill only with commercially available ULTRA-LOW SULFUR DIESEL (ULSD, maximum sulfur content 15 ppm), which fulfills the ASTM D975 standard. The flow properties of diesel fuel may be inadequate at low outside temperatures due to paraffin separation.

  • Malfunctions resulting from paraffin separation can only be rectified by heating the entire fuel system. Park the vehicle in a heated garage, for example.

To prevent malfunctions, diesel fuel with improved flow characteristics is available in the winter months. You can obtain further information on this at the gas station or from your fuel supplier. Your vehicle is equipped with a fuel preheating system. This additionally improves the flow characteristics of the diesel fuel by about 14.5°F (8°C). ULTRA-LOW SULFUR DIESEL can be used without risk of malfunction down to an outside temperature of approximately 14.5°F (-10°C)

DEF (vehicles with a diesel engine only)

If you open the DEF® tank, small amounts of ammonia vapor may be released. Do not inhale any ammonia vapors that may be released. Only fill the DEF® tank in well-ventilated areas.

Exhaust gas aftertreatment: The vehicle must be operated with DEF® if the exhaust gas aftertreatment system is to function correctly. If you operate the vehicle without DEF® or with emissions-relevant malfunctions, the legal operating permit is invalidated. The vehicle could be prohibited from public road use by an official ordinance. It may be improper or punishable in some countries to operate a vehicle that uses no DEF® or one that does not comply with the specifications of this operator's manual. Engine management monitors the exhaust gas aftertreatment components for compliance with emissions laws and regulations. If you attempt to operate the vehicle without DEF®, with diluted DEF® or with a different reducing agent, this will be detected by the engine management. Other emissions-relevant malfunctions, e.g. metering malfunctions or sensor errors, are also detected and logged. The engine management system subsequently prevents the engine being restarted after issuing a warning message. Therefore refill DEF® tank regularly during vehicle operation or, at the latest, after receiving the first warning message via the instrument cluster.

DEF® consumption and filling quantity

DEF® consumption

Like fuel consumption, DEF® consumption is highly dependent upon driving style and operating conditions. DEF® consumption is usually within a range of 0 and 10% of the fuel consumption. If necessary, DEF® must be refilled in accordance with the instructions when the refill message is displayed in the instrument cluster. This may also be necessary between the scheduled maintenance.

  • Was this article helpful?